JP6471303B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a spinning machine (slot machine), a ball game machine (pachinko machine), and the like.

  A game table provided with a plurality of presentation means has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the operation of the production means.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in the operation of the rendering means.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with operating means and a plurality of effecting means, wherein the operating means is means provided at a position where a player can contact, One directing means among the directing means is a first directing means, one directing means among the multiple directing means is a second directing means, and the second directing means is a moving If there is an operation of the operation means in a state where the confirmation operation of the second effect means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”) is being performed, The confirmation operation (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) of the production means is started , the first operation and the second operation can be performed in parallel, and the second operation is executed. even operation of the operating means in a certain state are, said second operation is continued, it A gaming table characterized.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the operation of the rendering means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. The block diagram of a game machine is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a liquid-crystal control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a liquid-crystal control part. (C) It is a flowchart of a liquid crystal control part timer interruption process. (D) It is a flowchart of a VDP image control process. It is explanatory drawing of the movable body provided in the front frame door. It is a disassembled perspective view of the permeation | transmission part unit 700, and a perspective view of the drive unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a drive unit. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a drive unit. It is explanatory drawing of a chance button. It is explanatory drawing of a chance button. It is explanatory drawing of a display body. It is explanatory drawing of control data. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a permeation | transmission part unit. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a permeation | transmission part unit. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a permeation | transmission part unit. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. It is a flowchart of the example of a process which a 1st sub control part performs. It is a flowchart of the example of a process which a 1st sub control part performs. It is a flowchart of the example of a process which a 1st sub control part performs. It is a schematic front view of another example game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a part structure of the game board of FIG. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is explanatory drawing of a clearance gap. It is a figure which shows aspects, such as at the time of transportation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of a light emission unit. It is explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of a shielding apparatus. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the operation | movement order of a movable body. It is a flowchart of the example of a process which a 2nd sub control part performs. It is a flowchart of the example of a process which a 2nd sub control part performs. It is a flowchart of the example of a process which a 2nd sub control part performs. It is explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body control process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the door side production movable body control process performed in the 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the door side production movable body control process at the time of power activation performed by the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 equivalent to one Embodiment of this invention is opened. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 is opened in the 1st modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 is opened in the 2nd modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the front frame door 106 is opened at the time of power activation in the 3rd modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the power-on operation described with reference to FIG. 76. In the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 75, it is a figure which shows a mode when a power failure and a power recovery are performed instantaneously while the door side production movable body is operating. (A) is a sectional side view of the whole chance button 700 in the initial position. (B) It is side sectional drawing of the whole chance button 700 in an operation completion position. (C) It is side sectional drawing of the whole chance button 700 when a player depresses the chance button 700 in the operation completion position. (D)-(f) It is the figure which extracted and showed only the lower case 704b and the rotation member 708b in each state of (a)-(c). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray in the state (in operation) where the chance button 700 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between an operation state of a chance button 700, whether a detection result of a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is accepted, and whether an operation reception effect is executable. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray in case the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 exists in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 before operation | movement. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 after completion | finish of operation | movement. FIG. 10 is a front view of a chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of a second operation unit 758. (A) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position. (B) It is side sectional drawing of the chance button 750 in case the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (C) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (B) It is an external perspective view of the periphery of the bet button 132 in a state where the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). (C) It is an external appearance perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which can use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which cannot use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (C) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 exists in an initial position. (A) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). FIG. 6B is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (C) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the normal production. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 exists in an operation completion position. (G) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). It is the figure which showed an example of various productions. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at a mode that each of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 of the pachinko machine 100 which is one Embodiment of 1st invention was open | released from the front side (player side). It is a disassembled perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 is open | released. An example of a case where the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178 in a state where the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102 but the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104. FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 100 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of simultaneous power activation by island equipment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case the inner frame 104 is open | released during production operation in steps. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104 in stages. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the example shown to FIG. 104 and FIG. 105 in steps. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the example shown to FIG. 104 and FIG. 105 in steps. The second modified example shown in FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a door opening error occurs and the effect movable body that continues the operation according to the effect data is replaced with the effect movable body in which the operation is prohibited. It is. It is a figure which shows an example in case a door body is open | released in the state in which the production | presentation movable body exists in the position which shifted | deviated from the initial position with external force. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the inner frame 104 is open | released during the production | generation operation | movement of the movable body different from what was demonstrated so far as the door side production movable body 2241 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 110 in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. A table summarizing main errors other than door opening errors. It is a figure which shows an example in case a 2nd error has generate | occur | produced during production operation in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 116 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 117 in steps. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118 in stages. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which prohibits the operation | movement according to the production data of the door side production | generation movable body 2241 even if an error generation timing is before the operation start timing. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of powering off and confirming an electric power supply instantaneously during confirmation operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 121 in steps. It is a figure showing the modification of board side production movable body 2242. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display design of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration design, (c) Shows an example of a normal stop display symbol, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a conventional decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is 1st. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which shows the state (the 1) which the production movable body 224 moved to the front of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic front view which shows the state (the 2) which the production movable body 224 moved to the front of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a disassembled perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a front view of the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is a rear view of the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the rear view and fragmentary sectional view of the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of production (the 2) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 3). It is a figure which shows the example of the production in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 4). It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 5). It is a figure which shows the example of the production in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 6). It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is the figure which showed an example of the movement aspect of (a)-(d) movable body. (E) It is the figure which showed the modification of the shape of a movable body. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the movement start opportunity of the movable body CB. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the movement start of the movable body CB. It is the time chart which showed an example of the movement timing of the movable body CB. It is the state transition diagram which showed an example of the operation state of a movable body. (A)-(k) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the initial operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (L)-(p) It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(k) It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(h) It is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(h) It is the figure which showed the specific example 5 of the initial operation | movement of a movable body in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the basic concept of the control which can be performed by the game stand which concerns on this embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of operation | movement of a movable body. It is the figure which showed the flow of the presentation control which concerns on Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of the presentation control which concerns on Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of the production control which concerns on Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 8 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the flow of presentation control which concerns on Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of presentation control which concerns on Example 1- Example 11. FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The present invention is applicable to various game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In addition, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by credit.

The following embodiments are roughly divided into three embodiments, Embodiments A to C, but the embodiments, examples, modifications, and the like included in the embodiments can be appropriately combined with each other. is there. In addition, the code | symbol which shows each structure is used uniformly only in the embodiment A, B, or C. Therefore, for example, the same reference numerals as those in the embodiment A may be used as the reference numerals indicating the other configurations in the embodiment B.
<Embodiment A>
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a game stand frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit, and a button unit 190. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 The ball is paid out to the player according to the configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main control board case 158 that houses the main control board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs the control processing of the entire game, and effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-control board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing related to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 A first sub-control board case 162 that houses a second sub-control board 164, a liquid crystal control board case 682 that houses a liquid crystal control board 680 that constitutes a liquid crystal control unit 700 that performs liquid crystal control processing, and a game ball payout A payout control board 170 that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing and includes an error release switch 168 that releases an error by an operation of a game shop clerk A payout control board case 172 to be delivered, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power management section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines. A power supply board that houses a power supply board 182 that is configured and includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 A case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided. The CR interface unit 186 has a CR unit connection unit configured by, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector, and transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection unit. Yes.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when the gaming board 200 is exchanged, the gaming board 200 is exchanged while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. The However, since it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer depending on the model, the pachinko machine 100 is connected to the relay board 196 from the front (front) side of the pachinko machine 100 when the game board 200 is removed. You may be comprised so that the connection condition of can be grasped | ascertained.

  Further, a volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided at the upper left in the drawing of the first sub control board case 162. The volume adjustment switch 192 is constituted by a rotary switch, for example.

  As described above, the main control board 156, the first sub control board 160, the second sub control board 164, and the liquid crystal control board 680 are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model. 170, the launch board 174, and the power board 182 are provided in the outer frame 102 because they are commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 and a movable display device 288 at substantially the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display device. A symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The movable display device 288 is also a display device for performing various displays used for production. In the present embodiment, the movable display device 288 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, but, for example, similar to the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a dot matrix display device, 7 Other display devices including a segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. The movable display device 288 includes a motor (not shown), is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the motor, and covers at least a part of the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 when lowered.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, the effect movable body 224, and the movable display device 288.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

The movable display device 288 is a device that displays an effect and is movable. Therefore, in the following description, as the display device, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be referred to as a first display device (main liquid crystal display device), and the movable display device 288 may be referred to as a second display device (sub liquid crystal display device). . Further, it may be referred to as a (production) movable body together with the shielding device 246 and the production movable body 224 simulating a human arm.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and various devices according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. In response to the first sub-control unit 400 to be controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 mainly controlling the production based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that performs launch control of game balls, a power supply control unit 660 that controls power supplied to the pachinko machine 100, and a liquid crystal control unit 700 And is composed of.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a counter circuit (random value generation circuit) 318 (a random number generation circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A driving circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214; A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the pattern display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp) 220, a high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) and a drive circuit 330 for performing display control and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 to be driven is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the game table frame lamp 122). A circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 246, a button detection sensor 426 and various sensors 430 that detect pressing of the chance button 136 and the pressing of the button unit 190, and various sensors 430 and button detection. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected. The effect movable body 246 may include a movable object (movable body) provided on the front frame door 106 side, a movable portion of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, and the like.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like, and an effect movable body. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal from the sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a basic circuit 502, and a game board lamp drive circuit 530, Are connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication. The effect movable body 224 may include a movable object (movable body) provided on the game board 200.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<LCD controller>

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and temporarily stores data with the CPU 704 that controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the control command. A RAM 708, a control program and data for controlling the entire liquid crystal control unit 700, a ROM 506 storing image display data, and the like, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 710. The CPU 704 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 714B as a system clock, reads out image data stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and uses the work area of the VRAM 718. A display image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.
<Block diagram of the game console>

  With reference to FIG. 5, the connection relationship of each board (control board) of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The figure shows (control) substrates, etc., a display device, a movable body, etc. constituting the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, the payout control unit 600, the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the like. FIG.

  On the game board 200 side, the pachinko machine 100 has a board substrate 200b on the main control board 156, a first sub-control board 160, symbol display boards 212, 214, 210, 328, a special figure 1 start port sensor 230, and a special figure 2 start. The mouth sensor 232 is connected. The valve surface relay substrate 200a is connected to the surface substrate 200b. Various sensors 320 and solenoids 332 are connected to the panel relay board 200a. Thereby, it is detected by the ball detection sensor that the game ball has entered the general winning opening (winning opening) 226, the ordinary drawing starting opening (gate) 228, the first special figure starting opening 230 and the second starting opening 232. In this case, the switch signal is transmitted to the main control unit 300. In addition, a solenoid signal for opening and closing the second special figure starting port (ordinary electric accessory) 232 is transmitted from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. In addition, a solenoid signal for opening and closing the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 (large winning port) is transmitted from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. In addition, a count signal for counting the number of balls is transmitted from the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening) to the main control unit 300.

  In addition, a liquid crystal control board 680 is connected to the first sub control board 160, and a decorative symbol display device (main liquid crystal display device) 208 and a movable display device (sub liquid crystal display device) 288 are connected to the liquid crystal control board 680. . The second sub-control board 164 is connected to the first sub-control board 160, and the second sub-control board 164 is connected to the sub liquid crystal movable portion 2241 (the movable portion of the movable display device 288) and the movable object M on the panel surface side. (The production movable body 244, the shielding device 246, etc.) and the board surface side illumination board 200c on which the game board lamp 532 is mounted are connected.

  As a result, the first sub control board 160 performs control according to a command from the main control board 156, and the liquid crystal control board 680 and the second sub control board 164 perform control according to a command from the first sub control board 160. Specifically, the processing information (command signal) generated by the main control unit 300 is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the processing information or the processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 is the liquid crystal control unit. 700 and the second sub-control unit 500. For example, data for driving the effect movable body 224, data for lighting emission of the effect movable body 224, data for driving the movable display device 288, and the like are transmitted from the first sub control board 160 to the second sub control board 164. The In addition, data or a clock signal for causing the game board 200 side to emit light is transmitted from the drive circuit 516 of the second sub-control unit 500 to the board surface side illumination board 724. Also, signals for display control of the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the common figure display device 210, and the various status display units 328 are transmitted from the respective drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Further, the control data of the first sub control board 160 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 680, and the image data is transmitted to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with an inner frame relay board 104b, an inner frame peripheral board 104c, and a board frame relay board 104d on the main body 104 side, and relays the board on the game board 200 side and the board on the main body 104 side. Connecting.

  The inner frame relay board 104 b is connected to the main control board 156 and the payout control board 170. Thereby, for example, a command signal related to payout control (for example, information for payout and communication with the external terminal board 104a) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600, and the main control unit 300 receives the payout control unit 600. The error information of the discharge system is transmitted to Further, the inner frame peripheral board 104c connects the first sub control board 160 and the power supply board 104e, and the panel frame relay board 104d is a button 136 and button for buttons provided on the first sub control board 160 and the front frame door 106. The lamps 138 and 418, the door-side movable accessory 106a, the door-side illumination board 106b on which the various lamps 418 are mounted, and the speaker 120 are connected via the door-side illumination board 106b. The button 136 may include a chance button or the like. The door-side movable accessory 106a can include a movable object (movable body) provided on the front frame door 106 side.

  As a result, data and clock signals for causing the various lamps 418 to emit light are transmitted from the drive circuit 420 of the first sub-control unit 400 to the door side illumination board 106b. Audio data is transmitted from the sound source IC 416 to the speaker 120. In addition, the detection result of the button detection sensor 426 and the like by the operation of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

The payout control board 170 is connected to the payout sensor 604, the payout motor 602, the glass frame switch 104g, the inner frame switch 104f, the game ball lending device connection board 104h, the power supply board 104e, and the launch control board 104j. Opening / closing of the front frame door 106 and opening / closing of the inner frame (main body 104) are detected by the glass frame switch 104g and the inner frame switch 104f and can be recognized by the main control board 156. The launch control board 104j is connected to the glass frame relay board 104k. The glass frame relay board 104k is connected to the handle relay board 106d, the full switch 106g, and the frequency display board 106h. A firing volume 106c, a firing stop switch 106f, and a touch sensor 106e are connected to the firing handle substrate 106d.
<Type of design>

  6A to 6C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 6B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG.6 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 7 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. judge. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the general symbol A shown in FIG. 6C) or the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 6C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 6A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the second variable prize opening 235 (until the first variable prize opening 234 in the case of FIG. 1) detects a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls). The door member 235a (the door member 234a in the case of the special figure 1) is connected to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a (the door member 234a of the first variable prize winning opening 234 in the case of the special figure 1). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (in the case of FIG. 1) is connected to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 (in the case of FIG. 1, the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234). In addition, a signal for holding the door member 234a) in the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the first variable winning port 234 (or the second variable winning port 235), and via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. Moreover, initialization of each movable body is also performed and the setting can be made into a 1st state.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area is 33 (33 ms) or more. This process is repeated until the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33, and the value of the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. When it becomes, it transfers to the process of step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable CNT. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as indicated by 33, 33, and 34 every time the process proceeds from step S303 to step S305.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command from the main control unit 300, a command from the second sub control unit 500, and a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 have been received, and processes them.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. Further, an effect lottery process is performed based on a command from the main control unit 300, and a liquid crystal command and a box data setting process (described later) for setting parts data at a predetermined position are performed. If there is part data in the position after receiving the return command (described later), the part data to be transmitted to the speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, effect movable body 246, 224, etc. is set.

  If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. For example, a command is output so that notification (for example, production) by the speaker 120 is executed when the notification condition is satisfied. In addition, a command is output so that notification by the speaker 120 (for example, notification for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality) is executed when an abnormality notification condition related to detection of fraud or failure is established. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. For example, when the light emission conditions of the various lamps 418 are satisfied, a command for the light emission is output.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the movable body in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. As the movable body, a movable body (rotary body) in the shielding device 246 and the chance button 136 can be cited, and another movable body described later can also be included. ,

  In step S321, if the effect data read out in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 or a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, a setting for outputting this control command is performed. Return to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process to obtain the original timer variable. Store in the storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as indicated by 33, 33, and 34 each time the process proceeds from step S703 to step S707.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable CNT. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 122, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the movable object M on the board side (the movable part 2441 of the movable display device 288, the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, etc.), this command is issued. The data is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is set to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Add and store in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Processing of Liquid Crystal Control Unit 700>

  Next, processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of VDP image processing.

  First, in step S1001 of FIG. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S1001. In this initialization process, initialization of the input / output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 708, and the like are performed. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the timer variable CNT is 33 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S1005. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as 33, 33, and 34 each time the process proceeds from step S1003 to step S1005.

  In step S1005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable CNT. In step S1007, command processing is performed. The CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S1009, a VDP command transmission process is performed. For example, when there is an image display instruction from the first sub-control unit 400, a command is transmitted to the VDP 710 to cause the VDP 710 to perform image control processing.

  In step S1011, return command transmission processing is performed. When the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 or the movable display device 288 to display the requested image, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 and returns to step S1003.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the liquid crystal control unit 700 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 708.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). The timer interrupt processing is triggered by the timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

  In step S1201 of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 708 described in step S1003 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the original timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

  In step S1203 of the liquid crystal controller timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of the VDP 710 that has received a command in the VDP command transmission process of step S1009 in the liquid crystal controller main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S1301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 704 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 718. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the movable display device 288. Next, the CPU 704 sets ROM coordinates (transfer address of the CGROM 716), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 718), etc., in the attribute register of the VDP 710 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the CGROM 716 to the VRAM 7186. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 710 transfers image data from the CGROM 716 to the VRAM 718 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 710 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 704.

  In step S1303, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 710. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1305; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S1305, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 718 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 710 in step S1301, the CPU 704 displays information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 718). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 718. The VDP 718 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S1307, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 710 to start drawing an image. The VDP 710 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 704.

In step S1309, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 710 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1311. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S1311, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Other structural examples of movable body>

Next, an example of a movable body applicable to the pachinko machine 100 will be described. First, examples of movable bodies applicable to door bodies such as the front frame door 106 and the door 108 with a ball storage tray will be described, and then examples of movable bodies applicable to the game board 200 will be described. Furthermore, the movable body mounted on the movable body will be described. In the drawings used for the following description, the same reference numerals are given to configurations corresponding to the configurations of the pachinko machine 100 described in FIGS.
<Example of movable body applicable to door>

  12A is provided with a front frame door 106 ′ and a ball storage tray door 108 ′ in place of the front frame door 106 and the ball storage tray door 108. The front frame door 106 ′ is provided with a transmission unit 700 ′ as a movable body. The transmission unit 700 ′ may be configured to replace the transparent plate member 118 described above. The door 108 ′ with a ball storage tray is provided with a chance button 700 and a display body 900 as movable bodies. The chance button 700 is also configured to replace the above-described chance button 136.

  FIG. 12A shows a case where the transmission unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are in the initial state, and these movable bodies can operate from this initial state. In the case of this embodiment, the state of the movable body is based on the position of all or part of the movable body, and the initial state means that the position of the movable body is the initial position. Therefore, the initial state may be referred to as an initial position. The movement of the movable body includes a case where the entire position changes, or a case where a part of the position changes. When the position of a part of the movable body changes, the posture of the movable body may change.

  FIG. 12B shows a state in which the transmission unit 700 ′ has moved to the maximum movement position. In the present embodiment, the transmission unit 700 ′ is movable between the initial position in FIG. 12A and the maximum movement position in FIG. In the case of this embodiment, the movement of the transmission unit 700 ′ is a rotation around its lower part, and the transmission unit 700 ′ has an initial position in FIG. 12 (a) and a maximum movement position in FIG. 12 (b). The posture changes between. The transmission unit 700 ′ is provided at a position where the player can contact, and functions as a button (a part of the switch) that can be operated by the player in the state of FIG.

  FIG. 12C shows a state where the chance button 700 has moved to the maximum movement position. In the present embodiment, the chance button 700 is movable between the initial position in FIG. 12A and the maximum movement position in FIG. In the case of this embodiment, the movement of the chance button 700 is a vertical movement. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can contact, and functions as a button (a part of the switch) that can be operated by the player in this embodiment.

FIG. 12D shows a state in which the display body 900 has moved to the maximum movement position. In the present embodiment, the display body 900 is movable between the initial position in FIG. 12A and the maximum movement position in FIG. In the present embodiment, the movement of the display body 900 is rotation. The display 900 is provided at a position where the player cannot contact.
<Transmission unit 700 '>

  The transmissive unit 700 ′ will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the transmission unit 700 ′ and a perspective view of the drive unit 830 ′ of the transmission unit 700 ′. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the drive unit 830 ′. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the drive unit 830 ′.

  The transmission unit 700 ′ includes a transmission unit 702 ′, an LED substrate 706 ′, a base unit 708 ′, a protective plate 710 ′, a decorative member 712 ′, a follower 714 ′, a link member 716 ′, and a drive It has a shaft 718 'and a fixing portion 720'.

  The transmissive portion 702 ′ is a glass plate or a resin transparent plate disposed on the rearmost surface (game board side) of the transmissive portion unit 700 ′. The above-described decorative symbol display device 208 of the game board 200 is visually recognized by the player through the transmission portion 702 ′.

  The LED substrate 706 ′ is formed by mounting a plurality of LED groups 706A ′ to 706D ′ mainly emitting toward the center of the ring on the inner periphery of a substantially annular substrate, and is fitted on the outer periphery of the transmission portion 702 ′. It is. In the LED group 706A ′, several LEDs are juxtaposed in the circumferential direction of the substrate at a position corresponding to the upper part of the transmission part 702 ′, and the LED group 706B ′ is in a position corresponding to the right part of the transmission part 702 ′. The LED group 706C ′ is in a position corresponding to the lower part of the transmissive part 702 ′, the LED group 706D ′ is in a position corresponding to the left part of the transmissive part 702 ′, and several LEDs are arranged in the circumferential direction of the substrate. It is installed.

  The protection plate 710 ′ is made of, for example, a glass plate or a resin transparent plate, and is disposed on the front surface of the base portion 702 ′ to protect the LED substrate 706 ′ and the transmission portion 702 ′. The decorative member 712 'is a substantially annular member disposed on the forefront (player side).

  The base portion 708 ′ is attached with a decorative member 712 ′, a protective plate 710 ′, an LED substrate 706 ′, and a transmission portion 702 ′, and supports these so as to be integrally movable by the drive unit 830 ′. It is a member. A guide shaft 708A ′ that engages with a guide hole (not shown here) of the drive unit 830 ′ is provided at the upper end of the base portion 708 ′. In addition, a drive shaft insertion portion 708B ′ is provided at the lower end portion of the base portion 708 ′. The drive shaft insertion portion 708B ′ is attached to the fixing portion 720 ′ via the fixing member 722 ′. The fixing part 720 ′ is a member that fixes the transmission part unit 700 ′ to the front frame door 106 ′, and has insertion holes 720A ′ at both ends thereof. The drive shaft 718 ′ is inserted through the insertion hole 720A ′ of the fixed portion 720 ′ and the drive shaft insertion portion 708B ′ of the base portion 708 ′. As a result, the upper portion of the base portion 708 'can move in the front-rear direction along the guide hole of the drive unit 730', and as a whole, moves between the initial position and the maximum movement position about the drive shaft 718 ' Rotation).

  A follower 714 ′ is attached to the side surface of the base portion 708 ′ with a link member 716 ′. The link member 716 ′ fixes the base member 708 ′ to be movable with respect to the follower 714 ′. More specifically, when the base portion 708 ′ starts to move from the initial position to the maximum movement position, the follower portion 714 ′ does not move, but only the base portion 708 ′ moves first, but the base portion 708 ′ is predetermined. When moved to the position (front end of the follower 714 '), the link member 716' is engaged with the follower 714 ', and thereafter, the follower 714' and the base 708 'are both moved forward. It has become. As the base portion 708 ′ moves in the front-rear direction, the LED board 706 ′ also moves in the front-rear direction.

  The drive unit 830 ′ includes a first drive unit (stepping motor) 838 ′, a second drive unit 852 ′, and a first gear in a housing formed of a substantially hexagonal main body 836 ′ and a lid body 834 ′ that are almost semicircular. 840 ′, second gear 842 ′, third gear 860 ′, driving force transmitting portion 864 ′, driving force transmitted portion 866 ′, urging member 868 ′, driven portion 848 ′, stopper 854 ′ and the like are accommodated. Is housed inside the front frame door 106 '.

  A circular first gear (drive gear) 840 ′ for transmitting the drive force of the first drive unit 838 ′ is attached to the drive shaft of the first drive unit 838 ′. The first gear 840 ′ meshes with the second gear 842 ′. The second gear 842 is a double spur gear, and an inner gear (not shown) provided on the back side meshes with the third gear 860 ′. The third gear 860 ′ is also a double spur gear, and the inner gear meshes with a gear 864a ′ provided in the driving force transmission portion 864 ′. Accordingly, the driving force of the first driving unit 838 ′ is transmitted to the driving force transmitted unit 866 ′ via the first gear 840 ′, the second gear 842 ′, the third gear 860 ′, and the driving force transmitting unit 864 ′. . The driving force transmitting portion 864 ′ is engaged with one end of an arm-shaped driving force receiving portion 866 ′ by an engaging shaft 846 ′. When the driving force transmitting portion 864 ′ rotates, the driving force receiving portion 864 ′ rotates. The transmission unit 866 'also rotates along the rotation. A driven portion 848 ′ is integrally provided at the other end of the driving force transmitted portion 866 ′. The follower 848 ′ has an insertion hole 848a ′ that is long in the arm direction when viewed from above, and the guide shaft 708A ′ of the transmission unit 700 ′ is inserted through the insertion hole 848a ′. The urging member 868 ′ contains a spring therein and urges the driving force transmitted portion 866 ′ toward the front of the pachinko machine 100.

  The stopper 854 ′ is attached to the main body 836 ′ so as to be movable in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, and restricts the movement of the driven portion 848 ′ at a predetermined position (for example, the rightmost end position in the moving direction). By moving, the follower 848 'can be moved. The stopper 854 ′ has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, and a rack 854 a ′ is provided on a part of one side thereof. The second driving unit 852 ′ is, for example, a stepping motor that drives the stopper 854 ′, and a circular driving gear 852a ′ for transmitting the driving force of the second driving unit 852 ′ is attached to a driving shaft (not shown). . The drive gear 852a ′ meshes with the rack 854a ′ of the stopper 854 ′ to drive the stopper 854 ′. Further, a guide hole 832 ′ through which the guide shaft 708 A ′ can move in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100 is provided on the bottom surface of the main body 836 ′.

  With reference to FIG. 15, how the transmission unit 700 ′ is driven by the drive unit 830 ′ will be described. FIG. 15 is a top view showing a state of the drive unit 830 ′ that moves the transmission unit 700 ′ from the initial position to the maximum movement position. FIG. 15A shows the drive unit 830 ′ with the transmission unit 700 ′ in the initial position, and FIG. 15B shows the drive unit 830 ′ with the transmission unit 700 ′ in the moving position. FIG. 15C shows the drive unit 830 ′ in a state where the transmission unit 700 ′ is at the maximum movement position. In FIG. 15, the upward direction in the figure is the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 100, and the downward direction in the figure is the front side of the pachinko machine 100 ′.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position, the driven unit 848 ′ is positioned at the rear end of the moving range in the front-rear direction (the back side of the pachinko machine 100). Further, at this position, the driven portion 848 ′ is urged in the forward direction of the pachinko machine 100 by an urging member 868 ′ that comes into contact with the driving force transmitted portion 866 ′. On the other hand, the driven portion 848 ′ abuts against a stopper 854 ′ that is urged by the urging member (spring) 854 b ′ and is moved to the rightmost end, and movement in the forward direction is restricted. In this state, the guide shaft 708A ′ that engages with the insertion hole 848a ′ of the driven portion 848 ′ is located at the rear end 832B ′ of the guide hole 832 ′.

  The driving force transmitted portion 866 'includes a detection piece (position detection piece) 848c' on the back side thereof, and the main body 836 'has a first position detection sensor (initial position detection sensor) 858a', A second position detection sensor (maximum movement position detection sensor) 858b ′ is provided. These sensors function as sensors capable of detecting the transmission unit 700 ′, and the detection result is input to the first sub-control unit 400, for example. When the first position detection sensor 858a ′ detects the detection piece 848c ′, the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position, and the second position detection sensor 858b ′ detects the detection piece. By detecting 848c ′, the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700 ′ is at the maximum movement position.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, when a predetermined condition is established and the second drive unit 852 ′ is driven and the drive gear 852a ′ rotates counterclockwise, the stopper 854 ′ moves to the left, It is separated from the driven portion 848 '(not in contact). The driven portion 848 ′ whose movement restriction by the stopper 854 ′ is released rotates counterclockwise around the engagement shaft 846 ′ with the driving force transmission portion 864 ′ by the urging force of the urging member 868 ′. As a result, the guide shaft 708A ′ that is inserted into and engaged with the insertion hole 848a ′ of the driven portion 848 ′ moves in the direction of the front end portion 832F ′ along the guide hole 832 ′. Accordingly, the base portion 708 ′ connected to the guide shaft 708A ′ starts to rotate (move) forward about the drive shaft 718 ′. When the restriction of movement by the stopper 854 ′ is released, the driven portion 848 ′ increases in speed by the urging force (repulsive force) of the urging member 868 ′ and moves forward. In this state, the first position detection sensor (initial position detection sensor) 858a ′ cannot detect the detection piece 848c ′.

  As shown in FIG. 15C, when the transmission unit 700 ′ is at the maximum movement position, the driven unit 848 ′ is located at the front end of the movement range in the front-rear direction (front side of the pachinko machine 100). In this state, the guide shaft 708A ′ that is inserted into and inserted into the insertion hole 848a ′ of the driven portion 848 ′ is located at the front end portion 832F ′ of the guide hole 832 ′.

  In this state, the second position detection sensor 858b ′ detects the detection piece 848c ′, so that the first sub-control unit 400 ′ grasps that the transmission unit 700 ′ is at the maximum movement position.

  After the transmission unit 700 ′ has moved to the maximum movement position, the player can return the transmission unit 700 ′ to the initial position by pushing the transmission unit 700 ′ backward. The presence or absence of such a player's operation can be detected from the detection result of the first position detection sensor 858a ', and the transmission unit 700' can function as a button that can be operated by the player.

  When a predetermined period of time elapses after the player presses a predetermined operation button or the operation unit 700 ′ moves to the maximum movement position regardless of the player's operation (the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the predetermined period For example, when the detection piece 848c ′ is detected by the second position detection sensor 858b ′), the first driving unit 838 ′ is driven to rotate the driving force transmitted unit 866 ′ clockwise. Thus, the driven portion 848 ′ may be moved to the initial position shown in FIG. Along with the movement of the driven portion 848 ′, the guide shaft 708A ′ moves toward the rear end portion 832B ′ of the guide hole 832 ′, thereby returning the transmission unit 700 ′ to the initial position.

When the driven portion 848 ′ returns to the initial position, the driving force transmitted portion 866 ′ comes into contact with and pushes the biasing member 868 ′. When the driven unit 848 ′ returns to the initial position, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the detection piece 848c ′ by the first position detection sensor 858a ′, and moves the stopper 854 ′ to the right again to move the driven unit 848 ′. Regulate the movement of The movement of the stopper 854 ′ in the right direction, for example, releases the driving force of the second driving unit 852 ′ that has moved the stopper 854 ′ in the left direction against the biasing force of the biasing member 854b ′, and biases it. The urging force of the member 854b ′ may be used to move rightward, and in addition to the urging force of the urging member 854b ′, the driving force that causes the stopper 854 ′ to move rightward by the second driving unit 852 ′. May be added.
<Chance button 700>

  The chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16A is an external perspective view when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 16B is an external perspective view when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position (in operation). c) is an external perspective view when the chance button 700 is at the maximum movement position. 17A is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, FIG. 17B is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the maximum movement position, and FIG. 17C is a chance at the maximum movement position. FIG. 6 is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the button 700. FIGS. 17D to 17F are views showing only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b extracted in each state of FIGS. 17A to 17C.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the chance button 700 includes a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 ′ with a ball storage tray and a movable portion 704 movable up and down with respect to the fixed portion 702. (704a, 704b), a spring 706 that is contracted between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 ′ with a ball storage tray to urge the movable portion 704 upward, and the movable portion 704 can be moved up and down. Drive unit 708 (708a, 708b) and a detection unit 710 capable of detecting the position of the movable unit 704. Although not shown, the chance button lamp described above is disposed at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

  The fixed portion 702 is constituted by two rod-shaped fixed shafts 702a erected on the door 108 ′ with a ball storage tray, and a disk-shaped fixed plate 702b fixed to the tips of the two fixed shafts 702a. Has been. As shown in FIG. 17D, the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into insertion holes 704b1 formed in the lower case 704b described later and guide the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of regulating the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has an opening on one side and the upper case 704a having a cylindrical shape, which is an operation surface 704a1 on which the player's finger or hand contacts, and an upper portion so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. A disc-shaped lower case 704b fixed to the case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 17D to 17F, in the lower case 704b, two insertion holes 704b1 that are inserted through the fixed shafts 702a and a center through which a rotation member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later is inserted. An insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 protruding toward the center of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as a base end, and a detection protruding downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as a base end A piece 704b4 is formed.

  The drive unit 708 includes a drive source 708a configured by a motor, a solenoid, and the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b that is driven to rotate about the axis by the drive source 708a. A concave groove 708b1 is linearly formed from one side of the longitudinal direction to the other side of a part of the outer edge of the rotating member 708b, and the lower case 704b1 is engaged with the lower case 704b1 at the lower end side thereof. An engaging recess 708b2 that can engage with the piece 704b3 is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 17D, the rotating member 708b is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 706 by engaging the engaging recess 708b2 with the engaging piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. As shown in FIG. 17E, the engagement between the engagement recess 708b2 and the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b is released, so that the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706. It is possible to rotate between a permission position that allows movement upward by a force.

  The detection unit 710 includes an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is configured such that the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b can advance and retreat between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit. The detection result of the detection unit 710 is input to the first sub control unit 400, for example.

  Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where the movable unit 704 is not pressed downward (the chance button 700 is pressed) as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and (b). The state in which the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b has not entered between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710) and the movable unit 704 is lower as shown in FIG. (The state in which the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b enters between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710).

  The detection unit 710A includes an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is configured to receive reflected light from the side surface of the upper case 704a of the light of the light projecting unit. The detection unit 710A functions as a sensor that can detect the chance button 700, and the detection result of the detection unit 710A is input to the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  The first sub-control unit 400 can determine whether or not the chance button 700 is in the initial position based on the detection result of the detection unit 710A. That is, when the Chang button 700 is at the initial position, this is detected by the detection unit 710A, and when it is at the maximum movement position, the chance button 700 is not detected by the detection unit 710A except when the button is pressed. Whether or not the button is pressed when in the maximum movement position can be determined by combining with the detection result of the detection unit 710.

  In the initial position shown in FIG. 17A and FIG. 16A, the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permitted position to the restricting position, and the movable portion 704 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating member 708. It is possible to move only to In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710 so that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  In the maximum movement position shown in FIGS. 17B and 16C, the rotating member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable part 704 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and the spring 706 is moved. It moves upward by the urging force, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, is again restricted from moving upward, and can move only downward. Even in this maximum movement position, as shown in FIG. 17C, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 17C is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the maximum movement position shown in FIGS. 17B and 16C. In this embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed to near the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to move the rotating member 708b from the permitted position to the restricted position. The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG. However, a driving mechanism that returns the chance button 700 to the initial position regardless of the player's pressing may be provided. The drive mechanism can be composed of, for example, a motor and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor to the upper case 704a and the like, and is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, for example. Hereinafter, such a drive mechanism may be referred to as a chance button return mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the state during the operation shown in FIG. 16B, that is, the chance button 700 is changed from the initial position shown in FIGS. 17A and 16A to FIGS. In the state of moving to the maximum movement position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 Is ignored (the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is not determined to be valid).

  With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the chance button 700 during the operation of the chance button 700, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at an unintended timing by the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700. However, the pressing operation during the operation of the chance button 700 may be validated.

In addition, when the chance button is pressed before the operation of the chance button (when the chance button is pressed before the detection is accepted), the pressing operation of the chance button may be ignored. The pressing operation may be validated. In addition, when the chance button pressing operation is valid, the chance button may be operated, or the chance button may not be operated. In these cases, the chance button can be accepted, or the chance button can be accepted.
<Display body 900>

  The display body 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram of the display body 900, and FIG. 18B is a development view of an image formed on the peripheral surface of the display body 900.

  The display body 900 has a cylindrical shape, and is provided so as to be rotatable about its central axis 900a. The display body 900 is covered with a cover 903 having transparency and is accommodated in the door 108 ′ with a ball storage tray, so that the player cannot make contact.

  A drive unit 901 such as a stepping motor is disposed on one end surface side of the display body 900, and the display body 900 rotates around the central axis 900a by the rotational force of the drive unit 901. In addition, a detection piece 900 b is provided on one end surface of the display body 900. A sensor 902 is disposed on one end face side of the display body 900. The sensor 902 is an optical sensor including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and detects the rotational position of the display body 900 when the detection piece 900b passes between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. In the case of this embodiment, the position of the display body 900 when the detection piece 900b is detected by the sensor 902 is set as the initial position. The sensor 902 functions as a sensor capable of detecting the display body 900, and the detection result is input to the first sub control unit 400, for example. When the sensor 902 detects the detection piece 900b, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the display body 900 is in the initial position. The drive unit 901 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, four images IM1 to IM4 are formed on the surface of the display body 900 by printing, stickers, or the like. The image IM1 is an image having no star symbol, and the images IM2 to IM4 are images having different numbers of star symbols. One of the images can be displayed by controlling the amount of rotation of the display body 900 by the drive unit 901. Alternatively, the display body 900 can be continuously rotated.

When the display body 900 is in the initial position, the image IM1 is displayed through the cover 903. When the display body 900 is at the maximum movement position, the image IM2 is displayed through the cover 903. The display body 900 has a structure that can be rotated in both directions. However, when viewed in one direction indicated by an arrow, the display body 900 rotates between the display position of the image IM2 when the display position of the image IM1 is a starting point. Since the amount is maximum, the display position of the image IM2 is referred to as the maximum movement position.
<Initial operation and return operation>

The transmissive unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are all movable bodies, and their normal operation is desired. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initial operation is performed to operate the pachinko machine 100 according to a predetermined procedure, thereby confirming the operation. Further, when trouble is detected in the operation during a game or the like, a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position is performed. This promotes continuation of the game in normal operation. In particular, since the transmission unit 700 ′ and the chance button 700 are exposed to the outside so that the player can contact them, if dust or the like is caught in the surrounding gaps, it may cause malfunction. There are cases where the operation can be improved by performing the return operation. Although the display body 900 is relatively less likely to get dust or the like as much as it is not exposed to the outside, the display body 900 may also suffer from a malfunction. There are cases where the operation can be improved by performing the return operation.
<Initial operation and return operation of transmission unit 700 '>

  An example of the initial operation and the return operation of the transmission unit 700 ′ will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram of control data for controlling the operation of the transmission unit 700 ′. There are a plurality of types of operations of the transmission unit 700 ′, and each is managed by a number. In the example of FIG. 19, a part (No. 1 to No. 5) is shown, and the processing order, target coordinates, and movement time are defined. The processing order defines the order of each operation when performing a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations. Target coordinates define the position of the destination. The movement time defines a time limit for moving from the current position to the target coordinates.

  No. The operation 1 is a single operation in which the target coordinate is set to 0 and the movement time is set to 1000 msec. A target coordinate of 0 means an initial position. No. The first operation is positioned as a return operation for returning the transmission unit 700 ′ to the initial position, and may be distinguished from an effect operation such as a notice effect. The return operation may be a series of operations in which the transmission unit 700 ′ is once moved to the maximum movement position and returned to the initial position.

  No. The second operation is a series of operations including a plurality of operations. In the operation in the processing order 1, the target coordinate is set to 100 and the moving time is set to 1000 msec. A target coordinate of 100 means the maximum movement position. In the operation in the processing order 2, the target coordinate is set to 0 and the moving time is set to 1000 msec. No. The second operation is positioned as an initial operation for moving the transmission unit 700 ′ to the maximum movement position and then returning to the initial position, and may be distinguished from an effect operation such as a notice effect.

  No. The operation 3 is a single operation in which the target coordinate is 100 and the movement time is 1000 msec. No. The operation No. 3 is positioned as an effect operation (for example, a notice effect) for moving the transmission unit 700 ′ to the maximum movement position.

  No. The operation 4 is a single operation in which the target coordinate is set to 0 and the movement time is set to 5000 msec. No. The operation of No. 4 After the performance operation of 3, the player does not push back the transmissive unit 700 ′ and is positioned as a non-operating operation that automatically returns the transmissive unit 700 ′ to the initial position.

  No. The operation 5 is a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations, and is positioned as another effect operation (for example, reciprocation, vibration, etc.).

  FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically illustrating an operation example of the transmission unit 700 ′. 20 (a) to 20 (c) show No. 1 when the power is turned on. 2 shows a case where the initial operation 2 is performed.

  FIG. 20A shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the drive unit 830 ′ when power is turned on. The second operation is executed. FIG. 20B shows a stage in which the operation in the processing order 1 is executed, and the transmission unit 700 ′ moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 20 (c) shows a stage where the operation in the processing order 2 is executed, and the transmission unit 700 ′ returns to the initial position. By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the transmission unit 700 ′. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. In some cases, the operation can be confirmed more reliably by giving priority to completing the initial operation.

  20 (d) to (i) show Nos. 1 shows a case where a return operation of 1 is performed. FIG. 20 (d) shows a stage where the transmission unit 700 ′ is not operating (stage of initial position). In FIG. 3 shows a case where the effect operation of 3 is performed, and shows a case where the transmission unit 700 ′ has moved to the maximum movement position. When the player performs an operation of returning the transmission unit 700 ′ to the initial position using the effect operation as a notice effect, a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect or the like) can be performed. The predetermined effect can be performed using the decorative symbol display device 208, for example.

  In FIG. 4 shows a case where an operation at the time of non-operation is performed. That is, no. It is assumed that the player has not operated the transmission unit 700 ′ after the third performance operation.

  FIG. 4, it is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a ′ does not detect that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position, and the transmission unit 700 ′ is moved due to some trouble. It is assumed that it was interrupted. For example, motor out-of-step or foreign object biting may be considered as the cause.

  Corresponding to this, in the stage of FIG. Perform a return operation of 1. That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed at least on the condition that it is detected that the transmission unit 700 ′ is not returned to the initial position but returned. It should be noted that conditions other than not being detected as being in the initial position may be weighted.

  By this returning operation, the movement of the transmission unit 700 ′ resumes and returns to the initial position. In FIG. 20I, the first position detection sensor 858a ′ detects that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position. . Thus, there are cases where the transmissive unit 700 ′ can be returned to a normal operating state by the returning operation.

  21 (a) to (j) are No. 1 shows the case where the return operation of 1 was performed but not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set on the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Here, the return operation is performed three times, but if the transmission unit 700 ′ does not return to the initial position, the return is given up and the operation of the transmission unit 700 ′ is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the transmission unit 700 'cannot produce an effect, but the game itself is continued.

  FIG. 21A shows a stage where the transmission unit 700 ′ has not yet been produced. In FIG. 3 shows a case where the effect operation of 3 is performed, and shows a case where the transmission unit 700 ′ has moved to the maximum movement position. In FIG. 4 shows a case where an operation at the time of non-operation is performed. That is, no. It is assumed that the player has not operated the transmission unit 700 ′ after the third performance operation. In the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the operation is interrupted by the transmission unit 700 ′ biting the foreign object G.

  In FIG. 4, it is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a ′ does not detect that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time 4. In FIG. 21E, the first return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a ′ does not detect that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position after the lapse of one movement time. In FIG. 21G, the second return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a ′ does not detect that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position after the lapse of one movement time. In FIG. 21 (i), the third return operation is performed correspondingly.

  In FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a ′ does not detect that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position after the lapse of one movement time. Although the return operation is performed three times, the transmission unit 700 ′ does not return to the initial position. Therefore, the operation is prohibited by giving up the return and setting the operation disabled state of the transmission unit 700 ′.

  22A to 22E illustrate a case where the operation prohibition state of the transmission unit 700 ′ is set and the operation prohibition state is canceled and the return operation is enabled when a predetermined condition is satisfied. doing. Here, the predetermined condition is the opening of the front frame door 106 ', for example, the opening is detected by the glass frame switch 104g described above.

  FIG. 22A shows a stage where the operation prohibition state of the transmission unit 700 ′ is set. FIG. 22B shows a state where the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 22 (c) shows a state where the hall clerk has opened the front frame door 106 ′. Thereby, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the transmission unit 700 ′ is canceled. The number of return operations is also reset to zero.

  Corresponding to this, in FIG. Perform a return operation of 1. By this returning operation, the transmission unit 700 ′ returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 22E, the first position detection sensor 858a ′ detects that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position. Thus, there is a case where the transmission unit 700 ′ can be returned to a normal operation state by releasing the operation prohibition state by opening the front frame door 106 ′ and performing a return operation performed using this release as a trigger.

  22F to 22J illustrate a case where the operation prohibition state is canceled and the return operation is enabled on condition that the main body (inner frame) 104 is opened. The opening of the main body 104 is detected by, for example, the inner frame switch 104f described above.

  FIG. 22F shows a stage where the operation prohibition state of the transmission unit 700 ′ is set. FIG. 22 (g) shows a state where the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 22H shows a state where the hall clerk has opened the main body 104. Thereby, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the transmission unit 700 ′ is canceled. The number of return operations is also reset to zero.

Corresponding to this, in FIG. Perform a return operation of 1. By this returning operation, the transmission unit 700 ′ returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 22J, the first position detection sensor 858a ′ detects that the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position. Thus, there is a case where the transmission unit 700 ′ can be returned to a normal operation state by releasing the operation prohibition state by opening the main body 104 and a return operation executed in response to the release. Note that the number of return operations may be reset according to requirements other than the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102, or may be performed when the operation is not prohibited.
<Initial operation and return operation of chance button 700>

  The initial operation and return operation of the chance button 700 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmission unit 700 ′, and the initial operation and return of the chance button 700 are based on the control data as shown in FIG. The action is executed. A brief description is given below.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram schematically illustrating an operation example of the chance button 700. FIGS. 23A to 23C show a case where the initial operation of the chance button 700 is performed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 23A shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the drive unit 708 when the power is turned on, and moves the chance button 700 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the chance button return mechanism to return the chance button 700 to the initial position. By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, the operation of the chance button 700 may be confirmed. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. In some cases, the operation can be confirmed more reliably by giving priority to completing the initial operation.

  FIGS. 23D to 23I show a case where the return operation of the chance button 700 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 23D shows a stage where the chance button 700 is not operated (stage at the initial position).

  FIG. 23E shows a case where the chance button 700 is subsequently moved to the maximum movement position as an effect operation. FIG. 23 (f) shows a case where an operation for returning the chance button 700 to the initial position is performed as an operation during non-operation thereafter. That is, it is assumed that the player has not operated the chance button 700 after the production operation.

  FIG. 23 (g) assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time set in the non-operation operation of FIG. 23 (f) has elapsed. It is assumed that the movement of the chance button 700 is interrupted due to some trouble. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or the biting of foreign matter can be considered as the cause.

  Correspondingly, a return operation is performed in the stage of FIG. In other words, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed at least on the condition that it is detected that the chance button 700 is returned to the initial position but not returned. It should be noted that conditions other than not being detected as being in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is performed in accordance with the No. of the transmission unit 700 ′. Similar to the operation 1, the operation returns the chance button 700 to the initial position. Travel time is limited.

  By this returning operation, the movement of the chance button 700 is resumed and returns to the initial position. In FIG. 23 (i), the detection unit 710A detects that the chance button 700 is in the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the chance button 700 can be returned to a normal operation state by the return operation.

  24A to 24J show a case where the return operation of the chance button 700 is performed but is not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set on the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Although the return operation is performed three times here, if the chance button 700 does not return to the initial position, the return is given up and the operation of the chance button 700 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the play by the chance button 700 cannot be performed, but the game itself is continued.

  The limit number of return operations may be the same or different for the transmission unit 700 ′ and the chance button 700. In the case of different numbers, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires the number of return operations, and the limit number may be set smaller for a configuration that does not require the number of times of return operation.

  FIG. 24A shows a stage where the chance button 700 is not yet produced. FIG. 24B shows a case where the effect operation is performed thereafter, and shows a case where the chance button 700 has moved to the maximum movement position. FIG. 24C shows a case where an operation at the time of non-operation is performed thereafter. That is, it is assumed that the player does not operate the chance button 700 after the effect operation of FIG. In the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the chance button 700 bites the foreign object G and the operation is interrupted.

  FIG. 24D assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time of the non-operating operation in FIG. 24C has elapsed. In FIG. 24E, the first return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 24F assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 24G, the second return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 24H assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 24 (i), the third return operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 24J assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. The return operation was performed three times, but the chance button 700 did not return to the initial position. Therefore, the return is given up and the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is set to prohibit the operation.

  FIGS. 25A to 25E illustrate a case where the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is set, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation prohibition state is canceled and the return operation is enabled. Yes. Here, the predetermined condition is the opening of the front frame door 106 ', for example, the opening is detected by the glass frame switch 104g described above.

  FIG. 25A shows a stage where the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is set. FIG. 25B shows a state where the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 25C shows a state where the hall clerk has opened the front frame door 106 ′. Thereby, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is cancelled. The number of return operations is also reset to zero.

  In response to this, in FIG. 25D, the return operation of the chance button 700 is performed. By this returning operation, the chance button 700 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 25E, it is detected by the detection unit 710A that the chance button 700 is in the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the chance button 700 can be returned to the normal operation state by releasing the operation prohibition state by opening the front frame door 106 'and the return operation executed in response to the release.

  25 (f) to 25 (j) exemplify a case where the operation prohibition state is canceled and the return operation is enabled on condition that the main body (inner frame) 104 is opened. The opening of the main body 104 is detected by, for example, the inner frame switch 104f described above.

  FIG. 25 (f) shows a stage where the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is set. FIG. 25G shows a state where the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 25H shows a state where the hall clerk has opened the main body 104. Thereby, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is cancelled. The number of return operations is also reset to zero.

In response to this, in FIG. 25 (i), the return operation of the chance button 700 is performed. By this return operation, the chance button 700 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 25J, it is detected by the detection unit 710A that the chance button 700 is in the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the chance button 700 can be returned to a normal operation state by releasing the operation prohibition state by opening the main body 104 and the return operation executed with this release as a trigger. Note that the number of return operations may be reset according to requirements other than the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102, or may be performed when the operation is not prohibited.
<Initial operation and return operation of display 900>

  The initial operation and return operation of the display body 900 can be performed in the same manner as in the case of the transmissive unit 700 ′ and the chance button 700. As an initial operation of the display body 900, rotation of the display body 900 is started, and after at least one rotation, the rotation is stopped when the sensor 902 first detects and the display body 900 is positioned at the initial position. Can be mentioned. The returning operation includes starting the rotation of the display body 900 and stopping the rotation when the sensor 902 first detects the position to place the display body 900 in the initial position.

When the return operation of the display body 900 reaches the maximum number of times, the operation prohibited state of the display body 900 can be set. For the display 900, the operation prohibited state may not be released by opening the doors such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102, the operation prohibited state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. Good. Since the display body 900 is disposed at a position where it does not contact the player, even if the operation is prohibited, there may be a relatively little discomfort given to the player, and the display body 900 is accommodated in the ball storage tray door 108 '. This is because it may not be easy for hall clerk to remove obstacles such as biting. Of course, the operation prohibition state can be canceled or the number of return operations can be reset by opening the doors such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102.
<Example of operation control of movable body>

  An example of operation control of the transmissive unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display body 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, an example in which the first sub-control unit 400 executes drive control of the drive unit 830 ′ of the transmission unit 700 ′, the drive unit 708 and chance button return mechanism of the chance button 700, and the drive unit 901 of the display body 900. Assumed. FIG. 26A shows an example of processing included in the movable body control processing in S319 of FIG.

  In S1401, a first movable body control process is performed. Here, processing relating to operation control of the transmission unit 700 ′ is performed. In S1402, a second movable body control process is performed. Here, processing relating to operation control of the chance button 700 is performed. In S1403, a third movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to operation control of the display 900 is performed.

  Here, the control states of the transmission unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are individually set for operation control. The control state includes at least first to fourth states. The first state is a state when the power is turned on, and is a state where execution of an initial operation is set. The second state is a state in which execution of the return operation is set. The third state is a standby state in which no operation is performed. The fourth state is a state in which an operation prohibition state is set.

  FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing the first movable body control process of S1401. In S1411, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set in the transmission unit 700 ′. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1418; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1412. In S1412, it is determined whether or not the first state is set in the transmission unit 700 ′. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1413. Otherwise, the process proceeds to S1414.

  In step S1413, settings relating to execution of the initial operation (driving settings and the like) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1414, it is determined whether or not the second state is set in the transmission unit 700 ′. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1415; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1416.

  In step S1415, settings related to execution of the return operation (drive setting and the like) and processing related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1416, it is determined whether or not the third state is set in the transmission unit 700 ′. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1417, and if not, the process proceeds to S1418. In step S1417, command-related processing (processing related to a command return value, a received command, etc.) is performed.

  In S1418, it is determined whether or not a state change condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to S1419. If not satisfied, one unit of processing is terminated. In S1418 and S1419, processing for updating the control state of the transmission unit 700 ′ is performed. For example, the third state is set when the initial operation ends, the return operation ends, or when the rendering operation ends. If it is detected that the transmission unit 700 ′ is not returned to the initial position, the second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit number, the fourth state is set. When the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106 ′ or the main body 104 is detected, the second state is set and the number of return operations is reset.

  FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing the second movable body control process in S1402. In S1421, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set for the chance button 700. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1428; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1422. In S1422, it is determined whether or not the first state is set for the chance button 700. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1423; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1414.

  In S <b> 1423, settings relating to the execution of the initial operation (drive setting, etc.) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation has been successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1424, it is determined whether or not the second state is set for the chance button 700. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1425. Otherwise, the process proceeds to S1426.

  In step S1425, settings relating to execution of the return operation (drive setting and the like) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation has been successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1426, it is determined whether or not the third state is set for the chance button 700. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1427. Otherwise, the process proceeds to S1428. In S1427, command-related processing (processing related to a command return value, a received command, etc.) is performed.

  In S1428, it is determined whether or not a state change condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to S1429. If not satisfied, one unit of processing is terminated. In S1428 and S1429, processing for updating the control state of the chance button 700 is performed. For example, the third state is set when the initial operation ends, the return operation ends, or when the rendering operation ends. If it is detected that the chance button 700 has been returned to the initial position but has not been returned, the second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit number, the fourth state is set. When the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106 ′ or the main body 104 is detected, the second state is set and the number of return operations is reset.

  FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the third movable body control process in S1403. In S1431, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set in the display body 900. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1438, and if not, the process proceeds to S1432. In S1432, it is determined whether or not the first state is set in the display body 900. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1433; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1414.

  In step S1433, settings relating to execution of the initial operation (drive setting, etc.) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1434, it is determined whether or not the second state is set in the display body 900. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1435; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1436.

  In S1435, settings relating to execution of the return operation (drive setting, etc.) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1436, it is determined whether or not the third state is set in the display body 900. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1437; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1438. In S1437, command-related processing (processing related to a command return value, a received command, etc.) is performed.

  In S1438, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to S1439. If not satisfied, one unit of processing is terminated. In S1438 and S1439, processing for updating the control state of the display 900 is performed. For example, the third state is set when the initial operation ends, the return operation ends, or when the rendering operation ends. When it is detected that the display body 900 has been returned to the initial position but has not been returned, the second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit number, the fourth state is set. On the other hand, unlike the case of the transmission unit 700 ′ and the chance button 700, even when the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106 ′ or the main body 104 is detected, the first state is set or the number of return operations is reset. You can avoid it.

  Next, control of a driving source (here, a stepping motor as an example) for driving the transmission unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display 900 will be described with reference to FIG. 28A and 28B show the interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG.

  With reference to Fig.28 (a), in S1441, the process which outputs a signal from a motor driver to a motor is performed. As a result, the motor is driven. In S1442, sensor detection processing is performed. Here, the detection results of the sensors that detect the transmission unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are acquired. In S1443, other processing is performed. Thus, one unit of the first drive interrupt process is completed.

  Referring to FIG. 28B, in S1444, a motor control process for the operation of the transmission unit 700 ′ is performed, in S1445, a motor control process for the operation of the chance button 700 is performed, and in S1446, the operation of the display body 900 is performed. The motor control process for is performed. Thus, one unit of the second drive interrupt process is completed.

  Each motor control process of S1444 to S1446 is the same process, but as an example, the motor control process of S1444 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1451, it is determined whether or not it is a pulse output timing for the step motor. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1452, and if not, the process proceeds to S1456. In S1452, it is determined whether or not the moving direction of the transmission unit 700 ′ is the origin direction. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1453, and if not, the process proceeds to S1454. In S1453, one virtual position of the transmission unit 700 ′ is subtracted, and in S1454, one virtual position of the transmission unit 700 ′ is added. In S1455, a pulse and a direction signal are output.

In S1456, it is determined whether or not the step motor is stopped. If it is determined that it has stopped, the process proceeds to S1457, and the pulse output is stopped. In S1458, it is determined from the detection result of the sensor whether or not the transmission unit 700 ′ is in the initial position. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1459, and the virtual position is set to 0. If not applicable, one unit of processing is terminated.
<Example of movable body applicable to game board>

  FIG. 29 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 ′ that replaces the game board 200 described above. 30 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the configuration of the game board 200 ′, and FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG. The game board 200 ′ omits the movable display device 288 of the game board 200, but is provided with a movable body 1, a movable body 2, a light emitting effect unit 3, and a decoration unit 4. Is the same. The game board 200 ′ includes the movable bodies 1 and 2, the doors 246a and 246b described above, and the effect movable body 224 as movable bodies. 29 and 31 show a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are located at the initial position.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the decoration unit 4 is a lamp unit configured by arranging two 7-segment displays side by side, and is fixedly disposed at the upper center of the decoration symbol display device 208. In the case of the present embodiment, the decoration unit 4 is configured by a 7-segment display, but is not limited thereto, and may be an electronic display of another type, or a display other than the electronic display (for example, printed matter, three-dimensional display). Thing). For example, at least a part of the decoration unit may be transparent or translucent, and the light emitting element may be arranged at a position behind the decoration unit. In some cases, the decoration effect can be improved by illuminating the decoration unit by light emission of the light emitting element.

  The movable body 1 constitutes a display body having a family crest image printed on the surface. The movable body 1 may be an engraved three-dimensional shape instead of printing an image, or may be a display such as a 7-segment display or a liquid crystal display, or a doll or the like It may be.

  The movable body 1 is provided so as to be able to reciprocate in the vertical direction, and is located behind the decoration unit 4 at the initial position, and is located on the display area of the decoration symbol display device 208 at the maximum movement position. In the case of this embodiment, the movable body 1 as a whole is located behind the decoration unit 4 at the initial position and is difficult to see from the player. May be able to surprise you. In addition, only a part of the movable body 1 may be located behind the decoration unit 4 at the initial position, or the whole of the movable body 1 may be exposed.

  The movable body 2 is a display device capable of performing various displays used for production. In the present embodiment, the movable body 2 is configured by a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The movable body 2 is provided so as to be able to reciprocate in the vertical direction, and is positioned below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position and positioned on the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the maximum movement position. . In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 2 is partly located behind the game board 200a forming the skeleton of the game board 200 ′ at the initial position, and is difficult for the player to see. However, the entire movable body 2 may be located behind the game board 200a at the initial position, or the entire movable body 2 may be exposed.

  The doors 246a and 246b and the effect movable body 224 are as outlined above, but the effect movable body 224 has the position shown in FIG. 29 as the initial position and the position shown in FIG. It is a movable body that is always exposed and part of which is not hidden.

  The light emitting effect unit 3 includes a change panel 31 and light emitting units 32 and 33 that can emit light. The change panel 31 is a square and plate-like member, and is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the shape of the change panel 31 is not limited to a square, and may be a circle or the like. Moreover, members other than plate shape may be sufficient.

  The light emitting unit 32 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 32 a arranged in a line along the side of the change panel 31. The light emitting element 32a is, for example, an LED. The light emitting unit 33 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 33 a arranged in a line along the lower side of the change panel 31. The light emitting element 33a is, for example, an LED. The position of the light emitting unit is not limited to this, and an arbitrary position around the change panel 31 can be selected. However, you may arrange | position in places other than the upper end of the change panel 31. FIG. Thereby, the space above the change panel 31 may be used for other purposes.

  The change panel 31 is composed of a light guide member, and can change the direction of light emitted from the light emitting units 32 and 33 to at least the front side (player direction). The change in the direction of light can be achieved, for example, by forming a cut surface that reflects light or by providing a reflective material. Further, it is possible to make an image appear on the change panel 31 by the arrangement of the configuration that changes the direction of light. FIGS. 38A to 38C show examples of effects produced by the light emission effect unit 3.

  FIG. 38A shows a state in which the light emitting units 32 and 33 are turned off. In this case, when viewed from the player, the change panel 31 can see the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind it.

  FIG. 38B shows a state where the light emitting unit 32 is turned on and the light emitting unit 33 is turned off. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 32 is incident laterally from the left side of the change panel 31, the light direction is changed by approximately 90 degrees by reflection, and is emitted to the front side in the normal direction of the change panel 31. Due to the arrangement of the configuration that reflects light, the character image appears on the change panel 31. The image of the decorative design display device 208 behind the image can also be seen while the character images overlap. Such an effect can be executed as a notice effect such as a jackpot.

  FIG. 38C shows a state where the light emitting unit 32 is turned off and the light emitting unit 33 is turned on. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 33 is incident upward from the lower side of the change panel 31, the light direction is changed by approximately 90 degrees by reflection, and is emitted to the front side in the normal direction of the change panel 31. Due to the arrangement of the configuration that reflects light, an image in which the characters “PUSH” are arranged in a shape imitating an animal footprint on the change panel 31 appears. The image of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind it can also be seen while overlapping. Such an effect can be executed, for example, as an effect that moves the transmission unit 700 ′ to the maximum movement position and prompts the player to perform the operation.

  In the case of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the image does not appear when the light emitting units 32 and 33 are turned off. However, the player can recognize the image even when the light is turned off, and the visual appearance changes by reflecting the light when turned on. It may be something that stands out.

  At least one of the light emitting units 32 and 33 may be turned on during at least a part of the operation period of the movable bodies 1 and 2 or the effect movable body 246. For example, the light may be lit during a partial period or all the period while the movable body 1 moves to the maximum movement position or returns from the maximum movement position to the initial position. Alternatively, the light may be lit during a partial period or all the period while the movable body 2 moves to the maximum movement position or returns from the maximum movement position to the initial position. Or you may make it light during a part period or all the periods during the time when the production movable body 246 moves to the maximum movement position or returns from the maximum movement position to the initial position. There is a case where the effect of the movable body and the effect of the light emitting unit 3 can be performed, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 31, the back side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the effect movable body 224 and the like is covered with the cover body 10. Further, the ball entry blocking member 11 is provided on the back and upper side of the stage 244. The ball entry blocking member 11 is positioned on the player side with respect to the change panel 31 so that a game ball that has not entered the ball advancement entrance does not enter the cover body 10. In the present embodiment, a gap or the like may be provided between the ball entry blocking member 11 and the change panel 31, and another movable body may be provided. Thus, an effect operation may be performed in front of the change panel 31. Is possible.

  In the lower part of the cover body 10, a ball drain for discharging the game balls that have entered the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the variable prize opening 234, the out port 240, etc. to the outside of the cover body 10. An outlet 10a is formed.

  With reference to FIG. 31, the arrangement relationship of each component will be described. In the depth direction (front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1 is located on the player side with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208. The change panel 31 is located closer to the player than the movable body 1. The decoration unit 4 is located closer to the player than the change panel 31. The movable body 1, the movable body 2, and the effect movable body 224 are configured to be able to move in the space between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the change panel 31.

  When viewed in the depth direction, the movable body 1 is configured such that at least a part thereof may overlap at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, at the initial position, a part of the movable body 1 overlaps a part (upper part) of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the entire movable body 1 may overlap the decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position. On the contrary, the entire decorative symbol display device 208 may overlap the movable body 1 at the initial position.

  In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 1 moves to the maximum movement position, the entire movable body 1 overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, but a part of the movable body 1 is a decorative symbol display device 208. And may overlap. Conversely, all of the decorative symbol display device 208 may overlap the movable body 1.

  At least a part of the change panel 31 overlaps at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, substantially the entire display area of the change panel 31 and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other. Note that the entire change panel 31 may overlap a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps a part of the change panel 31. May be. Further, for example, the change panel 31 may overlap with a region that is more than half of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decoration unit 4 is located at a position that overlaps at least a part of the end of the change panel 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the decoration unit 4 overlaps the upper end portion of the change panel 31. In addition, you may comprise both so that the whole edge part of the change panel 31 may overlap with the decoration unit 4. FIG. Since the end of the change panel 31 is covered from the front side by the decoration unit 4, the appearance quality may be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when viewed in the depth direction, the decoration unit 4, the change panel 31, the movable body 1, and the decoration symbol display device 208 are arranged in order from the player side in a narrow space. A gap G1 is formed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1, a gap G2 is formed between the movable body 1 and the change panel 31, and the change panel 31 and the decoration unit 4 are formed. Forms a gap G3. The gap G2 and the gap G3 communicate with each other through a space SP2 between the decoration unit 4 and the movable body 1. The gap G1 and the gap G2 communicate with each other through a space SP1 between the change panel 31 and the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the gaps G1 to G3 are all in communication.

  Since the gap G3 is provided, the movable body 1 may be maintained from the gap G3 without disassembling the cover body 10 or the like. FIG. 32A shows an example, and the operator's fingertip reaches the movable body 1 through the gap G3. When the movable body 1 becomes immobile, it may be possible to manually return it to the initial position. In the example of FIG. 32B, the tip of the tool (here, a driver) is made to pass through the gap G3 and reach the movable body 1. When the movable body 1 becomes immobile, it may be possible to return it to the initial position manually by using a tool.

  Since the gap G2 and the gap G3 communicate with each other, the lower part of the movable body 1 (the part behind the upper part of the change panel 31) may be accessible, and the range of maintenance may be expanded. Furthermore, since the gap G1 and the gap G2 communicate with each other, there may be a case where it is possible to access a portion on the back side of the movable body 1 and the range of maintenance may be widened. The gaps G1, G2, and G3 can be gaps in the range of 0.8 mm to 20 mm, for example. The width of each gap may be constant or may be partially different. For example, the width of the gap may be wider in the periphery of the movable body 1 than in other portions. As for the site where each gap is formed, the gap may be formed in various places such as top, side, and bottom. Further, the width and the part may be different in each gap. For example, the gap G3 and the gap G2 may have different widths, and the gap G3 and the gap G1 may be formed in different parts when viewed from the front.

  In addition, a gap that allows access to the movable body 1 may be provided in at least a part of the upper end portion or the lateral end portion of the cover body 10. The scope of maintenance may be further expanded.

  The gaps G1 to G3 communicate with each other. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is transported, a cushioning material such as an air cushion can be inserted into the gaps G1 to G3. FIG. 33 shows an example thereof, in which the cushioning material CS is packed in the gaps G1 to G3. The movement of the movable body 1 due to vibration or the like may be suppressed by the buffer CS, and when it moves, it may be possible to prevent a strong collision with another configuration. The cushioning material CS may be stuffed and extracted from the gap G1 side, and workability may be good.

When the movable body 1 is in the initial position, as shown in FIG. 33, at least some of the gaps G <b> 1 to G <b> 3 are located at the same height H in the height direction of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, the cushioning material CS is relatively easy to pack and sometimes easy to extract. Note that all the gaps G1 to G3 do not have to be located at the same height H, and the same height may be a combination of the gaps G1 and G2, a combination of the gaps G2 and G3, or a gap A combination of G1 and gap G3 is also possible.
<Moving mechanism drive mechanism>

  An example of a drive mechanism that moves the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246 a and the right door 246 b, and the effect movable body 224 will be described. First, the drive mechanism of the movable body 1 will be described.

  34 and 35 are explanatory views of the drive mechanism 5 of the movable body 1. 34A is a front view when the movable body 1 is at the initial position, FIG. 34B is a front view when the movable body 1 is at the maximum movement position, and FIG. 35A is an initial view when the movable body 1 is at the initial position. FIG. 35B is a cross-sectional view when the movable body 1 is at the maximum movement position.

  The drive mechanism 5 includes a support body 50, a motor 51, an arm member 52, a link member 53, and a sensor 54. The support 50 constitutes the skeleton of the drive mechanism 5 and includes three rows of guide grooves 50a extending in the vertical direction. The motor 51 is a step motor supported by the support body 50, and a pinion gear 51a is attached to its output shaft. The arm member 52 is rotatably supported by the support body 50. The gear 52b, which is coaxial with the center of rotation of the arm member 52 and fixed to the gear 52b, meshes with the pinion gear 51a. Move. A long hole 52c is formed on the distal end side of the arm member 52, and a detection piece 52a is formed on the back side of the intermediate portion.

  The link member 53 is a member that supports the movable body 1, and the movable body 1 is fixed to the link member 53 via an attachment layer 53 a made of an adhesive or the like. The link member 53 includes three shaft portions through which the guide groove 50a is inserted. The central shaft portion 53a of the link member 53 is longer in the axial direction than the other shaft portions, and further has a long hole 52c in the arm member 52. It is inserted. A stopper 53b that restricts dropping from the long hole 52c is fixed to the end of the shaft portion 53a by a fastening member BL such as a bolt. When the arm member 52 is rotated by driving the motor 51, the link member 53 is moved in the vertical direction by the guide of the guide groove 50a. As a result, the movable body 1 is moved in the vertical direction.

  The movable body 1 is detected by the sensor 54. The sensor 54 is an optical sensor including a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 52a is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. Since the rotation position of the arm member 52 and the position of the movable body 1 are in correspondence with each other, the position of the movable body 1 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 52 a with the sensor 54. In the case of this embodiment, when the movable body 1 is in the initial position, the detection piece 52a is positioned between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 54.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the movable body 2 will be described. 36 and 37 are explanatory views of the drive mechanism 6 of the movable body 2. 36A is a front view when the movable body 2 is at the initial position, FIG. 36B is a front view when the movable body 2 is at the maximum movement position, and FIG. 37A is an initial view when the movable body 2 is at the initial position. FIG. 37B is a cross-sectional view when the movable body 2 is at the maximum movement position. The drive mechanism 6 has the same configuration as the drive mechanism 5.

  The drive mechanism 6 includes a support body 60, a motor 61, an arm member 62, a link member 63, and a sensor 64. The support body 60 constitutes the skeleton of the drive mechanism 6 and includes three rows of guide grooves 60a extending in the vertical direction. The motor 61 is a step motor supported by the support body 60, and a pinion gear 61a is attached to the output shaft thereof. The arm member 62 is rotatably supported by the support body 60. The gear 62b, which is coaxial with the center of rotation and to which the gear 62b is fixed, meshes with the pinion gear 61a, and the arm member 62 is rotated by driving the motor 61. Move. A long hole 62c is formed on the distal end side of the arm member 62, and a detection piece 62a is formed on the back side of the intermediate portion.

  The link member 63 is a member that supports the movable body 2, and the movable body 2 is fixed to the link member 63 via an attachment layer 63 a made of an adhesive or the like. The link member 63 includes three shaft portions through which the guide groove 60a is inserted. The central shaft portion 63a is longer in the axial direction than the other shaft portions, and further has a long hole 62c in the arm member 62. It is inserted. A stopper 63b that restricts dropping from the long hole 62c is fixed to the end of the shaft 63a by a fastening member BL such as a bolt. When the arm member 62 is rotated by the drive of the motor 61, the link member 63 is moved in the vertical direction by the guide of the guide groove 60a. As a result, the movable body 2 is moved in the vertical direction.

  The movable body 2 is detected by the sensor 64. The sensor 64 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 62a is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. Since the rotation position of the arm member 62 and the position of the movable body 2 are in correspondence with each other, the position of the movable body 2 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 62 a with the sensor 64. In the present embodiment, when the movable body 2 is in the initial position, the detection piece 62a is positioned between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 64.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIG. 39A is a front view when the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position, FIG. 39B is a left side view when the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position, and FIG. 39C is the effect movable body 224. FIG. 39D is a front view when the effect movable body 224 is at the maximum movement position.

  As already described, the effect movable body 224 includes the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm. A cam CM1 is fixed at the shoulder position of the upper arm 224a, and an output shaft of a step motor 71 that rotates the upper arm 224 is connected to the cam CM1. Around the cam CM1, there are provided stoppers SP11 and SP12 for restricting the rotation range of the upper arm 224a by restricting the rotation range of the cam CM1. The position where one end of the collar portion of the cam CM11 contacts the stopper SP11 (FIG. 39A) is the initial position of the upper arm portion 224a alone, and the position where the other end of the collar portion of the cam CM11 contacts the stopper SP12 is the upper arm portion. This is the maximum movement position of the single 224a (FIG. 39 (d)). The cam CM1 is provided with a detection piece CM11.

  The upper arm 224a is detected by the sensor 74. The sensor 74 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece CM11 is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting the detection piece CM11 with the sensor 74, the position of the upper arm 224a can be detected. In the present embodiment, when the upper arm 224a is in the initial position, the detection piece CM11 is positioned between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 74.

  The upper arm portion 224a is made of a material having transparency, and an illumination unit 73 composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, LEDs) is provided in the upper arm portion 224a, and the upper arm portion 224a is illuminated by the lighting of the illumination unit 73. Is possible.

  A step motor 72 is provided at the elbow position of the upper arm 224a. A cam CM2 is fixed at the elbow position of the forearm 224b, and the output shaft of the step motor 72 is connected to the cam CM2.

  Around the cam CM2, there are provided stoppers SP21 and SP22 for restricting the rotation range of the forearm portion 224b by restricting the rotation range of the cam CM2. The position where one end of the collar portion of the cam CM21 contacts the stopper SP21 (FIG. 39A) is the initial position of the forearm portion 224b alone, and the position where the other end of the collar portion of the cam CM21 contacts the stopper SP22 is the forearm portion. This is the maximum movement position of the single 224b (FIGS. 39C and 39D). The cam CM2 is provided with a detection piece CM21.

  The forearm portion 224b is detected by the sensor 75. The sensor 75 is an optical sensor including a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece CM21 is disposed so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting the detection piece CM21 with the sensor 75, the position of the forearm 224b can be detected. In the present embodiment, when the upper arm 224b is in the initial position, the detection piece CM21 is positioned between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 75.

  When viewing the entire production movable body 224, as shown in FIG. 39A, the initial position is that the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b are both in the initial position, and the maximum movement position is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b are both in the maximum movement position. FIG. 39 (c) shows a case where the effect movable body 224 is at an intermediate position, where the upper arm portion 224a is at the initial position and the front one portion 224b is at the maximum movement position. Thereafter, when the upper arm 224a is also moved to the maximum movement position, the state shown in FIG. Whether or not the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position can be recognized from the detection results of the sensors 74 and 75.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the left door 246a and the right door 246b will be described with reference to FIG. 40A is a perspective view of the shielding device 246, and FIGS. 40B to 40D are front views of the shielding device 246. The positions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are different. FIG. 40B shows a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are fully opened, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b are respectively located at the initial positions. FIG. 40 (c) is fully closed. 40 (c) and (d) are half-opened. In FIG. 40 (c), the left door 246a is at the maximum movement position, and in FIG. 40 (d), the right door 246b is at the maximum movement position.

  The shielding device 246 includes a drive mechanism 8 that moves the left door 246a and the right door 246b. The drive mechanism 8 includes a support body 81 that forms the skeleton of the shielding device 246. The support 81 includes a rail for guiding the left and right reciprocating movements of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and an opening 81a for exposing the decorative symbol display device 208 behind.

  The drive mechanism 8 includes a drive pulley 82a, a driven pulley 83a, and a belt 84a wound around these as a mechanism for moving the left door 246a. The driving pulley 82a is rotationally driven by a step motor (not shown), and the belt 84a travels. The left door 246a includes a connecting portion La, and is fixed to the belt 84a at the connecting portion La. As the belt 84a travels, the left door 246a moves. The connecting portion La is integrally provided with a detection piece detected by the sensor 85a.

  The sensor 85a is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece of the connecting portion La is arranged to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. The position of the left door 246a can be detected by detecting this detection piece with the sensor 85a. In this embodiment, the position where the left door 246a is moved by a predetermined distance to the left after the left door 246a is detected by the sensor 85a is configured as the initial position.

  The drive mechanism 8 includes a drive pulley 82b, a driven pulley 83b, and a belt 84b wound around these as a mechanism for moving the right door 246b. The drive pulley 82b is rotationally driven by a step motor (not shown), and the belt 84b travels. The right door 246b includes a connecting portion Lb, and is fixed to the belt 84b at the connecting portion Lb. As the belt 84b travels, the right door 246b moves. The connecting portion Lb is integrally provided with a detection piece detected by the sensor 85b.

The sensor 85b is an optical sensor including a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece of the connecting portion Lb is disposed so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. The position of the right door 246b can be detected by detecting this detection piece with the sensor 85b. In the case of this embodiment, the position where the right door 246b is moved by a predetermined distance to the right after the right door 246b is detected by the sensor 85b is configured as the initial position.
<Operation mode of movable body>

  Examples of operation modes of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 41 shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246 a and the right door 246 b, and the effect movable body 224 are all located at the initial position, and these movable bodies are in an inoperative state. FIG. 42A shows a state where the movable body 1 is moved. FIG. 42B shows a state where the movable body 2 is moved. FIG. 43A shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is moved. FIG. 43B shows a state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are moved.

Various effects can be achieved by moving the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246 a and the right door 246 b, and the effect movable body 224, or by combining the movements. The second sub-control unit 500 can control the operations of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246 a and the right door 246 b, and the effect movable body 224.
<Initial operation and return operation>

  The movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the production movable body 224 are all movable bodies, and their normal operation is desired. Therefore, as in the case of the transmission unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display body 900 described above, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initial operation is performed to operate the pachinko machine 100 according to a predetermined procedure, thereby confirming the operation. In addition, when trouble is detected in the operation during a game or the like, it is desirable to perform a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position. Further, when trouble is detected in the operation during a game or the like, a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position is performed. This promotes continuation of the game in normal operation.

Hereinafter, examples of the initial operation and the return operation will be described. Here, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are targeted, but the left door 246a and the right door 246b may also be targeted. The movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are movable bodies that are disposed at positions where the player does not contact.
<Initial operation and return operation of movable body 1>

  The initial operation and the return operation of the movable body 1 are basically the same as the initial operation and the return operation of the transmission unit 700 ′ and the like already described, and based on the control data as shown in FIG. Initial operation and return operation are executed. A brief description is given below.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the movable body 1. 44A to 44C show a case where the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 44A shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 51 when the power is turned on, and moves the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the second sub control unit 500 returns the movable body 1 to the initial position as shown in FIG. By performing such initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the movable body 1. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. In some cases, the operation can be confirmed more reliably by giving priority to completing the initial operation.

  44D to 44I show a case where the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 44 (d) shows a stage where the movable body 1 is not operating (stage of initial position).

  FIG. 44E shows a case where the movable body 1 is subsequently moved to the maximum movement position as an effect operation. FIG. 44 (f) shows a case where a moving operation for returning the movable body 1 to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect.

  FIG. 44 (g) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. 44 (f) has elapsed. It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 1 is interrupted due to a failure. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or the biting of foreign matter can be considered as the cause.

  Correspondingly, a return operation is performed at the stage of FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed at least on the condition that it is detected that the movable body 1 is not returned to the initial position, but is not returned. It should be noted that conditions other than not being detected as being in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is performed in accordance with the No. of the transmission unit 700 ′. Similar to the operation 1, the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position. Travel time is limited.

  By this returning operation, the movement of the movable body 1 resumes and returns to the initial position. In FIG. 44 (i), it is detected by the sensor 54 that the movable body 1 is at the initial position. Thus, there is a case where the movable body 1 can be returned to a normal operation state by the return operation.

  FIGS. 45A to 45J show a case where the return operation of the movable body 1 was performed but not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set on the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Although the return operation is performed three times here, if the movable body 1 does not return to the initial position, the return is given up and the operation of the movable body 1 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the play by the movable body 1 cannot be performed, but the game itself is continued.

  Note that the limit number of return operations may be the same or different for the transmission unit 700 ′ and the movable body 1. In the case of different numbers, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires the number of return operations, and the limit number may be set smaller for a configuration that does not require the number of times of return operation.

  FIG. 45 (a) shows a stage where the movable body 1 has not been produced. FIG. 45B shows a case where the effect operation is performed after that, and shows a case where the movable body 1 moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 45 (c) shows a case where a movement operation for returning to the initial position after the end of the effect is performed. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the movable body 1 is interrupted in the process of returning to the initial position.

  FIG. 45D assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time of the movement operation of FIG. In FIG. 45 (e), the first return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 45 (f) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 45 (g), the second return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 45 (h) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 45 (i), the third return operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 45J assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Although the return operation was performed three times, the movable body 1 did not return to the initial position, so the return is given up and the operation prohibited state of the movable body 1 is set and the operation is prohibited.

With respect to the movable body 1, the operation prohibition state may not be released by opening the door bodies such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102, and the operation prohibition state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. Good. Since the movable body 1 is disposed at a position where it does not come into contact with the player, there may be a case where a sense of discomfort given to the player is relatively small even if the operation is prohibited. Of course, the operation prohibition state can be canceled or the number of return operations can be reset by opening the doors such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102.
<Initial operation and return operation of movable body 2>

  The initial operation and return operation of the movable body 2 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmission unit 700 ′ and the like already described. Based on the control data as shown in FIG. Initial operation and return operation are executed. A brief description is given below.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the movable body 2. 46A to 46C show a case where the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 46A shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub control unit 500 drives the motor 61 in response to power-on, and moves the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. At this time, by displaying a default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, the hall clerk may be able to confirm the display function. Thereafter, the second sub control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. By performing such initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to check the operation of the movable body 2. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. In some cases, the operation can be confirmed more reliably by giving priority to completing the initial operation.

  46D to 46I show a case where the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 46 (d) shows a stage where the movable body 2 is not operating (stage of initial position).

  FIG. 46E shows a case where the movable body 2 is subsequently moved to the maximum movement position as an effect operation. FIG. 46 (f) shows a case where a moving operation for returning the movable body 2 to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect.

  FIG. 46 (g) assumes the case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. 46 (f). It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 2 is interrupted due to a failure. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or the biting of foreign matter can be considered as the cause.

  Correspondingly, a return operation is performed in the stage of FIG. In other words, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed at least on the condition that it is detected that the movable body 2 is not returned to the initial position. It should be noted that conditions other than not being detected as being in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is performed in accordance with the No. of the transmission unit 700 ′. Similar to the operation 1, the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position. Travel time is limited. As shown in the figure, a default image may be displayed when a return operation is being performed. As a result, the hall clerk may be able to recognize that the return operation is being performed.

  By this returning operation, the movement of the movable body 2 resumes and returns to the initial position. In FIG. 46 (i), it is detected by the sensor 64 that the movable body 1 is at the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the movable body 2 can be returned to a normal operation state by the return operation.

  47A to 47J show a case where the return operation of the movable body 2 was performed but not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set on the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Although the return operation is performed three times here, if the movable body 2 does not return to the initial position, the return is given up and the operation of the movable body 2 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the play by the movable body 2 cannot be performed, but the game itself is continued.

  The limit number of return operations may be the same or different for the transmission unit 700 ′, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In the case of different numbers, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires the number of return operations, and the limit number may be set smaller for a configuration that does not require the number of times of return operation.

  FIG. 47A shows a stage where the movable body 2 has not been produced. FIG. 47B shows a case where the effect operation is performed thereafter, and shows a case where the movable body 2 moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 47 (c) shows a case where a moving operation for returning to the initial position after the end of the effect is performed. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the movable body 2 is interrupted in the process of returning to the initial position.

  FIG. 47D assumes a case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time of the movement operation of FIG. In FIG. 47 (e), the first return operation is performed correspondingly. The default image is displayed during the return operation. FIG. 47F assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 47 (g), the second return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 47H assumes a case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 47 (i), the third return operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 47 (j) assumes a case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Although the return operation was performed three times, the movable body 2 did not return to the initial position. Therefore, the return is given up and the operation prohibited state of the movable body 2 is set and the operation is prohibited.

With respect to the movable body 2, the operation prohibition state may not be released by opening the door bodies such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102, and the operation prohibition state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. Good. Since the movable body 2 is disposed at a position where it does not contact the player, there may be a relatively small sense of discomfort given to the player even if the operation is prohibited. Of course, the operation prohibition state can be canceled or the number of return operations can be reset by opening the doors such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102.
<Initial operation and return operation of production movable body 224>

  The initial operation and the return operation of the effect movable body 224 are basically the same as the initial operation and the return operation of the transmission unit 700 ′ and the like that have already been described, and based on the control data as shown in FIG. An initial operation 224 and a return operation are performed. A brief description is given below.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the effect movable body 224. 48A to 48C show a case where the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 48A shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 when the power is turned on, and moves the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the effect movable body 224. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. In some cases, the operation can be confirmed more reliably by giving priority to completing the initial operation.

  48D to 48I show a case where the return operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 48D shows a stage where the effect movable body 224 is not operating (stage at the initial position).

  FIG. 48E shows a case where the effect movable body 224 is subsequently moved to the maximum movement position as an effect operation. FIG. 48 (f) shows a case where a moving operation for returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position is performed after the effect ends.

  FIG. 48G assumes the case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time set in the movement operation in FIG. In addition, it is assumed that the movement of the production movable body 224 is interrupted due to some trouble. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or the biting of foreign matter can be considered as the cause.

  Correspondingly, the return operation is performed in the stage of FIG. In other words, in this embodiment, the return operation is performed at least on the condition that it is detected that the effect movable body 224 is returned to the initial position but not returned. It should be noted that conditions other than not being detected as being in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is performed in accordance with the No. of the transmission unit 700 ′. Similar to the operation 1, the operation movable body 224 is returned to the initial position. Travel time is limited.

  This return operation resumes the movement of the effect movable body 224 and returns to the initial position. In FIG. 48 (i), it is detected by the sensors 74 and 75 that the movable body 1 is at the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the effect movable body 224 can be returned to a normal operation state by the return operation.

  49A to 49J show a case where the returning operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed but not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set on the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Here, the return operation is performed three times, but if the effect movable body 224 does not return to the initial position, the return is given up and the operation of the effect movable body 224 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the production by the production movable body 224 cannot be performed, but the game itself is continued.

  The limit number of return operations may be the same or different for the transmission unit 700 ′, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224. In the case of different numbers, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires the number of return operations, and the limit number may be set smaller for a configuration that does not require the number of times of return operation.

  FIG. 49A shows a stage where the effect movable body 224 is not yet produced. FIG. 49B shows a case where an effect operation is performed thereafter, and shows a case where the effect movable body 224 moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 49C shows a case where a moving operation for returning to the initial position after the end of the effect is performed. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the effect movable body 224 is interrupted in the process of returning to the initial position.

  FIG. 49D assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the elapse of the moving time of the moving operation in FIG. In FIG. 49 (e), the first return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 49F assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time of the first return operation. In FIG. 49 (g), the second return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 49 (h) assumes a case in which the effect movable body 224 is not detected by the sensors 74 and 75 after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 49 (i), the third return operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 49 (j) assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Although the returning movable body 224 has not returned to the initial position after performing the returning operation three times, the return is given up and the operation prohibited state of the rendering movable body 224 is set to prohibit the operation.

  For the effect movable body 224, the operation prohibition state may not be released by opening the door bodies such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102, the operation prohibition state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. Also good. Since the effect movable body 224 is disposed at a position where it does not come into contact with the player, there may be a relatively small discomfort given to the player even if the operation is prohibited. Of course, the operation prohibition state can be canceled or the number of return operations can be reset by opening the doors such as the front frame door 106 ′ and the main body 102.

The effect movable body 224 includes two movable bodies (upper arm portion 224a and forearm portion 224b), can be individually moved to the initial position, and can individually detect whether they are located at the initial position. . Therefore, when one of the movable bodies does not return to the initial position, the return operation may be performed for only that movable body. For example, when the upper arm 224a returns to the initial position, but the forearm 224b does not return to the initial position, only the forearm 224b may be returned. The operation prohibition state may be set individually for the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b, but when either one of them does not return to the initial position, the entire effect movable body 224 may be set to the operation prohibition state. If the entire operation is prohibited, it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the effect movable body 224 repeatedly performs an unnatural operation.
<Related operations>

The movement of the movable body can be associated between the plurality of movable bodies. Examples thereof will be described below.
<Order of initial operation>

  The initial operations may be performed separately or sequentially. FIG. 50 shows an example. Here, the case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are operated in order is illustrated, and the order is the order of the movable body 1 → the movable body 2 → the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 50A shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 51 in response to power-on, and moves the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 50 (b), and thereafter, in FIG. 50 (c). As shown, the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 61 to move the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. At this time, by displaying a default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, the hall clerk may be able to confirm the display function. Thereafter, the second sub control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 50 (f), and then as shown in FIG. 50 (g). The effect movable body 224 is returned to the initial position.

By performing such a series of initial operations every time the power is turned on, the operations of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 may be confirmed smoothly. It should be noted that even if a condition for executing another operation is established between the start of the initial operation of the movable body 1 and the end of the initial operation of the effect movable body 224, the initial operation is continued without interruption. You may do it. In some cases, the operation can be confirmed more reliably by giving priority to completing the initial operation. In the example of FIG. 50, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are targeted. However, the initial operations may be sequentially performed for all the movable bodies. Alternatively, it may be performed for each predetermined group (for example, a group of movable bodies on the front frame door 106 ′ side and a group of movable bodies on the game board 200 ′ side), and may be performed in order within the group.
<Initial action triggered by return action>

  When some of the movable bodies perform the return operation, the initial operation of the remaining part or all of the movable bodies may be performed. When malfunctions occur in some movable bodies due to deterioration over time, malfunctions may occur in other movable bodies. Therefore, when some of the movable bodies perform the return operation, the operation can be confirmed by causing the other movable bodies to perform the initial operation.

  FIG. 51 shows an example. Here, an example in which an initial operation is performed on the movable body 2 and the effect movable body 224 when the return operation is performed on the movable body 1 will be described.

  FIG. 51 (a) shows a stage where the movable body 1 is not operating (stage of initial position). FIG. 51B shows a case where the movable body 1 is subsequently moved to the maximum movement position as an effect operation. FIG. 51 (c) shows a case where a moving operation for returning the movable body 1 to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect. FIG. 51D assumes the case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 1 is interrupted due to a failure.

  Correspondingly, a return operation is performed at the stage of FIG. By this returning operation, the movement of the movable body 1 resumes and returns to the initial position. In FIG. 51 (f), it is detected by the sensor 54 that the movable body 1 is at the initial position.

  Next, the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. Although not when the power is turned on, since the movement of the movable body 1 is temporarily suspended, the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed just in case. The second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 61 in response to power-on, and moves the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. At this time, by displaying a default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, the hall clerk may be able to confirm the display function. Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. As a result, the operation of the movable body 2 can be confirmed.

  Subsequently, the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is also performed. The second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. Thereby, the operation confirmation of the production movable body 224 can be performed.

  The example in FIG. 51 is based on the condition that the return operation has been performed on one movable body, but may be performed on the condition that the return operation has been performed on a plurality of movable bodies. In some cases, it is possible to prevent an unnecessarily large number of initial operations from being performed. FIG. 52 shows an example. In the example of the figure, an example is shown in which the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed on condition that the return operations of the movable bodies 1 and 2 have been performed.

  FIG. 52A shows a stage where the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are not operating (stage at the initial position). FIG. 52 (b) shows a case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are subsequently moved as an effect operation. FIG. 52 (c) shows a case where a moving operation for returning the movable bodies 1 and 2 to the initial position is performed after the end of the presentation.

  FIG. 52 (d) assumes a case where it is not detected that the movable bodies 1 and 2 are in the initial position after the elapse of each movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. 52 (c). It is assumed that the movement of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is interrupted due to a failure.

  In response to this, a return operation is performed. Here, the return operation is performed in the order of the movable body 1 → the movable body 2, but may be performed simultaneously. First, the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed as shown in FIG. 52 (e), and it is detected in FIG. 52 (f) that it has returned to the initial position. Subsequently, the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed as shown in FIG. 52 (g), and it is detected that the movable body 2 has returned to the initial position as shown in FIG. 52 (h).

  Subsequently, the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed. The second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. Thereby, the operation confirmation of the production movable body 224 can be performed.

  In the above description, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the production movable body 224 have been exemplified. However, with respect to other movable bodies, when some movable bodies perform a return operation, the remaining part or all of the movable bodies are moved. Initial body movements may be performed. However, since the transmissive unit 700 ′ and the chance button 700 are arranged at positions where the player can contact, there is a case where the player may feel uncomfortable when the initial operation is automatically activated. 'Or the chance button 700 may be initialized only when the power is turned on.

In addition to the above-described conditions for executing the initial operation by the return operation of the other movable body, for example, when the return operation of the other movable body has reached a predetermined number of times, or the return of the movable body Various conditions can be set, such as when the total number of operations has reached a predetermined number of times, or when the return operation of multiple movable bodies is executed within a predetermined time. It is.
<Summary of related operations>

  As the related operation, the order of the initial operation and the initial operation triggered by the return operation have been described. FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the summary.

  FIG. 53A is a timing chart of an example of the order of the initial operations, and shows an example in which the initial operations of the fourth movable body, the fifth movable body, and the sixth movable body are sequentially performed. In the specific example described above, the fourth movable body has been described as the movable body 1, the fifth movable body as the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body as the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 53B is a timing chart of an example of the initial operation triggered by the return operation. The upper row shows the initial operation of the fifth movable body and the initial operation of the sixth movable body when the fourth movable body performs a return operation without performing a return operation. Shows an example in which is sequentially performed. In the specific example described above, the fourth movable body has been described as the movable body 1, the fifth movable body as the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body as the effect movable body 224. In the middle stage, as another variation, the fifth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the directing operation and the returning operation, and when the return operation is performed, the initial operation of the fourth movable body, the sixth An example in which the initial operation of the movable body is sequentially performed is shown. In the lower stage, as another variation, the sixth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the directing operation and the returning operation, and when the returning operation is performed, the initial operation of the fourth movable body is performed. An example in which the initial operation of the movable body is sequentially performed is shown.

FIG. 53C is also a timing chart of an example of the initial operation triggered by the return operation, but is an example of performing the initial operation of the other movable body triggered by the return operation of the two movable bodies. The fourth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the directing operation and the returning operation, and the fifth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the directing operation and the returning operation. The return operation and the return operation of the fifth movable body are sequentially performed. An example in which the initial operation of the sixth movable body is performed is shown. In the specific example described above, the fourth movable body has been described as the movable body 1, the fifth movable body as the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body as the effect movable body 224.
<Example of operation control of movable body>

  Examples of operation control of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. Here, it is assumed that the second sub-control unit 500 performs drive control of the motor 51 of the movable body 1, the motor 61 of the movable body 2, and the motors 71 and 72 of the effect movable body 224. FIG. 54A shows a processing example included in the movable body control processing of S713 of FIG.

  In S1461, a fourth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing relating to operation control of the movable body 1 is performed. In S1462, a fifth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to operation control of the movable body 2 is performed. In S1463, a sixth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to operation control of the effect movable body 224 is performed.

  Here, similarly to the transmission unit 700 ′ and the like, the control states of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are individually set for operation control. The control state includes at least first to fourth states. The first state is a state when the power is turned on, and is a state where execution of an initial operation is set. The second state is a state in which execution of the return operation is set. The third state is a standby state in which no operation is performed. The fourth state is a state in which an operation prohibition state is set.

  FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the fourth movable body control process in S1461. In S1471, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set in the movable body 1. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1478, and if not, the process proceeds to S1472. In S1472, it is determined whether or not the first state is set for the movable body 1. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1473, and if not, the process proceeds to S1474.

  In S1473, settings relating to the execution of the initial operation (drive setting and the like) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by the sensor and the like) are performed. In S1474, it is determined whether or not the second state is set for the movable body 1. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1475, and if not, the process proceeds to S1476.

  In step S1475, settings related to execution of the return operation (drive setting and the like) and processing related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1476, it is determined whether or not the third state is set for the movable body 1. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1477, and if not, the process proceeds to S1478. In S1477, command related processing (processing related to command return value, received command, etc.) is performed.

  In S1478, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to S1479. If not satisfied, one unit of processing is terminated. In S1478 and S1479, processing for updating the control state of the movable body 1 is performed. For example, the third state is set when the initial operation ends, the return operation ends, or when the rendering operation ends. When it is detected that the movable body 1 has been returned to the initial position but has not been returned, the second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit number, the fourth state is set. In addition, when performing the initial operation triggered by the return operation, the first state is set when the fifth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation.

  FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the fifth movable body control process in S1462. In S1481, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set in the movable body 2. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1488, and if not, the process proceeds to S1482. In S1482, it is determined whether or not the first state is set for the movable body 1. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1483, and if not, the process proceeds to S1484.

  In S1483, settings relating to the execution of the initial operation (drive setting, etc.) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1484, it is determined whether or not the second state is set for the movable body 2. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1485, and if not, the process proceeds to S1486.

  In step S1485, settings relating to execution of the return operation (drive setting and the like) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1486, it is determined whether or not the third state is set in the movable body 2. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1487; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1488. In S1487, command related processing (processing related to command return value, received command, etc.) is performed.

  In S1488, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to S1489, and if not satisfied, one unit of processing is terminated. In S1488 and S1489, the process which updates the control state of the movable body 2 is performed. For example, the third state is set when the initial operation ends, the return operation ends, or when the rendering operation ends. When it is detected that the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position but not returned, the second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit number, the fourth state is set. In addition, when the initial operation is triggered by the return operation, the first state is set when the fourth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation.

  FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the sixth movable body control process in S1463. In S1491, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1498; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1492. In S1492, it is determined whether or not the first state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1493, and if not, the process proceeds to S1494.

  In S1493, settings relating to the execution of the initial operation (drive setting, etc.) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation has been successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1494, it is determined whether or not the second state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1495, and if not, the process proceeds to S1496.

  In step S1495, settings relating to execution of the return operation (drive setting and the like) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1496, it is determined whether or not the third state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1497; otherwise, the process proceeds to S1498. In S1497, command related processing (processing related to a command return value, a received command, etc.) is performed.

  In S1498, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to S1499. If not satisfied, one unit of processing is terminated. In S1498 and S1499, processing for updating the control state of the effect movable body 224 is performed. For example, the third state is set when the initial operation ends, the return operation ends, or when the rendering operation ends. When it is detected that the effect movable body 224 is returned to the initial position but is not returned, the second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit number, the fourth state is set. In addition, when the initial operation is triggered by the return operation, the first state is set when the fourth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation.

  Next, control of the drive sources (step motors 51, 61, 71, and 72) that drive the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIG. 56A and 56B show the interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 56A, in S1501, processing for outputting a signal from the motor driver to the motor is performed. As a result, the motor is driven. In S1502, sensor detection processing is performed. Here, the detection result of each sensor (54, 64, 74, 75) which detects the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the production movable body 224 is acquired. In S1503, other processing is performed. Thus, one unit of the first drive interrupt process is completed.

Referring to FIG. 56B, in S1504, a motor control process for the operation of the movable body 1 is performed, in S1505, a motor control process for the operation of the movable body 2 is performed, and in S1506, the operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed. Motor control processing is performed. Thus, one unit of the second drive interrupt process is completed. As each motor control process of S1504 to S1506, the control shown in FIG.
<Example of movable body mounted on movable body>

  FIG. 57 shows an example of a movable body mounted on the movable body. In the example of the figure, a configuration in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R are applied to the shielding device 246 is illustrated. The shielding device 246 includes the drive mechanism 8 described above, a movable body 246a ′ that replaces the left door 246a, and a movable body 246b ′ that replaces the right door 246b. The structures of the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are substantially the same as those of the left doors 246a and 246b, but are different in shape and size. The drive mechanism 8 is configured as described above, but here, the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are reciprocated left and right. The initial positions of the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are the positions shown in FIG. Here, the sensors 85a and 85b are arranged so as to detect the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ at the initial positions.

  The movable body 9L is provided on the movable body 246a ′, and the movable body 9R is provided on the movable body 246b ′. The movable body 9L is a plate-like member in which a pair of blade-shaped projections 9a protrudes from a circular portion, and is rotatably supported by the movable body 246a ′ with the center of the circular portion as a rotation center. A detection piece 9b is formed at a position shifted from the center of rotation in the circular portion.

  The movable body 9R is the same as the movable member 9L, and is a plate-like member in which a pair of blade-shaped protrusions 9b protrudes from a circular portion, and is freely rotatable to the movable body 246b ′ with the center of the circular portion as a rotation center. It is supported. A detection piece 9b is formed at a position shifted from the center of rotation in the circular portion. The movable bodies 9R and 9L may be members whose parts (for example, the protrusions 9a and 9b) are permeable, or conversely, may be members that are not permeable.

  The movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are provided with drive mechanisms for independently driving the movable bodies 9L and 9R, respectively. The drive mechanism includes a drive source 91 such as a step motor, a drive pulley 92, a driven pulley 93, and a belt 94 wound around these pulleys. The drive sources 91 and 91 are supported by the corresponding movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′. The drive pulley 92 is attached to the output shaft of the drive source 91 and is rotated by the drive source 91. The driven pulleys 92 and 92 are attached to the rotation center shafts of the movable bodies 9L and 9R. When the drive source 91 is driven, the belt 94 travels and the movable bodies 9L and 9R rotate. By switching the rotation direction of the drive source 91, the rotation directions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R are also switched.

  The movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are provided with sensors 94 and 94, respectively. The sensor 94 is an optical sensor including a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 9b is disposed so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting the detection piece 9b with the sensor 94, the positions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R can be detected. In the case of this embodiment, when the movable bodies 9L and 9R shown in FIG. 57 are at the initial positions and the movable bodies 9L and 9R are at the initial positions, the detection piece 9b is configured to be detected by the sensor 94. Yes. Needless to say, the positions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R that can be detected by the sensor 94 are not absolute positions but relative positions to the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′.

  Next, operation examples of the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ and the movable bodies 9L and 9R will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, when the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are in the initial position and the movable bodies 9L and 9R are in the initial position, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not covered by these. It is in. Further, when the movable bodies 9L and 9R are at the initial position, the range in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R overlap with the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ is the largest. In other words, the portions where the movable bodies 9L and 9R protrude from the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ in the front view are the smallest.

  As already described, the movable bodies 9L and 9R can be rotated. However, when the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b are rotated, the posture thereof is changed, and the range in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R and the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ overlap is changed. In other words, the portions where the movable bodies 9L and 9R protrude from the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ in the front view change.

  When the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are in the initial positions, there is a possibility that when the postures of the movable bodies 9L and 9R change, the left and right side wall portions 81b and 81c of the drive mechanism 8 may interfere with each other. Therefore, the effects of the movable bodies 9L and 9R are controlled while restricting the maximum amount of change in the posture of the movable bodies 9L and 9R according to the positions of the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′. Although the interference between the left and right side wall portions 81b and 81c of the drive mechanism 8 and the movable bodies 9L and 9R is considered here, the effects of the movable bodies 9L and 9R are considered in consideration of interference with other components such as a harness. Control may be performed.

  When the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are in the initial positions, the movable bodies 9L and 9R are in the initial position, and no effect is produced to rotate the movable bodies 9L and 9R. When performing the effect of rotating, the amount of rotation of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is set to the smallest range, and at least a part of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is located in at least one of the areas excluding the specific area (for example, the side wall portion) 81b and 81c in an area that does not interfere with each other). On the contrary, the movable bodies 9L and 9R may be rotated so that the movable bodies 9L and 9R collide with the side wall portions 81b and 81c, thereby providing a kind of effect.

  When the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ move from the initial position, it is possible to produce the effects of the movable bodies 9L and 9R while restricting the rotation amounts of the movable bodies 9L and 9R according to the movement amounts. FIG. 58A shows a state where the movable body 246a ′ is moved from the initial position.

  In the example of the figure, the movable body 246a ′ is moved to a position where the movable body 246a ′ slightly overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front view. At this time, the movable body 9L is in a state in which a part of the protruding portion 9a overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and draws the attention of the player watching the image of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 58B shows a state where the movable body 9L is operated. Here, the posture is changed by reciprocating the movable body 9L within a predetermined angle range. A reciprocating motion may be continuously performed to obtain a vibrating motion. At the position where the movable body 9L is most rotated from the initial position, the overlapping range of the movable bodies 9L and 9R and the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ is smaller than the initial position. In other words, the portions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R that protrude from the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ when viewed from the front are larger than the initial position.

  In this way, by performing the operation of the movable body 9L while restricting the rotation amount, there are cases where various effects can be executed while preventing damage to the movable body and its surrounding components.

  59A, the movable body 246a ′ is moved to a position where the movable body 246a ′ entirely overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the movable body 9L is in the initial position, and substantially the whole of the movable body 9L overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player watching the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a state of drawing attention.

  FIG. 59B shows a state where the movable body 9L is operated. Here, the posture is changed by rotating the movable body 9L by 360 degrees. Even if the movable body 9L is rotated 360 degrees at this position, it does not interfere with the side walls 81b and 81c, and there is no need to regulate the change in the posture of the movable body 9L.

  Even when the movable body 246a ′ is located at the position of FIG. 59 (a), the operation range of the movable body 9L may be restricted in relation to the movable body 9R. FIG. 60 shows an example. In the example of the figure, the position of the movable body 246a ′ is at the same position as in FIG. However, the movable body 246b ′ is moved to a position where the movable body 246b ′ entirely overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, when the movable body 9L is rotated, it may interfere with the movable body 9R. Conversely, when the movable body 9R is rotated, it may interfere with the movable body 9L.

Therefore, the effect which rotates the movable bodies 9L and 9R is not performed. When performing an effect to rotate, the amount of rotation of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is set to the smallest range, but the movable bodies 9L and 9R may be rotated so that the movable bodies 9L and 9R collide with each other, and may be a kind of effect. .
<Summary of Embodiment>
A1. The above game stand (for example, 100)

  Display means (for example, 208) that can be displayed, operable movable body (for example, 1), light-emitting means that can emit light (for example, 32, 33), and the direction of light from the light-emitting means is changed to at least the player side A game table including a changing means (for example, 31) and a decorative body (for example, 4),

  The movable body is a movable body located closer to the player than the display means (for example, FIG. 31), and the changing means is a means located closer to the player than the movable body (for example, FIG. 31). The decorative body is a decorative body positioned closer to the player than the changing means (for example, FIG. 31), and at least a part of the movable body overlaps at least a part of the display means. (For example, FIG. 31), and at least a part of the changing means overlaps at least a part of the display means (for example, FIG. 31), and between the display means and the movable body. Is formed with a first gap (for example, G1), and a second gap (for example, G2) is formed between the movable body and the changing means. And the decorative body Are those third gap (e.g., G3) are formed, said third gap is at least communicate with the second gap (e.g. FIG. 31), characterized in that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the movable body. In addition, the effects of the game stand can be varied, and the store clerk may be able to handle the movable body when the movable body fails. In addition, since the movable body can be accessed from the gap, when the movable body is fixed with a bubble cushioning material or the like when transporting the game machine, the bubble cushioning material to be used can be small, thus reducing the transportation cost. May be possible.

  A2. The second gap is at least in communication with the first gap (for example, FIG. 31).

  According to this configuration, the movable body can be fixed so as not to come into contact with the display means with a bubble cushioning material or the like during transport of the game table, and the movable body and the display means may be prevented from being damaged. is there.

  A3. The decorative body is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the end of the changing means (for example, FIG. 31).

  According to this structure, since the edge part of the said change means is covered from the front, an external appearance quality may be able to be improved.

  A4. The decorative body is located at a position that overlaps at least a part of the movable body located at an initial position (for example, FIG. 31).

  According to this configuration, the player may be surprised when the movable body operates.

  A5. The light emitting means is a means that may emit light during at least a part of an operation period of the movable body.

According to this structure, the operation of the movable body and the effect by the light of the changing means can be performed, and the player's interest may be enhanced.
In addition, the following structures are also employable.

  The changing unit may be a unit positioned at a position that does not overlap at least a part of the movable body positioned at the initial position. The movable body may be easily accessible.

  And a second light emitting means capable of emitting light, wherein the decorative body is at least partially transparent or translucent, and the second light emitting means is a means located at a position behind the decorative body. Also good. In some cases, the effect of the decorative body can be improved by the light emitted from the second light emitting means.

  The changing unit may be located at a position covering all of the movable body located at the initial position. The changing means may overlap with an area that is at least half of the display area of the display means. In some cases, the effect of the change means can be improved.

  A ball entry preventing member may be arranged closer to the player than the changing means. Another movable body may be disposed between the changing means and the ball entry preventing member. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the failure of the movable body by preventing the game ball from entering.

  The changing means may be a light emitting panel made of a light guide member. The light emitting panel may be capable of emitting light by light from a lateral direction. The light emitting means may be disposed at a place other than the upper end of the light emitting panel. There are cases where the degree of freedom in selecting the arrangement of the light sources is improved.

  The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the end of the changing means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the upper end portion of the changing means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The second gap may be formed between at least a part of a lateral end portion of the changing means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The predetermined position may be an initial position of the movable body. There may be a case where a gap corresponding to the configuration of the game machine is formed to facilitate maintenance.

  The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the end of the changing means and the decorative body. The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the upper end portion of the changing means and the decorative body. The third gap may be formed between at least a part of a lateral end portion of the changing means and the decorative body. There may be a case where a gap corresponding to the configuration of the game machine is formed to facilitate maintenance.

  A gap accessible to the movable body may be formed at the upper end of the game board. A gap accessible to the movable body may be formed at a side end portion of the game board. It may be easy to maintain.

  The width of the first gap may be constant or at least partly different. The width of the second gap may be constant or at least partly different. The width of the third gap may be constant or at least partly different. The width of at least a part of the third gap may be larger, the same as, or smaller than the width of a part of the second gap. The width of at least a part of the third gap may be larger, the same as, or smaller than the width of a part of the first gap. The width of at least a part of the second gap may be larger, the same as, or smaller than the width of a part of the first gap. In some cases, it is possible to prevent unnecessary gaps while improving maintainability.

  The movable body may have at least fastening means (for example, BL, screws, bolts, etc.). The width of at least a part of the first gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the entire length of the fastening means. The width of at least a part of the second gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the entire length of the fastening means. The removal of the fastening means may be facilitated, or the drop prevention property may be improved.

  The decorative body may have at least fastening means (for example, BL, screws, bolts, etc.). The width of at least a part of the second gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the entire length of the fastening member. The removal of the fastening means may be facilitated, or the drop prevention property may be improved.

  At least a part of the first gap and at least a part of the second gap may be formed at the same height in the height direction of the game table. At least a part of the second gap and at least a part of the third gap may be formed at the same height in the height direction of the game table. At least a part of the first gap, at least a part of the second gap, and at least a part of the third gap may be formed at the same height in the height direction of the game table. Good. In some cases, it is easy to insert the cushioning material into the gap.

  The movable body may be movable between the changing means and the display means. In some cases, the effect of the movable body can be improved.

  When the movable body moves to a position different from the initial position, at least a part of the movable body may overlap with at least a part of the display unit. When the movable body moves to a position different from the initial position, at least a part of the movable body may necessarily overlap at least a part of the display means. The movable body may be a movable body that does not overlap the display means when the movable body is positioned at an initial position. The changing means may be a means that at least a part thereof does not overlap at least a part of the display means. The decorative body may be a decorative body positioned at a position that does not overlap the changing means. The decorative body may be a decorative body positioned at a position that always overlaps at least a part of the movable body positioned at the initial position.

  B1. The gaming table (for example, 100) is a gaming table including a first movable body (for example, 246a ′) and a second movable body (for example, 9L), and the first movable body is A movable body having a second movable body (for example, FIG. 57), and the first movable body is a movable body that is movable at least between a first position and a second position (for example, FIG. 57-FIG. 60), the second movable body is a movable body capable of executing at least a first operation (for example, FIG. 58, FIG. 59), and the second movable body is at least in the first case, A movable body capable of executing a first operation, and the second movable body is a movable body that does not perform the first operation in at least the second case, and the first case includes This is a case where the first movable body is located at the second position (for example, FIG. 57). The case is a case where the first movable body is located at the first position (for example, FIGS. 58 and 59).

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the movable body. In addition, the movable body can be prevented from being damaged and various effects can be executed.

B2. Said 1st operation | movement is operation | movement which the attitude | position of said 2nd movable body changes, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
According to this configuration, there are cases where the production effect can be improved.

  B3. The second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a first attitude (for example, FIG. 57), and the second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a second attitude (for example, 58 and 59), the second posture is a posture in which the range in which the second movable body and the first movable body overlap is smaller than the first posture. .

  According to this configuration, the movable body may be prevented from being damaged and various effects may be executed.

  B4. The second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a first attitude (for example, FIG. 57), and the second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a second attitude (for example, 58 and 59), the second posture is characterized in that the portion protruding from the first movable body is larger than the first posture.

  According to this configuration, the movable body may be prevented from being damaged and various effects may be executed.

  B5. The first movable body is a movable body that can reciprocate (for example, FIGS. 58 to 60).

According to this configuration, the movable body may be prevented from being damaged and various effects may be executed.
In addition, the following structures are also employable.

  Display means (for example, 208) is further provided, and the second position may be a position where the first movable body covers at least a part of the display means (for example, FIGS. 58 and 59). .

  The first movable body may be a means movable to a third position (for example, FIG. 58). The third position may be any position between the first position and the second position (for example, FIG. 59). The second movable body may be means capable of executing the second operation in the third case (for example, FIG. 58). The third case may be a case where the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, FIG. 58).

  A third movable body (for example, 9R) may be further provided, and the third movable body may be a means that can move to a fourth position (for example, FIG. 57) and a fifth position (for example, FIG. 60). .

  In the fourth case, the second movable body may be a means that does not execute the first operation (for example, FIG. 60). The fourth case is a case where the first movable body is located at the second position, and the fourth case is a case where the third movable body is located at the fifth position. This may be the case (for example, FIG. 60).

  The second movable body may be capable of performing a third operation when the first movable body is in the initial position. The third operation may be an operation in which at least a part of the second movable body is located in at least one of the regions excluding a specific region.

  At least one of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation is an operation including a linear orbital movement, an operation including a curved orbital movement, an oscillating operation, a reciprocating operation, a rotating operation, and a lateral direction. It may be at least one of an operation including movement, an operation including vertical movement, an operation including depth movement, and an operation including pause.

  You may provide the 1st drive means to which said 1st movable body is moved. You may provide the 2nd drive means to operate said 2nd movable body. The first movable body may have the second driving means. The second drive means may include a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The operation of the second movable body may be determined by the position of the first movable body and the position of the third movable body.

  The second movable body may be a movable body capable of executing a second operation. In the first case, the second movable body may be a movable body capable of executing at least the first operation. The second movable body may be a movable body that always executes the first operation in the first case.

  C1. The game table (for example, 100) includes a plurality of movable bodies (for example, 700, 700 ′, 900), a plurality of door bodies (for example, 106 ′, 104), and a plurality of detection means (for example). And at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, 700 ′), and at least one of the plurality of door bodies is a first door body ( 106 ′), and at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means (for example, 858 ′), and the first movable body is provided at least on the first door body. The first movable body is a movable body provided at a position at which the player can contact at least, and the first detection means can detect the first movable body. The first movable body is a movable body operable from the first state. Yes, the first state is an initial state of the first movable body, and the first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation, and the first operation Is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state (for example, a return operation), and when the first movable body has at least a first condition, A movable body capable of executing a first operation, wherein the first movable body is a movable body capable of executing the first operation when at least a second condition is satisfied; The first condition is a condition that can be established by opening the first door body, and the second condition is a state in which the first movable body has not returned to the first state. And a condition that can be satisfied by being detected by the first detection means (for example, FIG. 20).

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the movable body. In some cases, the first movable body can be returned to the initial position.

  C2. The second condition is a condition in which the number of established times is limited, and the first condition is a condition in which the number of established times is not limited.

  According to this configuration, the first movable body may be able to be returned to the initial position, and the first operation may be prevented from being repeated without limitation.

C3. At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (e.g., 900), at least one of the plurality of detection means is a second detection means (e.g., 902), The second movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact at least, and the second detection means is a means capable of detecting the second movable body, The second movable body is a movable body operable from the second state, the second state is an initial state of the second movable body, and the second movable body is the second movable body. The second operation is an operation in which the second movable body returns to the second state (for example, a return operation), and the second movable body. Is a movable body capable of executing the second operation when at least the third condition is satisfied. The third condition is a condition that can be established by the second detection means detecting that the second movable body has not returned to the second state. The condition is a condition that can be established up to the first number of times, the third condition is a condition that can be established up to the second number of times, and the second number of times is the first number of times The number of times is different from the number of times.
According to this configuration, the second movable body may be returned to the initial position.

C4. The first movable body is a movable body that can execute an initial operation when power is turned on, and the initial operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state. (For example, FIG. 20).
According to this configuration, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the first movable body.

  C5. The first movable body is a movable body that continues the initial operation without interruption when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to more reliably check the operation of the first movable body.
Further, the following configuration can also be adopted.

  A second door (e.g., 104), and the first movable body may be capable of executing the first action when at least the fourth condition is satisfied; May be a condition that can be established by opening the second door (for example, FIG. 22). In some cases, the first movable body can be returned to the initial position.

  The second number may be smaller, larger or the same as the first number.

  The second movable body may not perform the second operation when the first condition is satisfied. The second movable body may be left as it is.

  When the first condition is satisfied, the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be reset. The number of times the second condition is satisfied when the first detection unit detects that the first condition is satisfied and the first movable body has returned to the first state. May be reset. When power is turned on or off, the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be reset. Thereafter, when the second condition is satisfied, the first operation can be executed.

  The initial state may be an initial position of the movable body. The first condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the first movable body is at a position different from the initial position and the first door body is opened.

  The initial operation may not be performed as a notice. The operation of returning to the first state may not be performed as a notice. The operation of returning to the second state may not be performed as a notice. There is a case where an operation different from a presentation operation such as a notice is possible.

  There may be a movable body (for example, 700, 700 ′) having a limit on the number of times the second condition is satisfied and a movable body (for example, 900) having no limit on the number of times the second condition is satisfied. The movable body having a limit on the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be an electric chew, an attacker, or a sorting device.

  The first movable body may be operable by a player. When the player operates the first movable body, a first effect (for example, a reach effect) may be performed. When the first door is opened and the first movable body performs the first operation and the first movable body returns to the first state, the first detection means If detected, a second effect at least partially in common with the first effect may be performed. The second effect may be performed by at least one of display and sound. The display may be the same as the first effect. The sound may include a door opening sound in the sound of the first effect, or only the door opening sound. The second effect may not be performed.

  The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body returns to the initial position. The initial operation may include only an operation in which the movable body returns to the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves away from the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves to the maximum movement position.

  The first operation may be executed at the start of variation, at the end of variation, or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous movable body operation.

  A game machine comprising a plurality of movable bodies, a plurality of door bodies, and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, At least one of the door bodies is a first door body, at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means, and the first movable body is the first movable body. A movable body provided at least on one door body, wherein the first movable body is a movable body provided at a position where a player can contact at least; The first movable body is a movable body operable from the first state, and the first state is an initial state of the first movable body. The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation, and the first operation is the The first movable body is an operation that returns to the first state, and the first movable body is a movable body that can execute the first operation in the first case, and In the second case, the movable body may be a movable body capable of executing the first operation.

  A game machine comprising a plurality of movable bodies, a plurality of door bodies, and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, At least one of the door bodies is a first door body, at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means, and the first movable body is the first movable body. A movable body provided at least on one door body, wherein the first movable body is a movable body provided at a position where a player can contact at least; The first movable body is a movable body operable from the first state, and the first state is an initial state of the first movable body. The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation, and the first operation is the This is an operation in which one movable body returns to the first state, and the first movable body is a movable body that can execute the first operation when the first door body is opened. And the first movable body performs the first operation when the first detecting means detects that the first movable body has not returned to the first state. The game machine may be a movable body that can be executed.

  D1. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a game table provided with a plurality of movable bodies (for example, 1, 2, 224) and a plurality of detection means (for example, 54, 64, 74, 75). At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, 1), and at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, 224). At least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means (for example, 54), and at least one of the plurality of detection means is a second detection means (for example, 74, 75). And the first movable body is a movable body operable from the first state, and the second movable body is a movable body operable from the second state, and the first state Is the initial state of the first movable body, and the second state is It is an initial state of the second movable body, and the first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation when at least a first condition is satisfied, One operation is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state (for example, a return operation), and the first condition is that the first movable body is in the first state. The second movable body is a movable that can execute the second operation when the power is turned on. The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the second state, and the second movable body is the first operation The movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation when the first operation is performed (for example, FIG. 5). ), Characterized in that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the movable body. In some cases, a plurality of movable bodies can be returned to their initial positions.

D2. The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a third operation when the power is turned on (for example, an initial operation), and the third operation is performed in the first state after the operation is started. The second movable body is a movable body that can execute the fourth operation when at least the second condition is satisfied, and the fourth movable body The operation is an operation in which the second movable body returns to the second state (for example, a return operation), and the second condition is that the second movable body returns to the second state. The first movable body is a condition that can be satisfied by being detected by the second detection means to be in a state where the second movable body has performed the fourth operation. The movable body is capable of executing the third operation (for example, FIG. 53B).
According to this configuration, there are cases where a plurality of movable bodies can be returned to their initial positions.

D3. At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a third movable body (for example, 2), at least one of the plurality of detection means is a third detection means (for example, 64), The third movable body is a movable body operable from a third state, and the third state is an initial state of the third movable body, and the third movable body is The movable body is capable of executing the fifth operation when the power is turned on (for example, the initial operation), and the fifth operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the third state. The third movable body is a movable body that can perform the fifth operation when the first movable body performs the first operation (for example, FIG. 53 (b)). )).
According to this configuration, there are cases where a plurality of movable bodies can be returned to their initial positions.
D4. The third movable body is a movable body including display means.
According to this configuration, there are cases where the production effect can be improved.

D5. The first movable body is a movable body that may be at least partially hidden (for example, FIG. 29), and the second movable body is a movable body that is not at least partially hidden (for example, FIG. 29). ).
According to this configuration, there are cases where the production effect can be improved.
Further, the following configuration can also be adopted.

  The initial state may be an initial position of the movable body. The second operation may be an initial operation. The third operation may be an initial operation. The fifth operation may be an initial operation. The first operation may be a return operation to the initial position. The fourth operation may be a return operation to the initial position.

  The second movable body may start the second operation when the first movable body starts the first operation, or the first movable body performs the first operation. The second operation may be started after the start, or the second operation may be started after the first movable body has completed the first operation.

  The first movable body may not execute the third operation even when the second movable body performs the fourth operation.

  The first movable body and the second movable body may have the same position in the depth direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 32) or may be different. If they are the same, the thickness of the game table may be further reduced. If they are different, the perspective between the movable bodies is emphasized, and the production effect may be improved.

  The third movable body may not execute the fifth operation when the first movable body performs the first operation. The third movable body may or may not execute the fifth operation when the second movable body performs the fourth operation. The third movable body performs the fifth operation when the first movable body performs the first operation and the second movable body performs the fourth operation. May be executed or not. The third movable body may be capable of executing the sixth operation when at least the third condition is satisfied. The sixth operation is the third movable body. May be an operation of returning to the third state, and the third condition is that the third detection means that the third movable body is not returned to the third state. It may be a condition that can be established by being detected.

  The third operation may be an operation different from the first operation. The second operation may be an operation different from the fourth operation.

  The first condition may be a condition in which the number of established times is limited, or may be a condition in which the number of established times is not limited. The second condition may be a condition in which the number of established times is limited, or may be a condition in which the number of established times is not limited. The third condition may be a condition in which the number of established times is limited, or may be a condition in which the number of established times is not limited.

  The first movable body may be operable by a player. When the player operates the first movable body, the first effect may be performed. When the first door is opened, the first movable body performs the first operation, and the first movable body returns to the first state. If detected, a second effect at least partially in common with the first effect may be performed.

  The second effect may be performed by at least one of display and sound. The display may be the same as the first effect. The sound may include a door opening sound in the sound of the first effect, or only the door opening sound. -The second performance may not be performed. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body returns to an initial position. The initial operation may include only an operation in which the movable body returns to the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves away from the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves to the maximum movement position.

  The detecting means may be means for detecting that the movable body is in the initial position. When one movable body among the plurality of movable bodies is not detected by the detection means, after the one movable body performs the return operation, the other movable body performs the initial operation. May be. When two of the plurality of movable bodies are not detected by the detection means, after the two movable bodies perform the return operation, the other movable bodies perform the initial operation. May be.

  At least two or more of the plurality of movable bodies may overlap at least part of the operating range or may not overlap. One of the plurality of movable bodies may be overlapped with the other.

  The first movable body may be a movable body capable of executing at least the first operation when at least the first condition is satisfied. The first movable body may be a movable body that necessarily executes the first operation when at least the first condition is satisfied. The second movable body may be a movable body capable of executing at least the fourth operation when at least the second condition is satisfied. The second movable body may be a movable body that necessarily executes the fourth operation when at least the second condition is satisfied. The first condition may be a condition in which the number of established times is limited.

  A game machine comprising a plurality of movable bodies and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and among the plurality of movable bodies, At least one is a second movable body, at least one of the plurality of detection units is a first detection unit, and at least one of the plurality of detection units is a second detection unit. Detecting means, wherein the first movable body is a movable body operable from the first state, and the second movable body is a movable body operable from the second state, The state is the initial state of the first movable body, the second state is the initial state of the second movable body, and the first movable body is the first In the first case, the movable body is capable of executing a first operation, and the first operation is a state in which the first movable body is the first body. The second movable body is a movable body that can execute the second operation when power is turned on, and the second operation starts after the operation is started. It is a series of operations until returning to the second state, and the second movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation in the second case. It may be a stand.

  A game machine comprising a plurality of movable bodies and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and among the plurality of movable bodies, At least one is a second movable body, at least one of the plurality of detection units is a first detection unit, and at least one of the plurality of detection units is a second detection unit. Detecting means, wherein the first movable body is a movable body operable from the first state, and the second movable body is a movable body operable from the second state, The state is the initial state of the first movable body, the second state is the initial state of the second movable body, and the first movable body is the When the first movable body is detected by the first detection means to be in a state that has not returned to the first state, The first operation is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state, and the second movable body has a power source. It is a movable body that is capable of executing a second operation when it is turned on, and the second operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the second state. The movable body may be a game machine that is capable of executing the second operation when the first movable body performs the first operation.

  The first movable body is a movable body that can execute a third operation when power is turned on, and the third operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state. In the third case, the second movable body is a movable body capable of executing the fourth action, and the fourth action is the second movable body is the second movable body. It is an operation to return to the second state, and the first movable body is a movable body capable of executing the third operation in the fourth case. Also good.

The first movable body is a movable body that can execute a third operation when power is turned on, and the third operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state. The second movable body is the fourth movable body when the second detecting means detects that the second movable body is not in the second state. The fourth operation is an operation in which the second movable body returns to the second state, and the first movable body is the second movable body. The game machine may be a movable body capable of executing the third operation when the movable body performs the fourth operation.
<Embodiment B>
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 63). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and on the front side, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, and a door side effect movable not shown here are movable. The body is attached. A game area 124 (see FIG. 63) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 63) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 700 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 63) by a player's operation, and a chance button 700 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to light. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. The chance button 700 corresponds to an example of a door-side effect movable body. The door-side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 62 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 61 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The production device 206 performs the production by operating the board-side production movable body 2242, and details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. Here, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when winning the special figure variable game When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and a board-side effect movable body 2242 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. ing. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the board-side effect movable body 2242.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 63 includes an upper arm portion 2242a and a forearm portion 2242b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion 2242a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion 2242b at the position of the elbow is provided. The board-side effect movable body 2242 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Accordingly, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by predetermined control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means). (500)), or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second control unit 400 One unit combined with the sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, a sub-control unit).
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting a detection piece 704b4 provided on the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700, A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 and the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 is read based on a signal from the CPU 404, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used. A VDP 43 that generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 Is connected to the (video display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal to the basic circuit 502 is connected. The effect movable body 224 referred to here includes at least a door side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and a board side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a driving circuit 517 for controlling the driving of the driving unit 708 of the chance button 700, a gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming frame. A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game lamp 542, and a serial communication control circuit for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 520 is connected.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 64, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 65A to 65C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. Fig.65 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 65 (a) shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 65 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 65 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 63B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 65 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 65 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 66 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. Here, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9v). If it is less than the value, it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start with a predetermined period.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, WDT is periodically (for example, main count) so that the count value of WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (for example, 32.8 ms) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect processing abnormality). Restart once every approximately 2ms, which is the control unit timer interrupt period.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. Here, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 64 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the normal figure starting port 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. Here, the counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for use, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 65 (c)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 65 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the usual figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 65A are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the probability variation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the first off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (for example, error command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, door open command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  Further, when a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The same applies to a case where a door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 without going through the payout control unit 600. When the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609, the main control unit 300 transmits a door opening command to the first sub control unit 400 when the detection signal is transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. Although details will be described later, if the result of this determination is that a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700, or a chance When the pressing operation of the button 700 is valid, processing for preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the chance button 700 while the second sub-control unit 500 controls the driving of the movable unit 704 of the chance button 700. Detection processing and drive control related to the button 700 may be performed by one control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500)).

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. Is set to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, after performing a movable body control process, it returns to step S703. Although details will be described later, in this movable body control process, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received from the first sub-control section 400, the control command is Perform various corresponding processes.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run with.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Movable body control processing>

  FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body control process (step S713) of the second sub-control section main process, and FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body interruption process. is there.

  In step S1001 of the movable body control process shown in FIG. 5A, various received command processes are performed based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400. The received command various processes include, for example, an effect movable body process performed when a command related to the effect movable body 224 is received, and a chance button movable body process performed when a command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received. Can be mentioned.

  Specifically, the effect movable body 224 includes at least the door side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and the board side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200 as described above. In the description using FIG. 70, the door-side effect movable body and the board-side effect movable body 2242 will be described without distinction. However, in the effect movable body processing, for example, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 is received. The operation data (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 included in the control command is stored in the effect movable object drive storage area provided in the RAM 508. . Note that further detailed control processing of the door-side effect movable body will be described later.

  In the chance button movable body process, the control information included in the control command is newly stored in the chance button drive storage area provided in the RAM 508, or the control information stored in the chance button drive storage area is new information. Update the data or discard old information.

  The second sub-control unit 500 executes the movable body interrupt process shown in FIG. 5B at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms) with the above-described timer interrupt as a trigger. In step S1101 of this movable body interruption process, it is determined whether or not control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the drive unit 708 is stored in the above-mentioned chance button drive storage area. If the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is output to the drive circuit 517. As a result, the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is driven (details will be described later).

  Further, it is determined whether or not operation data (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 is stored in the above-described effect movable body drive storage area, and the corresponding operation data is stored. If so, the operation data is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 is driven.

  In step S1102, a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is input via the sensor circuit 518, and position information of the effect movable body 224 is detected based on the detection signal and stored in the RAM 508. When the sensor is not detected, an initial position return (origin return) process of the effect movable body 224 is performed. Here, the detection process of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 by the detection unit 710 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, but may be performed by this step S1102.

  In step S1103, output information update processing is performed. In the output information update process, a process of updating the operation data of the effect movable body 224 and the control information of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is performed.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the door-side effect movable body control process executed by the second sub-control unit 500.

  The door-side effect movable body control process shown in FIG. 71 is executed in the received command various processes shown in FIG. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a door opening command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1201), and if not received, proceeds to step S1205, and if received, Based on the position information of the door side effect movable body stored in the RAM 508, it is determined whether or not the current position of the door side effect movable body is the initial position (step S1202). If it is not the initial position, the above-described production movable body drive storage area is rewritten with operation data (for example, closing operation data) for returning to the initial position (step S1203), and this door-side production movable body control process ends. On the other hand, if it is the initial position, standby instruction information indicating standby is set in the above-described production movable body drive storage area (step S1204), and the process ends. In this case, in the output information update process (step S1103) shown in FIG. 70B, the operation data is not updated. In step S1101 in the next movable body interruption process, the drive circuit is related to the door-side effect movable body. Operation data is not transmitted. Note that operation data that maintains the same position as the current position (here, the initial position) may be transmitted.

  In step S1205, which is executed when the door opening command has not been received, the received operation data included in the control command related to the effect movable body 224 is set in the above-described effect movable body drive storage area. End.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a door-side effect movable body control process executed by the second sub-control unit 500 when the power is turned on.

  When the power is turned on, a predetermined voltage is first supplied from the power control unit 660 to the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 determines that the power is turned on when the voltage value from the power control unit 660 exceeds a certain value, and starts the door-side effect movable body control process at the time of power-on shown in FIG. . The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a door opening command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1301), and if not received, the above-described effect movable body drive storage area is stored. Then, operation data (for example, closing operation data) for returning to the initial position is set (step S1302), and the door-side effect movable body control process at the time of power-on is ended. On the other hand, if it has been received, standby instruction information indicating standby is set in the above-described production movable body drive storage area (step S1303), and the process ends. If the execution of step S1101 in the above-described movable body interrupting process is delayed when the power is turned on, the operation data related to the door-side effect movable body may be transmitted to the drive circuit 516 and then terminated. Good.

The door-side effect movable body control process described above may be executed by the first sub-control unit 400.
Subsequently, characteristic points of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 corresponding to one embodiment of the present invention is opened.

  A door-side effect movable body 2241 that opens forward (player side) is provided at the top of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. This door-side effect movable body 2241 is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact, and corresponds to an example of a first movable body. In addition, the game board 200 is provided with a board-side effect movable body 2242 that falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the decorative symbol display device 208. The board-side effect movable body 2242 is a movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106, and corresponds to an example of a second movable body. The door side effect movable body 2241 and the board side effect movable body 2242 are driven and controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516 as the effect movable body 224 as described above. The initial (origin) position of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is the closed position (position accommodated in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. Is a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 73 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol in a state in which the front frame door 106 is closed, and during the decorative symbol variation display, that is, during the special symbol variation display. As shown in FIG. 5B, the door-side effect movable body 2241 opens, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in (b), the game board 200 is displayed as shown in (d). The board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the screen continues to operate, but the door-side effect movable body 2241 provided on the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position.

  After the front frame door 106 is opened, it returns to the initial position. This does not mean that the production operation returns to the initial position according to the production data, but means that the initial position return control (step S1203 shown in FIG. 71) forcibly returning to the initial position is performed. (same as below). In addition, the operation continues. This includes returning to the initial position according to the effect data. That is, it means that the production operation is continuously performed and the initial position return control is not performed (the same applies hereinafter).

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 that has not returned to the initial position by opening the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position when, for example, an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when abnormality arises in the decorative symbol display device 208, the door-side effect movable body 2241 does not return to the initial position (hereinafter the same). Other conditions for the initial position return operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 (corresponding to the second condition) include the following conditions. For example, the position may be returned to the initial position due to an abnormality in the board-side effect movable body 2242 itself (for example, the position is not detected). Moreover, you may make it perform the control which returns the board | board side production | generation movable body 2242 to an initial position for every design change start. Further, in a specific gaming state (for example, during probability change, during a short period of time, etc.), control for returning the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position may be performed. In addition, if the initial position of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is not detected, the board-side effect movable body 2242 may return to the initial position every time the symbol variation starts, and the panel may be changed by a specific symbol variation (for example, the variation or the variation within the hold). You may make it return to an initial position, when performing the production using the side production movable body 2242. That is, at least one condition may be that an effect command for driving the board-side effect movable body 2242 is received. Further, when a demonstration screen (standby screen) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, control for returning the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position may be performed. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball has not entered the first special figure starting port 230 (second special figure starting port 232), a process of returning the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position is performed. May be.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 73 described above, the first movable body (here, the door-side effect movable body 2241) performs the first operation (initial position return operation). That is, when the door body (here, the front frame door 106) is opened while the first movable body is moving, the first drive control means (here, the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516) performs the first operation. Move one movable body to the initial position. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the first movable body from coming into contact with an external device or a person. Further, the second movable body (here, the board-side effect movable body 2242) continues to operate regardless of the operation state of the first movable body. Generally, when the door body (front frame door 106) is opened, it is a disadvantageous situation for the player (for example, a ball is clogged between the game nails 238, and a game cannot be performed). When the second movable body continues to operate while the door is open, it may be possible to show the player an effect and prevent the game motivation from being lost. Further, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board surface (particularly around the second movable body) while the door is open. Similarly, when the sensor for detecting the first movable body is provided at a position other than the initial position, the initial position returning operation is performed regardless of the position of the first movable body other than the initial position.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened in the first modified example of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. Hereinafter, in the description of the modified example, the components having the same names as the names of the components described so far will be described with reference numerals used so far. In addition, matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  A first door-side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided in the upper right part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. A protruding second door-side effect movable body 2241b is provided. Similarly to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73, the game board 200 is provided with a board-side effect movable body 2242 that falls above the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The initial (origin) position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the closed position (the position in which the front frame door 106 is accommodated) shown in FIG. The initial (origin) position is the retracted position (position where the front frame door 106 is accommodated) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (b), with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b projects forward, The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in (b) of the same figure, the game board 200 is also provided in this first modification. The board-side effect movable body 2242 continues to operate, but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a provided on the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b also returns to the initial position. Return.

  A dedicated drive circuit may be provided for each of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable body 2242. Alternatively, the drive circuit may be provided separately for the door-side effect movable body and the board-side effect movable body. Also, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be a pair (for example, the same shape).

  In addition, you may provide the 3rd movable body controlled by the same control means as the 1st movable body (here 1st door side production movable body 2241a). For example, the third movable body may have the same shape as that of the first movable body. For example, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is provided at the upper left of the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. You may provide the 3rd door side production movable body of the same shape. The first movable body and the third movable body are provided at positions where they may come into contact with an external device or a person when the door body (here, the front frame door 106) is opened while the movable body is operating. It may be what was made. The first movable body and the third movable body may be controlled by the same control means and operate simultaneously. In addition, when the door is opened while the first movable body and the third movable body are in operation, both of the first operation (initial position returning operation) may be performed. Only the first operation (initial position returning operation) may be performed, or the operation may be stopped together. The third movable body may be controlled by a control means (for example, a drive circuit is different) different from that of the first movable body, or has a shape different from that of the first movable body. May be. Further, unlike the first movable body, the third movable body may be provided at a position where it does not hit an external device or a person even when the door is opened. In this case, even if the door is opened when the third movable body is operating, the initial position returning operation is not performed. For example, the operation may be continued or stopped on the spot. May be.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened in the second modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73.

  A first door-side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided in the upper right portion of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. A second door-side effect movable body 2241b to be opened is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. The initial (origin) position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the closed position (position accommodated in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. 5A, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b. The initial (origin) position is also the closed position (position accommodated in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b opens forward, The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in (b), the game board 200 is displayed as shown in (d). Although the board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the screen continues to operate, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b opened forward, which has a relatively high possibility of contacting the player, returns to the initial position. On the other hand, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opened upward, which has a relatively low possibility of coming into contact with the player, stops operating. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact, but if the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is rotated upward and opened, there is a possibility that the player will contact the initial stage. It becomes relatively low as much as when it returns to the position. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward via a horizontal posture opened forward, and returns to the initial position via a horizontal posture opened forward. For this reason, even if it is the 1st door side production movable body 2241a, when the front frame door 106 is opened in the horizontal posture opened forward, it returns to the initial position, or conversely rotates upward. Move.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 75 described above, either the initial position returning operation or the stop on the spot is performed depending on the position of the first movable body (door-side effect movable body). A sensor for detecting the door-side effect movable body is provided at a position where the operation is completed, and when the door-side effect movable body is detected by the sensor, there is a high possibility that the position where the operation is completed contacts the player. Whether or not to perform the initial position return operation or stop on the spot is determined depending on whether or not it is the position. The same applies to the case where the sensor is provided between the initial position and the position where the operation is completed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the door-side effect movable body is behind the sensor provided at the initial position (position far from the initial position), the initial position returning operation may be performed.

  If the front frame door 106 is closed while the door-side effect movable body is stopped, the door-side effect movable body remains stopped even if the front frame door 106 is closed, and a predetermined trigger (for example, The initial position returning operation may be performed when a symbol variation start command is received or when any movable body is operated. Alternatively, when the front frame door 106 is closed, an initial position returning operation may be performed.

  Also in this example, the second movable body (board-side effect movable body 2242) continues to operate regardless of the operation status of the first movable body.

  In the above description, “a first movable body (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241a or the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) provided at a position where the player can contact;

  A game machine comprising a second movable body (for example, a board-side effect movable body 2242) provided at a position where the player cannot contact,

  When the first condition (for example, opening of the front frame door 106) is satisfied, the first movable body has a first position (for example, the front frame door 106) that is an initial position of the first movable body. Back to the stowed position)

  The second movable body is returned to the second position, which is the initial position of the second movable body, when a second condition (for example, an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208) is satisfied,

  The game machine characterized in that the first condition is different from the second condition. Was explained.

  According to this game stand, the maintainability can be improved. In addition, since the initial position returning operation is performed according to the conditions, it may be possible to easily notice the failure of the effect movable body.

When the door is opened during movement, the first drive control means may continue the operation of the first movable body. Further, when the first movable body performs the initial position returning operation, the second drive control unit may cause the second movable body to perform the initial position returning operation. Further, when the first movable body performs the initial position returning operation, the second drive control unit may stop the operation of the second movable body. Further, when the door body is closed in a state where the first movable body is stopped, the first drive control means causes the first movable body to continue from the time when the first movable body is stopped. Operation may be performed. Further, when it is determined that the first movable body is behind (a position farther from the initial position) than the detection means provided at the initial position for detecting the first movable body, at least the detection means side (initial stage) You may make it evacuate to the position side. A third movable body controlled by the same control means as the first movable body may be provided. In this case, the third movable body may have a different shape from the first movable body, or may have the same shape (including a point-symmetric shape and a line-symmetric shape).
In addition, “a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front frame door 106);

Movable body control means for controlling the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516),
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body,

  The door body includes at least door opening detection means (for example, a frame door opening sensor 609) capable of detecting that the door body has been opened,

  The first condition includes at least a condition established by detecting the opening of the door body by the door opening detection means,

  The game machine characterized in that the movable body control means does not return the second movable body to the second position when the first condition is satisfied. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, the door-side effect movable body 2241 may be prevented from coming into contact with an external device or a person. In addition, the board-side effect movable body 2242 continues to operate while the front frame door 106 is open, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from showing the effect and reducing the game motivation. Furthermore, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board surface (particularly around the board side effect movable body 2242) while the front frame door 106 is opened.

  In addition, the movable body control means may have a control means provided for each movable body.

  Further, “the movable body control means controls the first movable object to return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied while the first movable object is movable ( For example, a gaming machine that executes step S1203) shown in FIG. ”Was also explained.

  In some cases, the game machine can also prevent the first movable body from coming into contact with an external device or a person.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened when the power is turned on in the third modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73.

  A first arc-shaped first door-side effect movable body 2241a that protrudes forward is provided at the upper part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 76, and a lower part that protrudes forward is provided at the lower part. A convex arc-shaped second door side effect movable body 2241b is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. The initial position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the initial position of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b are both retracted positions (positions stored in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. is there. When the first door-side effect movable body 2241, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 performs an initial position returning operation (power-on operation) when the power is turned on. That is, step S1302 shown in FIG. 72 is executed, and first, a power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed. As shown in FIG. 6B, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a once protrudes forward and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. It is determined that the current position is the initial position. The operation speed (first speed) of the door-side effect movable body (first door-side effect movable body 2241a, second door-side effect movable body 2241b) in the power-on operation will be described with reference to FIGS. The operating speed (second speed) in the initial position returning operation of the door-side effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is opened may be faster or slower. When the speed is high, the power-on operation can be completed quickly, and when the front frame door 106 is opened, it is possible to prevent injuries even if a person comes in contact with the initial position return. Normally, the power-on operation is performed before the opening of the store and is often performed in a state where there is no player. On the other hand, opening the front frame door 106 is often performed in front of the player due to ball clogging or the like. Considering this, the fast case is preferable. On the other hand, when the front frame door 106 is opened faster (it is slower when the power is turned on), the initial position return operation can be completed without touching the person during the initial position return. There is. In this case, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the initial position returning operation may be performed at the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body. Note that the speed when the power is turned on (first speed) and the speed when the front frame door 106 is opened (second speed) may be the same without necessarily providing a difference between them. For example, both may be set to the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4D, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b once protrudes forward. When the front frame door 106 is opened during the power-on operation, as shown in FIG. 7E, step S1303 shown in FIG. 72 is executed, and as shown in FIG. The movable body 2241b stops on the spot.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (f), when the front frame door 106 is closed, the operation shifts to the power-on operation of the next effect movable body (here, the board-side effect movable body 2242), and the stopped second door side. The effect movable body 2241b remains stationary as it is, and returns to the initial position when a command for effecting is sent.

  When the front frame door 106 is closed, the power-on operation of the stopped effect movable body may be resumed.

  In addition, when the door (front frame door 106) is open, the first movable body (door-side effect movable body 2241) operates for a predetermined time (or a predetermined distance), and then the first An initial position returning operation of the movable body may be performed.

Further, in this example, the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed after the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body 2242 is performed after the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed first. Then, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body may be performed.
FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the power-on operation described with reference to FIG.

  When the power-on operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a (see FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c)) is finished, the front surface immediately before the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is started. When the frame door 106 is opened, the entire series of power-on operations is temporarily interrupted in the example shown in FIG. For this reason, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is not started. Further, the power-on operation of the board side effect movable body 2242 is not started. By doing so, it becomes easy to confirm whether the effect movable body is normal when performing maintenance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in (d2) of the figure, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is skipped, and even if the front frame door 106 is opened, it does not come into contact with an external device. The power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is executed first. Thereby, the time until the power-on operation is completed can be made shorter than the example shown in (d1).

  As shown in FIG. 5E, when the front frame door 106 is closed, the power-on operation is continued. That is, in the example shown in (d1) of the figure, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed, and then the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed. Further, in the example shown in (d2) in the figure, if the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is completed, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed. If there are a plurality of board-side production movable bodies and the power-on operation of all board-side production movable bodies is not completed, the power-on operation of all board-side production movable bodies will be The door-side effect movable body 2241b may be powered on, or the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be turned on first, leaving the panel-side effect movable body that has not been powered on. May be performed.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a state where power interruption / recovery is instantaneously performed while the door-side effect movable body is operating in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 75.

  In FIG. 78 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 78 (b), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door side. The production movable body 2241b opens forward. At this time, power interruption occurs, the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes dark, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b are stopped.

  FIG. 1C1 shows an example when power is restored instantaneously. Both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, regardless of whether the front frame door 106 is open or closed, that is, regardless of whether the front frame door 106 is open or closed. The initial position return operation is performed to determine that the current position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the initial position, and the current position of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be the initial position. Determine.

  If the front frame door 106 is opened after performing the initial position return operation, the above power-on operation is not performed, and the power-on operation is performed after the front frame door 106 is closed. Also good. Conversely, the power-on operation may not be performed even when the front frame door 106 is closed. Further, in FIG. 10C1, the initial position return operation is performed regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. However, if the front frame door 106 is opened at the time of power recovery, the initial position return operation is performed. Instead, the initial position return operation may be performed after the front frame door 106 is closed.

  FIG. 2C2 shows another example when power is restored instantaneously. In this example, both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b perform the initial position return operation when the front frame door 106 is opened. The initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. For example, even when the front frame door 106 is opened before power is restored and before the initial position return operation is performed, the initial position return operation is performed and the front frame door 106 remains closed. Alternatively, an initial position return operation may be performed.

  The example described with reference to FIG. 78 (c1) and FIG. 78 (c2) may be as follows. When power is restored, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the board-side effect movable body. The initial position return operation may be performed only when the initial position is not reached. Further, when power is restored, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a (second door-side effect movable body 2241b). Furthermore, the initial position return operation may be performed only when the initial position is not reached.

  In the above description, “comprising power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply control unit 660),

  The first movable body moves to the first position at a first speed when power supply is started by the power source means (for example, a power-on operation),

  The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the first movable body moves to the first position at a second speed different from the first speed when the first condition is satisfied. ”Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, when the first condition is satisfied, the first movable body can be prevented from being injured even if it comes into contact with a person, or the initial stage can be reached soon before it comes into contact with a person. The position return operation can be completed.
The first speed (second speed) may be the first speed (second speed).

  The second movable body moves at a third speed to the second position when power supply is started by the power supply means, and the second movable body is moved to the second position. When the condition is satisfied, the vehicle may move to the second position at a fourth speed different from the first speed.

  The third speed mentioned here may be faster than the fourth speed, may be a slow speed, or may be the same speed as the fourth speed.

  The first speed (second speed) may be slower than the third speed. Since the movement of the first movable body is relatively slow at the start of power supply, it is possible to ensure the safety of the player, maintenance person, etc., and the movement of the second movable body is relatively fast. The power-on operation is performed in a short time.

Further, the first speed (second speed) may be faster than the third speed. Contact with the outside can be prevented, and maintenance can be improved such that the maintenance person can easily understand that the second movable body is not in the original position.
The first speed (second speed) may be the same speed as the third speed.

  The first speed (second speed) may be a speed slower than the fourth speed. In addition to ensuring the safety of players, maintenance personnel, etc., when there is something hidden by the operation of the second movable body, the second movable body returns to the initial position relatively quickly. For this reason, what has been hidden can be seen quickly, and it may be possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being lowered.

  The first speed (second speed) may be faster than the fourth speed. Contact with the outside can be prevented, and there is an advantage that the player can easily notice an abnormality.

  The first speed (second speed) may be the same speed as the fourth speed. In addition, "we have power supply means to supply power

  The movable body control means performs a first initial operation process (for example, the step shown in FIG. 72) for moving the first movable body to the first position when power supply is started by the power supply means. S1302)

  The movable body control means is configured to perform a second initial operation process (for example, one of power-on operations) for moving the second movable body to the second position when power supply is started by the power supply means. Part)

  The movable body control means performs at least one of the first initial operation process and the second initial operation process, and then performs the other initial operation process (for example, in FIG. 76). Example), a game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained. In addition, "we have power supply means to supply power,

  The movable body control means performs a first initial operation process (for example, the step shown in FIG. 72) for moving the first movable body to the first position when power supply is started by the power supply means. S1302)

  The movable body control means is configured to perform a second initial operation process (for example, one of power-on operations) for moving the second movable body to the second position when power supply is started by the power supply means. Part)

  The movable body control means performs the second initial operation process during the execution of the first initial operation process (for example, an example shown in FIG. 77 (d2)). Stand. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the power-on operation of the second movable body during the power-on operation of the first movable body may shorten the period during which it is difficult for the player to play the game.

  The movable body control means may perform the second initial operation process while temporarily suspending the first initial operation process and suspending the first initial operation process. Good.

  In the above description, the front frame door 106 is opened. However, even when the main body 104 is opened, the door side effect movable body 2241 is similarly returned to the initial position. However, if it takes more time to open the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 together due to the weight of the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 than the case where only the front frame door 106 is opened, the first frame door 106 and the main body 104 are opened. Although the timing for starting the initial position return operation of the movable body (door-side effect movable body 2241) is delayed, on the contrary, when the movable body tilts downward due to the weight of the main body 104, there is a movable object that contacts the external device. Assuming a certain case, the timing for starting the initial position returning operation may be accelerated.

  Also, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during or after the door-side effect movable body 2241 is operating, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is provided. The operation may be stopped. The operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is also performed when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during the initial position returning operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is open. May be stopped.

  Furthermore, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during or after the door-side effect movable body 2241 is operating, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is provided. The initial position returning operation may be performed. In addition, when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during the initial position returning operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is open, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is initially set. The position returning operation may be continued.

  In addition, as a method of determining the load of the load from the outside, for example, providing a detection means other than the initial position can be mentioned.

Further, in the case of a rotating game machine (slot machine), the first movable body is provided at a position where the player of the door body can contact, and the position of the player inside the door body (the liquid crystal display device) The second movable body is provided at a position where a person can see such as the front side of the lamp, the inside of the lamp, and the interior of the decorative panel.
<Chance button>

  Next, the structure of the above-described chance button 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. 79 is a side sectional view for explaining the movement of the chance button 700. FIG. 79 (a) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, and FIG. 79 (b) is an operation completion position. FIG. 3C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. FIGS. 6D to 6F are views showing only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b extracted in each state of FIGS. The chance button 700 corresponds to an example of a first movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

  FIG. 80A is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 80B is a diagram in which the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 79A, the chance button 700 includes a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 with a ball storage tray and a movable portion 704 (up and down movable relative to the fixed portion 702). 704a, 704b), a spring 706 that is contracted between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 with a ball storage tray and biases the movable portion 704 upward, and a drive that enables the movable portion 704 to move up and down. 708 (708a, 708b) and a detection unit 710 capable of detecting the position of the movable unit 704. Although not shown, the chance button lamp 138 described above is disposed at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

  The fixed portion 702 is configured by two rod-shaped fixed shafts 702a erected on the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and a disk-shaped fixed plate 702b fixed at the ends of the two fixed shafts 702a. ing. As shown in FIG. 79 (d), the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into insertion holes 704b1 formed in the lower case 704b described later and guide the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. In addition, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has an opening on one side and the upper case 704a having a cylindrical shape, which is an operation surface 704a1 on which the player's finger or hand contacts, and an upper portion so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. A disc-shaped lower case 704b fixed to the case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 79D to 79F, the lower case 704b has two insertion holes 704b1 inserted through the fixed shafts 702a and a center through which a rotation member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later is inserted. An insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 protruding toward the center of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as a base end, and a detection protruding downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as a base end A piece 704b4 is formed.

  The drive unit 708 includes a drive source 708a configured by a motor, a solenoid, and the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b that is driven to rotate about the axis by the drive source 708a. A concave groove 708b1 is linearly formed from one side of the longitudinal direction to the other side of a part of the outer edge of the rotating member 708b, and the lower case 704b1 is engaged with the lower case 704b1 at the lower end side thereof. An engaging recess 708b2 that can engage with the piece 704b3 is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (d), the rotating member 708 b is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 706 when the engaging recess 708 b 2 engages with the engaging piece 704 b 3 of the lower case 704 b. As shown in FIG. 79 (e), when the engagement between the engagement recess 708b2 and the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b is released, the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706. It is possible to rotate between a permission position that allows movement upward by a force.

  The detection unit 710 includes an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is configured such that the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b can advance and retreat between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit. Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub control unit 400 is in a state where the movable unit 704 is not pressed downward (the chance button 700 is pressed) as shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and (b). 79) (the state in which the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b has not entered between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710) and the movable unit 704 is moved downward as shown in FIG. (The state in which the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b enters between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710).

  In the initial position shown in FIGS. 79A and 80A, the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permitted position to the restricting position, and the movable portion 704 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating member 708. It is possible to move only to In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710 so that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  79B and 80C, the rotation member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the restriction of the upward movement, and the spring 706 is moved. It moves upward by the urging force, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, is again restricted from moving upward, and can move only downward. Even in this operation completion position, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), when the upper case 704 a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704 b 4 of the lower case 704 b is detected by the detection unit 710. The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 79 (c) is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80 (c). In this embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed to near the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to move the rotating member 708b from the permitted position to the restricted position. The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, the state during the operation shown in FIG. 80B, that is, the chance button 700 is changed from the initial position shown in FIGS. 79A and 80A to FIGS. 79B and 80B. In the state of moving to the operation completion position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 Is ignored (the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is not determined to be valid).

  With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the chance button 700 during the operation of the chance button 700, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at an unintended timing by the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation during the operation of the chance button 700 is validated. May be.

In addition, when the chance button is pressed before the operation of the chance button (when the chance button is pressed before the detection is accepted), the pressing operation of the chance button may be ignored. The pressing operation may be validated. In addition, when the chance button pressing operation is valid, the chance button may be operated, or the chance button may not be operated. In these cases, the chance button can be accepted, or the chance button can be accepted.
<Operation reception production>

  Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the operation state of the chance button 700, whether or not the detection result of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is accepted, and whether or not the operation acceptance effect can be executed.

FIG. 82A is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 82B is a ball when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. FIG. 6C is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a storage tray, and FIG. 10C shows the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it fails). It is an external perspective view. FIG. 4D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 4E is a case where the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. It is a figure showing an example of operation reception effect to perform, and the figure (f) is an example of operation reception effect performed when chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG.
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  When the first sub control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position shown in FIG. 82A (before the operation shown in FIG. 81), the detection unit 710 causes the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b to be moved. It becomes a detectable state (a state in which a detection result can be accepted). In addition, when a pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this initial position, a chance button effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Here, as the chance button effect, for example, an effect of changing an image or a character displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the number of times or the speed of pressing the chance button 700, or the timing of pressing the chance button 700, for example. An effect such as changing an image or a character can be given depending on, but is not limited thereto. That is, it is only necessary to have an effect in which at least a part of the mode (display (eg, animation, image, character, etc.), sound, movement, color, etc.) changes according to the pressing operation of the chance button 7000.

  In addition, there may be a single aspect or a plurality of aspects. For example, in the case of a plurality of combinations, the combination with the same category (display, sound, movement, color, etc.) The color may change from red to blue, LED2 changes from white to blue, etc.), combinations with different categories (for example, display in liquid crystal (change from display A to display B), chance button It may be its own operation (change from no operation to rotation operation).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position (before operation), the first sub-control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. In addition, by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is suggested to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed, and as shown in FIG. Using the symbol display device 208, an operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed (in this example, a character display “Press the chance button !!” and blue at the initial position) (An image display imitating the chance button 700 emitting light and an image display of a downward arrow).

In this way, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the initial position. A pressing operation can be performed. Note that the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect using various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, and the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed. That is, the operation reception effect may be an effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed.
<Operation reception production / in operation>

  The first sub-control unit 400 detects when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 82A to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 82B (during the operation shown in FIG. 81). Even if the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the unit 710, the detection result is ignored (so that the detection result cannot be accepted). Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute the above-described chance button effect. In addition, after accepting the detection result of the chance button 700 (after the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is once validated), it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 is in operation. In some cases, the chance button effect may not be executed.

In addition, when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation), the first sub-control unit 400 does not light the chance button lamp 138 and does not perform the operation reception effect. It is configured as follows. As described above, if the chance button 700 is not lighted and the operation reception effect is not executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is invalid, which is disadvantageous due to an erroneous operation. Will not suffer.
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 82B (after the operation shown in FIG. 81 is completed), the detection piece of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. 704b4 can be detected (detection result can be received). In addition, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at the operation completion position, the above-described chance button effect is performed.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position (after the operation is completed), the first sub control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 82 (e), the player is informed that the chance button 700 can be pressed by making the chance button 700 emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red). The operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed using the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!” and the operation is completed. (An image display imitating the chance button 700 emitting red light at the position and an image display of a downward arrow).

As described above, if the chance button 700 is caused to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the operation completion position. The pressing operation can be performed.
<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>

  As shown in FIG. 82C, the first sub control unit 400 can detect the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b by the detection unit 710 even when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. (A state in which the detection result can be accepted). Here, the case where the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position is, for example, the case where the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is caught by the fixed portion 702 and the movable portion 704 cannot be raised to the operation completion position. An example is a case where the biasing force of the spring 706 of the chance button 700 is weakened and the movable part 704 cannot be raised to the operation completion position.

  Further, even when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the chance button 700 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (the effect shown in FIG. 82 (e)) performed after the operation is completed) that suggests to the player that it is possible is performed.

  As described above, even when the chance button 700 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 700 is enabled, the operation of the chance button 700 is performed even when the chance button 700 breaks down. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 700 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  In this example, when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button 700 does not emit light in a predetermined color. For example, a color different from the initial position or the operation completion position is used. (For example, green) may be emitted, or light may be emitted in the same color (for example, blue or red) as before or after the operation is completed.

  In this example, the chance button 700 emits light in a predetermined color. For example, the chance button 700 may blink in a predetermined color. In this case, the initial position, the operation completion position, the initial position, and the operation completion may be performed. The blinking pattern may be changed at each of the stops between positions. For example, blinking is repeated at a first cycle (for example, 1 second) at the initial position, and blinking is repeated at a second cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first cycle at the operation completion position. When the movement is stopped between the operation completion positions, blinking is repeated in a third period (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the first period.

  With such a configuration, the player can grasp that the pressing operation is possible in each state, and can also grasp that each state is different, In some cases, a pressing operation suitable for the state can be performed.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has the operating means (for example, the chance buttons 700 and 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation) that can be operated by the player. Section 758, the bet button 132, and a pressing surface of these buttons and operation section), presentation means (for example, the first sub-control section 400) capable of executing at least presentation, and moved means (for example, upper case 704a) , A movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least performing movement control for moving the base 754), wherein the operation means is the movement by the movement control means. When the control is performed, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 80 (a), 82 (a), 83 (a), and 93 (a)) to the second position (for example, , FIG. 82 (c), FIG. 83 (b), and FIG. 93 (c)), and the rendering means performs the second control when the movement control is performed. When the operation means moved to the position is operated, a special effect can be executed at least. The effect means is operated by the operation means in spite of the movement control. Even if it does not move to the second position, at least the special effect (for example, the effect when the button shown in FIG. 96 (c) is pressed) can be executed in response to the operation of the operation means. It is a game table characterized by being.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The buttons 132 and the pressing surfaces of these buttons and the operation unit), the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least the production, and the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). And a movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of performing at least movement control for moving the game device, wherein the operation means is controlled by the movement control means. In this case, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 80A, 82A, 83A, and 93A) to the second position (for example, FIG. c), FIG. 82 ( 83 (b) and FIG. 93 (c)), and the effect means has a special effect execution condition established (for example, the bet button 132 is initially set). At a position other than the position and the operation completion position, a special effect (for example, an effect when the button is pressed as shown in FIG. 96C) is executed at least when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position. The special performance execution condition is satisfied when any of a plurality of conditions is satisfied, and the first condition among the plurality of conditions is the movement It is established when the operation means that has moved to the second position due to control is operated, and the second condition among the plurality of conditions is that the movement control is performed. Nevertheless Even if the operation unit is not moved to the second position, in which established in response to the manipulation means has been operated, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation means cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the operation means is operated by the player. By enabling the production according to the situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, operation accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation by the player (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet button 132, and these buttons and operations. And the operation means may be provided in the operation reception means.

  The special effect may not be performed even if the operation means is operated during the execution of the movement control.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, the rendering means may be capable of at least rendering an effect in response to the operation means being operated by a player even when the moved means is located at the first position. .

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, there are cases where the player has more opportunities to operate the operation unit and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, a notification unit capable of performing at least notification for prompting the operation of the operation unit is provided, and the notification unit moves the operation unit to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed. Even if it is not, the notification may be performed.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with operating means (for example, a chance button 700) that can be operated by the player. A touchable operation part (for example, upper case 704a) is provided, and the operation part is moved from a first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)) to a second position (for example, FIG. c) a drive means (for example, the drive unit 708) that can move at least to the operation completion position shown in c), a drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) that can control the drive of the drive means, and the drive When the operation means is moved by the player to the second position and then the operation means is operated by the player, the production means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least producing an effect; The directing hand Is the case where the operation unit has not been moved to the second position after the drive unit has performed control to move the operation unit from the first position toward the second position ( For example, even when the operation means is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 82 (c)), at least an effect can be executed in response to the operation of the operation means by the player ( For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), when there is a pressing operation of the chance button 700 at the timing of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position, a chance button effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot be moved to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation unit, the operation unit is operated by the player. By enabling the production according to the situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, when the driving means is in the middle of the control in which the driving means moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 80B). Alternatively, it may be configured so that the effect is not executed even when the operation means is operated by the player.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, even when the operation unit is located at the first position, at least an effect may be executed in response to the operation means being operated by the player.

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, there are cases where the player has more opportunities to operate the operation unit and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the information processing device includes notification means (for example, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least notification for prompting operation of the operation means, and the notification means is configured such that the operation unit has the second position. The notification (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f)) may be performed even when the user has not moved to the position.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the operation unit can be operated even if the operation unit does not move to the position where the operation unit is originally moved, so that the player misses the opportunity to operate the operation unit. There are cases where it can be prevented. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and the operation unit), the production unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least production, and the notification unit (for example, chance button) capable of executing at least notification. Lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and movement control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754). The operating device has a first position (for example, FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80) when the movement control by the movement control device is performed. 2 (a), FIG. 83 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) to the second position (for example, FIG. 80 (c), FIG. 82 (c), FIG. 83 (b), FIG. 93 ( c) is moved to the operation completion position shown in c), and the production means is special when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed. It is possible to execute at least an effect (the effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 96C), and the notifying unit is configured so that the operation unit is in the second position in spite of the movement control being performed. The player can operate the operation means even when the player has not moved to the position (for example, when the vehicle has stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 82C). Can be notified at least (for example, an operation reception performance as shown in FIG. 82 (f)). That it is possible to perform), it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet, and the like that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and the operation unit), the production unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least production, and the notification unit (for example, chance button) capable of executing at least notification. Lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and movement control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754). The operating device has a first position (for example, FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80) when the movement control by the movement control device is performed. 2 (a), FIG. 83 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) to the second position (for example, FIG. 80 (c), FIG. 82 (c), FIG. 83 (b), FIG. 93 ( The operation means moves to the operation completion position shown in c), and the production means produces a special production (production when the button shown in FIG. 96 (c) is pressed) when the special production execution condition is satisfied. Can be executed at least, and the special performance execution condition is established when any one of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, and one condition among the plurality of conditions is: This is established when the operation means that has moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control being performed, and the notification means is configured to perform the operation in spite of the movement control being performed. When the means has not moved to the second position (for example, FIG. 82 Even when it is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in c), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, FIG. 82 ( It is possible to perform an operation reception effect as shown in f)).

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation unit, the game is performed by informing the user of the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, the notification means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means when the movement control is being executed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  In addition, the notification means indicates that the operation means has moved to the second position when the operation means has been moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed. (For example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (e)) is executed at least, and the notification means has not moved to the second position even though the movement control has been performed. Even in such a case, it is configured to execute at least the same suggestion (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f)) that indicates that the operation means has moved to the second position. Also good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

  The informing means is a plurality of informing means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208). The informing means that the player can operate the operating means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an operable opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) that can be operated by the player and the operation means. And a notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and an operating portion (for example, an upper case 704a) that can be contacted by a player is provided in the operating means. The operation unit is capable of moving at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80A) to the second position (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIG. 80C). Means (for example, the drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive unit, and the operation unit is moved to the second position by the drive unit. The When the operation means is operated by a player, the display means includes an effect means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that can execute at least an effect, and the notification means includes the drive means that controls the operation section. After performing control to move from the first position toward the second position, the operation unit has not been moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 22C) Even when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, an operation reception as shown in FIG. 82 (f)). It is possible to produce an effect), and this is a gaming table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is provided by informing the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the notification unit is in the middle of control in which the driving unit moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation illustrated in FIG. 80B). Alternatively, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means that the player can operate the operation means. The notification may be made by at least one notification means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an operable opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to at least give an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position. May be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There is a case. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored) May be configured).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit notifies the user that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 82 (e)). At least the operation reception effect shown), and the same suggestion as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, you may comprise so that at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG.82 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.
<Modified example of chance button>

  Next, a modified example of the chance button will be described. FIG. 83A is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 before the operation, and FIG. 83B is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. FIG. 84 is a front view of the chance button 750 when viewed from the direction of the second operation unit 758.

  The chance button 750 includes a base 754 having a substantially triangular prism shape that is isosceles in a side view, a first operation unit 756 provided on the first surface of the base 754, and a first surface of the base 754. A second operating portion 758 provided on the second orthogonal surface, a first gear 754b fixed to the rotary shaft 754a on one side of the base 754, and a second gear meshing with the first gear 754b A gear 754c and a drive source 754d composed of a motor that rotationally drives the second gear 754c are included. The base 754 of the chance button 750 activates the drive source 754d, so that the rotation shaft 754a is the center between the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the operation completion position shown in FIG. 83 (b). It is configured to be rotatable.

  The first operation unit 756 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor, a sensor circuit, or the like that can detect a pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. When the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756, while the base 754 is shown in FIG. 83 (b). The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated in the operation completion position shown in FIG. That is, the player can perform an operation with the first operation unit 756 only when the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. Even when the base 754 is at the operation completion position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 may be validated.

  In addition, the second operation unit 758 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor, a sensor circuit, and the like that can detect a pressing operation of the second operation unit 758. When the base 754 is in the operation completion position shown in FIG. 83 (b), this detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, while the base 754 is shown in FIG. ), The detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated. That is, the player can perform an operation with the second operation unit 758 only when the base 754 is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. Note that the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be validated even when the base 754 is in the initial position.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) that can be operated by the player and the operation means. And a notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and an operating portion (for example, an upper case 704a) that can be contacted by a player is provided in the operating means. The operation unit is capable of moving at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80A) to the second position (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIG. 80C). Means (for example, the drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive unit, and the operation unit is moved to the second position by the drive unit. The When the operation means is operated by a player, the display means includes an effect means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that can execute at least an effect, and the notification means includes the drive means that controls the operation section. After performing control to move from the first position toward the second position, the operation unit has not been moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c)). Even when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, an operation reception as shown in FIG. 82 (f)). It is possible to produce an effect), and this is a gaming table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit cannot move to the second position where the operation unit should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is provided by informing the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play declines due to a failure of the operating means, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the notification unit is in the middle of control in which the driving unit moves the operation unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, during the operation illustrated in FIG. 80B). Alternatively, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operation means, and to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In some cases, erroneous detection of reception of the operation means due to vibration or the like can be prevented.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two buttons, a chance button lamp 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means that the player can operate the operation means. The notification may be made by at least one notification means.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to further prevent the player from losing an opportunity to operate by performing notification that prompts the operation. The plurality of notification means may at least notify that the player can operate the operation means, and the first notification means and the second notification means among the plurality of notification means play the operation means. It may be notified at least that the person can operate.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to at least give an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position. May be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There is a case. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored) May be configured).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and make it easy to notice a malfunction of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit notifies the user that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 82 (e)). At least the operation reception effect shown), and the same suggestion as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, you may comprise so that at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG.82 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position that should have moved, and not to give a disadvantage to the player as compared to when moving to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, when the operation means is driven to indicate that “this variation can be expected”, the operation means does not move to the original movement position, thereby informing the player that “this variation can be expected”. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a situation where it is impossible to do so. Further, there are cases where the player can be operated with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, it can give the player a sense of incongruity, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means There are cases where it can be handled. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.
<Operation reception effect of chance button 750>

  Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 750 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 2B is a side of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. The cross-sectional view (c) is a side cross-sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down).

FIG. 6D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 5E is a diagram when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. It is a figure showing an example of operation reception effect to perform, and the figure (f) is an example of operation reception effect performed when chance button 750 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it fails). FIG.
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  As described above, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 85A, the pachinko machine according to the modified example validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. On the other hand, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated.

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position, the first operation unit of the chance button 750 is used at a predetermined timing using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 85 (d). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the operation of pressing 756 is possible (in this example, a character display of “Press the chance button !!”, an image display imitating the first operation unit 756, and a downward direction. (Image display of arrow).

  Thus, if the operation acceptance effect is executed at a timing at which the operation of the first operation unit 756 can be performed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is effective. The player can reliably perform the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the initial position.

Instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 can be pressed by causing the first operation unit 756 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). You may suggest it to the player. Further, the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect using various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, and the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed.
<Operation reception production / in operation>

In the pachinko machine according to the modified example, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 85A to the operation completion position shown in FIG. Both the detection result of the pressing operation of 756 and the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 are invalidated. When the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position, the operation reception effect is not performed.
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 85 (b), the pachinko machine according to the modified example enables the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, while The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated. In this way, by deactivating the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the operation completion position, when the chance button 750 returns from the operation completion position to the initial position, an object is placed between the chance button 750 and the main body. And a situation where a player's hand is caught may be avoided, and safety may be improved.

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position, the second operation of the chance button 750 is performed at a predetermined timing using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 85 (e). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the operation of pressing the part 758 is possible (in this example, “Please press the super chance button!”, A character display different from the case of the first operation part 756, (Image display imitating the second operation unit 758 and image display of a downward arrow). In this way, when there are a plurality of types of operation units, if the operation reception effects corresponding to the respective operation units are different, it is possible to avoid mistakes in pressing the operation unit, etc. In some cases, decline can be prevented. Instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the second operation unit 758 can be pressed by causing the second operation unit 758 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red). You may suggest it to the player.

  The content of the operation reception effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 85 (e). For example, the image display imitating the second operation unit 758 (operation unit) may not be performed, and a downward arrow may be displayed. It is not necessary to display an image. When the operation unit is caused to emit light, the luminance of the operation unit may be lower than the luminance of other parts (for example, the outer frame 102 or the game board 200), or higher than the luminance of other parts. May be. With such a configuration, the operation unit can be made more conspicuous than other parts, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the operation unit that can be operated, and the convenience of the player can be improved. is there.

  In addition, as the operation reception effect, a display (for example, a meter or a time display) indicating a period during which the operation can be received may be performed. In this case, the remaining time during which the operation of the operation unit can be received may be displayed. Good.

  Further, the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 and the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be simultaneously detected. In this case, as the operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation unit 758 are detected. The operation reception effect (for example, “Press the chance button or the super chance button !!”), the first operation unit 756 and the second operation It is preferable to perform image display imitating the portion 758 and image display of a downward arrow. With such a configuration, variations of operations by the player can be widened, and the player's willingness to play may be increased.

Further, the operation reception effect in this case is an effect that suggests that either one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can be pressed (for example, “Press the chance button !!”). (Character notation). Moreover, when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only one of the operation reception notifications may be performed.
<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>

  The pachinko machine according to the modified example is configured to validate the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 even when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. Here, when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is hooked on the main body or the like to reach the operation completion position from the initial position (or from the operation completion position). An example of such a case is that it cannot be rotated (to the initial position).

  Further, even when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the player is informed that the chance button 750 can be pressed at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 85 (f). The suggested operation acceptance effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (the effect shown in FIG. 85 (e)) performed after the operation is completed) is performed.

  As described above, even when the chance button 750 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 750 is enabled, the operation of the chance button 750 is performed even when the chance button 750 is broken. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 750 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  It should be noted that an operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 85 (e)) performed when the user is at the operation completion position and an operation reception effect (for example, when stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position) The mode of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 85 (f) may be different. For example, the first type of notification means (for example, two types of liquid crystal display device and lamp) is used for the operation reception effect that is performed when the user is at the operation completion position, while between the initial position and the operation completion position. A second type of notification means (for example, three types of liquid crystal display device, lamp, and speaker) different from the first type may be used for the operation reception effect performed when the operation is stopped.

  In addition, the same type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, an operation reception effect performed when the operation reception effect is performed when the operation is completed, and an operation reception effect performed when the operation is completed between the initial position and the operation completion position). And a speaker), some of the notification means may be different. For example, in the operation reception effect that is performed at the operation completion position, the first display (for example, character display and image display) is performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the operation performed when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. In the reception effect, a second display (for example, only character display) different from the first display may be performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the lamp and the speaker may perform the same effect.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify whether the chance button 750 is at a predetermined position or at a position other than the predetermined position, and an operation according to the state of the chance button 750 may be prompted.
<Example of slot machine>

  Next, an example of a slot machine will be described. A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 86 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 110 to 112 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are generally displayed three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 113 is disposed on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating the winning line 114 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal win line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of 3 cards are inserted, 2 when the bet button 131 is pressed, and 3 when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. In addition, the bet button 132 also functions as a chance button that changes the appearance mode by the player's operation. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button 132. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that the game can be started. The lamp 121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. is there. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop button 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The payment button 134 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  Below the stop button unit 136 is provided a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and pasting various types of certificate. At the lower part of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. And a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 100 when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157. It has become.

  FIG. 87 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the left side plate 260, the right side plate 260, the lower surface plate 264, and the back plate 242, and that opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores the main control board is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 242. Below the three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. On the side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, a sub control board storage case 220 containing a sub control board is disposed. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  The lower surface plate 264 is provided with a medal payout device 180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as a main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500 described later. To do. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power source is cut off is provided. Yes.

  A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. Yes.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and an effect device 160 and an effect control board (which controls the effect device 160) are provided above the symbol display window 113. An upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the symbol display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals etc. on the medal tray 161. Yes. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into main effects according to a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery of a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 314 as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts main processing main processing described later).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, and a medal slot 141 at every interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110 , The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 are installed in each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 131 sensor are installed in each of the bet button 130 and the bet button 131, and are inserted when a medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted as an inserted medal into the game. Detect operations. The bet button 132 sensor is installed on the bet button 132. When the bet button 132 functions as a medal insertion button, a medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted as an insertion medal into the game. When the betting button 132 is functioning as a chance button, a pressing operation of the chance button is detected.

  The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. Becomes L level. When detecting this signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A driving circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 338 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start possible lamp 121, and a stored number A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

  Further, an information output circuit 334 (external concentration terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

  The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 is a voltage of the power source. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various kinds of lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. (A lamp for causing the bet button 132 to emit light) and the like.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with a shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404. A sensor circuit 426 is provided, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interruption time.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 425, and a drive unit 427 that drives the bet button 132 up and down is connected to the drive circuit 425. The operation of the bet button 132 will be described in detail in the following <Bet button 132>.

  In addition, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 500 via the output interface. Second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of effect device 160 including display control of effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is configured by a plurality of control units such as a control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various driving devices for effects. Also good.

  The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

The second sub control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. In this initial setting, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314, and initial setting Set the value. In step S103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 120 is turned on in response to the insertion of the medal. Note that when a re-win is won in the previous game, a process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 135, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S105, the number of inserted medals is determined and an effective winning line is determined. In step S107, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired. In step S109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random value acquired in step S107. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

  In step S113, rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started. In step S115, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which one of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S111. Stop based on data. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117. In step S117, a winning determination is performed. Here, when a picture combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For example, if “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the bell. In step S119, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S121, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control process, a process related to transition of each game state of normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal winning game is performed, and the game state is shifted when those start conditions and end conditions are satisfied. Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing, the game proceeds.
<Main controller 300 timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 318 is partitioned in the RAM 308. Store in the provided signal state storage area. Further, when information indicating the presence of a detection signal is stored in the signal state storage area corresponding to the bet button 132, preparations for transmitting a bet button reception command to the first sub-control unit 400 are made.

  In step S207, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318), and processing according to this status is performed (for example, the interrupt status of each acquired stop button 137 to 139). Based on the stop button reception process). In step S209, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, start lever reception command, bet button reception command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, stop button 137 through 139, a stop button acceptance command accompanying acceptance of the operation 139, a stop position information command accompanying the stop processing of the reels 110 to 112, a payout number command and a payout end command accompanying the medal payout processing, a command indicating a gaming state, etc.), bits 0 to 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). To have.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In step S213, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence / absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221. When the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. On the other hand, in step S221, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command is received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 406 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive circuit 424 for the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S316, a movable object control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive unit 427 of the bet button 132 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 425.

  In step S317, an information output process for performing setting to transmit a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309 is performed. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 91A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S315, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S609, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated. In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step S603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 92A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S803, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S611 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 536. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S905. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S905, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 includes information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 536). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S907, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S909, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of image drawing. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S911. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S911, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Bet button 132>

  FIG. 93A is an external perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 93B is a state in which the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). (B) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position.

The bet button 132 has substantially the same structure as the chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls the drive unit 427, whereby the initial position shown in FIG. And an operation completion position shown in FIG. 93 (c) are configured to be movable up and down.
<Bet button 132 / initial position>

In the initial position shown in FIG. 25 (a), the movable part of the bet button 132 is in a state in which the upward movement is restricted by a rotating member (not shown) and can only move downward. In this initial position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor. Can be detected.
<Bet button 132 / operation completion position>

At the operation completion position shown in FIG. 93 (c), the movable part of the bet button 132 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring (not shown), and the fixed plate (not shown) ), The movement in the upward direction is again restricted, and the movement is possible only in the downward direction. Even in this operation completion position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, whereby the bet button 132 is pressed. The operation can be detected.
<Bet button 132 / in operation>

  In the state shown in FIG. 93B, that is, during the operation in which the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 93A to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 93C, the bet button 132 is played. So that the detection result of the bet button 132 sensor is ignored even if the detected piece of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor (so as not to determine that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid). It is composed.

With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the bet button 132 during the operation of the bet button 132, the press operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the operation of pressing the bet button 132 is ignored during the operation of the bet button 132. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of pressing the bet button 132 is enabled. May be.
<When using the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button>

  FIG. 94A is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. The slot machine 100 is provided with the notification lamp 123, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion enable lamp 124, the game start enable lamp 121, and the game medal insertion lamp 129 described above.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game medal insertion enabling lamp 124 is lit, and the number of lighting of the game medal insertion lamp 129 is less than the prescribed number of medals required for one game (3 in this example). The state is a state in which a player can start a game by inserting a specified number of medals, and a medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet button 132. That is, in this state, the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button, and the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the bet button lamp (not shown) and sets the bet button 132 to a predetermined color (for example, yellow). ) To indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective. When a prescribed number of medals are inserted by the player, as shown in FIG. 5B, the game start ready lamp 121 is turned on to notify that the game start operation is possible. The

The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off when the number of medals that can be electronically stored in the slot machine 100 reaches the maximum storage number (for example, 50), and it is notified that the medal cannot be inserted. . When medals are inserted while the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off (when medals exceeding the maximum number of stored medals are to be inserted), the medals are forcibly discharged from the medal outlet 155. It is composed.
<When the bet button 132 cannot be used>

  FIG. 94B is a diagram for explaining a state where the bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button. As shown in FIG. 5B, the game medal insertion enable lamp 124 and the game start enable lamp 121 are lit, and the number of the game medal insertion lamps 129 is the same as the prescribed number (3 in this example). In this state, the player can start the game, and can start the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 (start the game) by pressing the start lever 135.

  When the game start ready lamp 121 is lit, a predetermined number of medals have been inserted, so that no medals are inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed (the detection result of pressing the medal insertion button is not accepted). , The bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button). In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is invalid by turning off the bet button lamp.

Even when the game start ready lamp is lit, the bet button 132 can be used as a chance button. For example, when the replay lamp 122 is lit, a medal cannot be inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed. On the other hand, for example, an effect that prompts the user to press the bet button 132 as an effect between the game in which the re-game player wins and the start of the next game (until the start lever 135 is pressed and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating). May be performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid by turning on the bet button lamp. The effect of prompting the user to press the bet button 132 may be performed during a period other than the illustrated period.
<When using the bet button 132 as a chance button>

  FIG. 94C is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 95A is a case where the bet button 132 has moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). 95) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132, FIG. 95B is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 95C is an initial position of the bet button 132. It is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when it stops between the operation completion positions and (for example, when it breaks down).

FIG. 94 (d) is a diagram showing an example of an operation acceptance effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 95 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a normal effect. FIG. 95 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position, and FIG. 95 (g) is a diagram between the initial position and the operation completion position. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when it stops at (for example, when it breaks down).
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the bet button 132 at the initial position shown in FIG. 94C, the first sub-control unit 400 has a predetermined timing (for example, timing to start receiving a detection result of the bet button pressing). The bet button lamp is lit and the bet button 132 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue) to indicate to the player that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective, and the second sub-control unit 500 shows an operation reception effect (in this example, the character of the lord) that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. Display an image showing a signboard on which a bet button 132 emitting blue light is drawn.

  In this example, in order to make the player easily determine whether the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button or a chance button, the bet button 132 is lit in different colors. You may make it light-emit with a color. In this example, the bet button 132 is caused to emit light in a predetermined color. For example, the bet button 132 may be flashed in a predetermined color. In this case, the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button. The blinking pattern may be changed depending on when the bet button 132 is used as a chance button. For example, when used as a medal insertion button, blinking is repeated at a first period (for example, 1 second), and when used as a chance button, a second period (for example, 0. (5 seconds).

With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the function of the button, and can prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to a button operation error or the like. is there. When the detection result of the bet button press can be received, the bet button lamp does not have to be lit, the operation reception effect does not have to be performed, and the operation of the operation means (or operation unit) is prompted. There is no need to produce a performance.
<Operation reception production / in operation>

  The first sub-control unit 400 operates the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 95A, that is, moves the bet button 132 from the initial position shown in FIG. 94C to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 95B. In the case of moving to the position, the bet button lamp is not turned on, and the operation reception effect is not performed. In this example, the effect image display device 157 performs a normal effect as shown in FIGS. 95 (d) and 96 (a). Here, as a normal effect, in the case of a pachinko machine, there are a fluctuating effect, a reach effect, a jackpot effect, and in the case of a slot machine, an effect during BB, an effect during reel rotation, There are directing.

Note that the bet button lamp may be lit during operation, or the brightness of the bet button lamp may be gradually increased. Further, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit in the first color (for example, red), and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is displayed in the second color (for example, white). It may be lit with. In addition, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit at the first luminance, and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is lit at the second luminance lower than the first luminance. May be.
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

When the bet button 132 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 95 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 turns the bet button lamp at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 95 (b). Illuminates and lights up the bet button 132 in a predetermined color (for example, red) to indicate to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed, as shown in FIG. An operation display effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 (in this example, an image display imitating the bet button 132 that emits red light at the operation completion position). And a downward arrow image display).
<Operation reception effect / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>

  The first sub-control unit 400 is in a state in which a pressing operation of the bet button 132 can be detected by the detection unit even when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. Become. Here, when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable part of the bet button 132 is caught by the fixed part and the movable part cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position, An example is the case where the urging force of the spring 132 is weakened and the movable part cannot be raised to the operation completion position.

  Further, even when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can be used as a medal insertion button and as a chance button, as shown in FIG. 95 (f). 95 (g) and FIG. 96 (b) at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIGS. 95 (g) and 96 (b), an operation reception effect (this example) suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed. Then, an operation acceptance effect (the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 95E) performed after the operation is completed is performed.

  Thus, even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the bet button 132 can be accepted, the bet button 132 can be operated even when the bet button 132 is broken. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not reduced. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player to operate. it can.

  FIG. 96C is an example of a special effect displayed when the operation of the bet button 132 is received. This effect is not only when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position, but also when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position. This is a special effect that is also displayed when an operation of the bet button 132 is received at the position. It should be noted that even if the button is not pressed, it may be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, after the end of the period during which the button can be accepted). (The operation pattern may be changed), light emitting means such as LEDs are lit (the light emission pattern may be changed), and sounds such as BGM and sound effects can be heard from sound output means such as speakers. Also good.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the above-described embodiment. For example, in addition to the liquid crystal display device and the lamp, the presentation unit and the notification unit according to the present invention include a speaker, A movable body, operation means itself, etc. can be applied. Therefore, the presentation by the presentation means and the notification by the notification means are not limited to the display by the liquid crystal display device or the light emission by the lamp. But you can. Further, the operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the bet button, and any operation means that can be operated by the player may be used.

  Further, the notification means may notify that the operation means does not accept the operation, or may notify that the operation means is in an error state. Further, there is one notification means, and the same notification mode may be performed even when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Further, there is one notification means, and a different notification mode may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the originally moving position. Here, the “different notification mode” may be any of the case where notification is not performed, the case where notification is performed, and the case where notification is not performed.

  Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and at least one or all of the plurality of notification means may perform notification that prompts an operation. Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the originally moving position. Here, the “different notification mode” may include a case where a predetermined notification unit among a plurality of notification units does not perform notification, or may include a case where all of the plurality of notification units do not perform notification. The operation means according to the present invention may be a BET, a stop button, a lever, or the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of effects as a result of accepting an operation by one notifying unit, at least one of the plurality of effects may not be performed when the operating unit is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves. Good. In addition, it is also possible to produce effects as a result of accepting operations by a plurality of notification means, and when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, at least one notification means of the plurality of notification means It is possible not to perform the production. Moreover, the production | generation as a result of having received operation in one alerting | reporting means may be one. The plurality of notification means may include a device that does not produce an effect as a result of receiving an operation.

  Moreover, although the example which performs the detection based on the detection result of an operation means and the said detection result in a different control part was shown, you may perform the detection based on the detection result of an operation means and the said detection result in the same control part. Even when the operation unit is detected and the presentation based on the detection result is performed by different control units, the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position. The operation detection result is transmitted to another control unit, and the other control unit is configured to receive the detection result. On the other hand, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection is performed. Although the result is transmitted to another control unit, the other control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit or the second control unit, While the first control unit or the second control unit is configured to receive the detection result, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit. Alternatively, the data may be transmitted to the second control unit, but the first control unit or the second control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result. In addition, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit, and the operation unit is located at the second position. Or when the operation means is operated during operation, the detection result may be transmitted to the second control unit.

  The transmission destination of the operation detection result before, during and after the operation of the operation means may be the first control unit. Further, even when the operation unit is operated during operation, the operation detection result may be received by another control unit. In addition, when the operation means before the operation is operated, the operation detection result is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, and when the operation means is operated during and after the operation, from the second control unit. You may make it transmit the detection result of operation to a 1st control part. Further, before operation and during operation, the second control unit and after operation may be transmitted to the first control unit.

  In addition, if the operation means does not operate to the second position where it originally moves, the notifying means notifies the second position where it should have moved if the notification means performs notification that suggests the second position where it originally moved. The player may be notified, and there may be a case where a disadvantage is not given to the player as compared with the case of moving to the second position where the player originally moves. In addition, when the operating means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, if the notifying means performs notification that does not suggest the second position where it originally moves, the player may be confused due to a mismatch between the operating state and the notification mode. May be able to prevent. In this case, the notification that does not suggest the second position to move originally may notify the position of the operating means before the operation, or the notification that does not suggest the second position to move originally may be A position different from that after the operation may be notified.

  In addition, the operation unit may include a plurality of operation units (for example, a first operation unit and a second operation unit). For example, before the operation of the operation unit, the operation detection result of the first operation unit is displayed. Before the operation of the operation means, the detection result of the operation of the second operation unit is not accepted, and when the operation means moves to the second position where it originally moves, at least the operation of the second operation unit You may comprise so that a detection result may be received.

  In addition, if the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation means is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is not obtained even if the first operation unit is operated. If it is not accepted, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, the second operation unit that can be originally operated can be operated, so that the same operation as when the operation means is moved to the second position where the operation means originally moves can be performed. There are cases where it can be prevented from being disadvantaged. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means is not operated up to the second position where it originally moves and the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received, the operation detection result is received when the first operation unit is operated. In such a case, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable, and may not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to operate because the first operation unit or the second operation unit may be operated. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable, You may alert | report only that the 2nd operation part can be operated by alerting | reporting means.

  In addition, when the operation means has not moved to the originally moved second position and the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted, the operation detection result is accepted even if the first operation unit is operated. If not, the notification unit may notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, there is a case in which the operation unit can be prevented from operating when the operation unit is not moved to the second position where the operation unit originally moves, and the operation unit can be prevented from being broken. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means is not operated to the second position where it originally moves and the detection result of the second operation unit is not received and the operation detection result is received by operating the first operation unit In addition, while notifying that the second operation unit is operable by the notification unit, it is not necessary to notify that the first operation unit is operable by the notification unit. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by changing the operation section that can be operated when the operating means is not moved to the original moving position. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit can be operated, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable, You may alert | report only that the 2nd operation part can be operated by alerting | reporting means.

  Further, the operated means according to the present invention may be an operating means. In addition, when the operation means is not moved to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed, the effect means is adapted to respond to the operation means being operated. You may make it not perform an effect at least.

  In addition, when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control is operated, (1) detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance provided in the operation means) The button 750 detection unit and the bet button 132 detection unit) may detect that the pressing operation of the operation unit is detected. (2) After the time necessary for the movement control has elapsed, the operation unit is provided. The pressing operation of the operation means may be detected by the detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance button 750 detection unit, the bet button 132 detection unit).

  Further, the time required for the movement control may be a time required for moving from the first position to the second position, and may be a driving means (for example, driving units 708 (708a, 708b) provided in the operating means. ), The drive source 754d, and the drive unit 427) may be operated to rotate the rotating member from the restricted position to the permitted position. When the movable unit is driven up and down, the movable unit May be the time until the movement to the movement completion position.

  In addition, the case where the operation means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed means that (1) the operation means is due to a physical factor such as failure of the drive means or pressing by the player. It may be a case where the means cannot move, or (2) even if a time required for the movement control elapses, a case where the constant drive by the drive means is not possible. Further, it may not be detected whether or not the operating means has moved to the second position by the movement control.

  Further, it may be detected by the movement control that the operation means has been moved to the second position. In this case, it can be seen that the operating means could not move to the second position because it was not detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, it may be detected that the operating means cannot be moved to the second position by the movement control. In this case, since the operation means has been moved to the second position because it has not been detected, it is possible to produce an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect. Further, the special effect may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated even when the movement control is being executed.

  The movement control is performed over a first movement period, the first movement period is a period composed of a second period and a third period, and the special effect is the movement Even when the control is being executed, it may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated during the third period. The special effect may be configured not to be performed when the movement control is being performed and the operation means is operated during the second period.

  For example, when the movement control is started and finished in 1 second (an example of the first period), no special effect is performed even if the operating means is operated for 0.5 seconds after the start (an example of the second period) For 0.5 seconds (an example of the third period) from the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start to the end, a special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated. Of course, when the movement control is started and ended in one second (an example of the movement control period), a special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated during this one second.

  Further, when the operation acceptance period ends with the operation means moved to the second position being not pressed, the operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In addition, when the operation acceptance period ends in a state where the operation means moved to the second position has not been pressed, the operation means may not be returned from the second position to the first position.

  Further, the operation means moved to the second position may be moved from the second position to the first position by movement control during the operation acceptance period. As for the means, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position during the operation reception period. Further, the operating means moved to the second position may be moved from the second position to the first position due to physical factors during the operation acceptance period.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the first operation means of the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the second operation of the plurality of operation means is performed. The means does not move, and when the notification means prompts the user to press the first operation means (in the case of (A) below), the first control is performed despite the movement control being performed. When the operating means has not moved to the second position, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the second operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected. Further, when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the third operation means and the fourth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , When the notification for urging the operation of the third operation means is performed (hereinafter, in the case of (B)), the third operation means is moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed. If it does not move, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (B), when the third operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be. The pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (B), when the third operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected. In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, a pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. The pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) above, when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected.

  Further, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , A notification for prompting the operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is performed) (hereinafter, in the case of (C)), the pressing operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is detected. If the fifth operating means is detected earlier than the sixth operating means (same as in the case of sixth detection> fifth detection), the detection result of the sixth operating means is not accepted. Alternatively, the detection result of the sixth operation means may be accepted after the detection processing of the fifth operation means is completed, or may be accepted when the pressing operation of the sixth operation means is detected. Good.

  In the case of (C), when the detection of the fifth operation means and the detection of the sixth operation means are almost simultaneous, the detection may be accepted at the same time, or both may not be accepted. Alternatively, after receiving the detection of the fifth (sixth) operating means, the sixth (fifth) operating means may be detected, or the fifth (sixth) operating means may be detected. If the detection is accepted, the detection result of the sixth (fifth) operation means may not be performed. Note that, at approximately the same time, one may be preferentially received. For example, priority may be given to detection of operation means that produces an advantageous effect for the player among the pressed operation means, or priority may be given to detection of predetermined operation means.

  In the case of (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected. In the case of (C) above, when the pressing operation of the fifth operating means is detected, the sixth operating means may remain at the second position. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected.

  In the case of (B) and (C) above, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period, the movement control is performed. The third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of the movement may be almost the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one of which moves first, during operation or when the operation ends. The other may be moved later.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after completion of the operation reception, the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth (sixth) ) May be stopped as it is at the second position. When the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of the movement may be almost the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one of which moves first, during operation or when the operation ends. The other may be moved later.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  The operation reception period indicates a period during which the result of detecting the pressing operation of the operation means is received. For example, when the operation reception period is 6 seconds, the detection result of the pressing operation of the operation means is received for 6 seconds after the operation reception is started, but the detection result of the operation means is not received after 6 seconds.

  Also, special effects can be executed when the operating means at the first position, the operating means moved to the second position by movement control, or the operating means moved to the third position by movement control is pressed. There may be. Note that the third position may be a position different from the first position and the second position.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.
In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.
(Appendix 1)
A first movable body provided at a position where a player can contact;

  A game machine comprising a second movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact,

  When the first condition is satisfied, the first movable body is returned to the first position which is the origin position of the first movable body,

When the second condition is satisfied, the second movable body is returned to the second position which is the origin position of the second movable body,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first condition and the second condition are different.
(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
A door that can be opened and closed;
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,

The production control means includes a first drive control means for controlling the first movable body, and a second drive control means for controlling the second movable body,
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body,
The door body includes door opening detection means capable of detecting that the door body has been opened,

  The first condition is that the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detection means,

The game machine characterized in that the second drive control means does not return the second movable body to the second position when the first condition is satisfied.
(Appendix 3)
In the game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
Power supply means for supplying power,

  The first movable body moves to the first position at a first speed when power supply is started by the power supply means;

The gaming machine, wherein the first movable body moves to the first position at a second speed different from the first speed when the first condition is satisfied.
(Appendix 4)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,

When the first movable object is movable and the first condition is satisfied, the first movable object is returned to the first position by the first drive control means. A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,

  When the supply of power is started by the power supply means, the second drive control means executes an initial operation process for moving the second movable body to a predetermined initial position,

The game machine characterized in that the initial operation process of the second drive control means is performed during the execution of the initial operation process of the first drive control means.
(Appendix A)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Production means capable of executing at least production,

  A game machine comprising: movement control means capable of executing at least movement control for moving the moved means,

  The operation means is moved from a first position to a second position when the movement control is performed by the movement control means.

  The production means is capable of executing at least a special production when the operation means moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed,

  Even when the operation means has not moved to the second position in spite of the movement control being performed, the effect means has at least the operation means according to the operation means being operated. A game stand that is capable of performing special effects.

The operation means may be replaced with a movable body (for example, the first movable body) provided at a position where the player can contact.
(Appendix B)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
Comprising an operation accepting means capable of accepting at least an operation by a player;

The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the operation means is provided in the operation reception means.
(Appendix C)
In the game stand according to claim 1 or 2,

The game table according to claim 1, wherein the special performance is not performed even if the operation means is operated during the execution of the movement control.
(Appendix D)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices A to C,

The production means is capable of at least producing an effect in response to the operation means being operated by a player even when the moved means is located at the first position. To play.
(Appendix E)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices A to D,
Informing means capable of at least notifying the user to operate the operating means,

  The game table according to claim 1, wherein the notification means performs the notification even when the operation means does not move to the second position in spite of the movement control.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, and examples. You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

  Subsequently, an embodiment of the first invention will be described. In the following description, points different from the contents described so far will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In addition, constituent elements having the same names as the constituent element names described so far will be described with reference numerals used so far.

  FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the first invention, as seen from the front side (player side), with the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 opened.

  The outer frame 102 shown in FIG. 97 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. An inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 97 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be opened and closed. The inner frame 104 corresponds to an example of a first door body, and the inner frame 104 is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the outer frame, and the game board faces the player side (front side). 200 is detachably mounted, and various control boards such as a main control unit 300 and sub control means (first sub control unit 400 and second sub control unit 500) are provided on the back side (rear side). Yes. The inner frame 104 is provided with an inner frame opening switch 145 (see FIG. 98) that detects the opening of the inner frame 104 when the inner frame 104 is opened. In this specification, the sensor may be referred to as a switch.

  The front door 105 is a door member attached to the front surface of the inner frame 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. That is, the front door 105 corresponds to an example of a second door body, and is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the inner frame 104. A front door 105 shown in FIG. 97 is provided with a frame portion 1051 and a dish portion 1052. The frame portion 1051 is configured in a frame shape, and a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in an opening inside thereof, and a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, and a payout are provided on the front side. A display LED 142 and a door-side effect movable body (not shown here) are attached. The frame portion 1051 corresponds to the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. The dish unit 1052 includes an upper dish 126, a lower dish 128, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launching handle 134, and an operation panel 13P. The operation panel 13P is provided with various operation means such as a ball removal button 130 and a chance button 136. The chance button 136 includes a chance button lamp 138, and the chance button 136 also corresponds to an example of a door-side effect movable body. The door-side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact. The dish part 1052 corresponds to the part of the door 108 with a ball storage dish shown in FIG.

  The inner frame 104 is provided with a front door opening switch 147 that detects opening of the front door 105 when the front door 105 is opened. The front door opening switch 147 is an opening detection means (sensor), and is in an off state when the front door 105 is not in contact. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the front door opening switch 147 in an off state. Thus, it is detected that the front door 105 is open.

  As described above, the inner frame 104 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 104. Further, the front door 105 can be opened and closed together with the inner frame 104 with respect to the outer frame 102. That is, when the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104. Therefore, the combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104 can be viewed as one door body.

Note that the frame portion 1051 and the plate portion 1052 may be separate door members, and may be independently rotatable with respect to the inner frame 104. In this case, a door opening switch for detecting the opening of each door member is provided on the inner frame 104. The frame portion 1051 may be an example of a second door body or door body, and the dish portion 1052 may be an example of a second door body or door body.
FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 98, the diagonally left side is the player side (front side), and the diagonally right front side is the back side (rear side). FIG. 98 shows the front door 105, the transparent plate unit 118U, the game board unit 200U, the inner frame 104, and the outer frame 102 from the player side.

  The transparent plate unit 118U includes a transparent plate member 118 and an attachment member 1181 attached around the transparent plate member 118.

  The game board unit 200U includes a game board 200 and a control unit CU provided on the back side of the game board. The control unit CU includes a main board case, a first sub board case, a second sub board case, and the like.

An inner frame opening switch 145 is provided at the lower corner of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 98 on the side opposite to the hinge portion 112 toward the back side, that is, toward the outer frame 102. The inner frame opening switch 145 is an opening detection means, and is in an off state when not in contact with the outer frame 102. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the inner frame opening switch 145 to be in an off state. , Detecting that the inner frame 104 is open. A power board case 184, a payout board case 172, and a launch board case (not shown) are provided in the lower part of the inner frame 104 on the back side. Further, a power switch 178, a segment indicator 1044, and an error display LED 1045 are provided at the lower part of the inner frame 104 on the back side.
FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating a state where the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 is open.

  FIG. 99A is a diagram showing a state where the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 and the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (a), the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the OFF state, and the front door opening switch 147 is also in the OFF state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 has the inner frame 104 in the opened state. It is detected that the front door 105 is also open. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the open state of the two door bodies (104 and 105).

  FIG. 99B is a diagram showing a state in which the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (b), the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the off state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the inner frame 104 is in the opened state. On the other hand, the front door opening switch 147 is in the on state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 does not detect that the front door 105 is in the open state, that is, detects that it is in the closed state.

  FIG. 99C is a diagram showing a state where the inner frame 104 is closed with respect to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 is opened with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (c), the inner frame opening switch 145 is on, and the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 does not detect that the inner frame 104 is open, that is, the front door 105 is Detect that it is closed. On the other hand, the front door opening switch 147 is in an off state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the front door 105 is in an open state.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (b) and FIG. 99 (c) detects the open state of one door body (104 or 105).

  FIG. 99 (d) is a diagram showing a state where the inner frame 104 is closed with respect to the outer frame 102 and the front door 105 is also closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (d), the inner frame opening switch 145 is turned on, and the front door opening switch 147 is also turned on. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 allows the inner frame 104 to be closed. It is detected that the front door 105 is also closed. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the closed state of the two door bodies (104 and 105).

  In FIG. 100, when the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102 but the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104, the power switch 178 is operated to turn on the power. It is a figure which shows an example of in steps.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100A, the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are both closed, and the power switch 178 is off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100 (b), the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In FIG. 100C, the hand is turned to the back side of the inner frame 104 in the open state, and the power switch 178 is turned on. That is, a power-on operation is performed. The power switch 178 is an operator that cannot be operated unless the inner frame 104 is opened. When the main power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 starts the initial operation of the effect movable body 224. In this initial operation, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 confirms that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position, so even if the effect movable body 224 is actually located in the initial position or vice versa. Even if not located, the effect movable body 224 is moved to the position farthest from the initial position (maximum operating position). When the effect movable body 224 reaches the maximum operating position, an initial position returning operation for returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position is executed. A series of operations (confirmation operations) from the start of the initial operation to the return to the initial position corresponds to an example of the second operation. That is, the combination of the initial operation and the initial position return operation corresponds to an example of the second operation. Hereinafter, this combination is referred to as a confirmation operation.

  Here, the effect movable body 224 can reciprocate between the initial position and the maximum operating position, but the effect movable body 224 is not limited to the reciprocable operation, and the initial position is the starting point. It may be possible to operate via the maximum operating position (for example, to perform a circular motion).

  In the state where the inner frame 104 is opened, an error-related notification regarding the door opening error is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. However, the error-related notification may not be performed for a predetermined time after the power switch 178 is operated or until the initialization process (step S113) illustrated in FIG. 66 is completed.

  Each of the initial position and the maximum operating position is provided with a sensor that detects the effect movable body 224, and the second sub-control indicates that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position or returned to the initial position. The CPU 504 of the unit 500 can detect it. When it is not possible to detect that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position or returned to the initial position, an effect movable object error is notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. When the effect movable body error occurs, the effect movable body 224 itself may be broken, the sensor may be broken, or the wiring for transmitting the sensor detection signal may be broken.

  The upper right first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 100 (d) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Moreover, the 1st door side production | generation movable body 2241a shown in FIG.100 (e) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position. That is, the initial position returning operation is completed.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b in the lower left shown in FIG. 100 (f) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position, and has completed the initial operation. Further, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 100 (g) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position. That is, the initial position returning operation is completed.

In this way, the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is performed. If there is a door-side effect movable body 2241 in addition to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, the confirmation operation is also performed for the other door-side effect movable body 2241. Is called. In addition, the plurality of door-side effect movable bodies 2241 may perform the confirmation operation at the same time. On the other hand, the door-side effect movable bodies 2241 having overlapping operation ranges may perform the confirmation operation by shifting the execution timing.
101 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 100 in stages.

  When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is completed, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 (h) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. In addition, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 (i) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and has completed the initial position returning operation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100 (j), the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed and in a closed state.

  If there is a board-side effect movable body 2242 in addition to the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101, the confirmation operation is also performed for the other board-side effect movable body 2242. In addition, the plurality of board-side effect movable bodies 2242 may perform the confirmation operation at the same time. On the other hand, the board-side effect movable bodies 2242 whose operation ranges overlap may perform the confirmation operation with the execution timing shifted.

  Further, in this example, the confirmation operation is performed for the door-side effect movable body 2241 before the board-side effect movable body 2242, but it may be reversed or may be performed simultaneously. Alternatively, the execution timing may partially overlap.

  Here, the front door 105 is in a closed state, but the same applies to a state in which the front door 105 is opened together with the inner frame 104. Further, when the power supply in FIG. 100C is finished, the inner frame 104 is closed and the front door 105 is opened, or the front door 105 is also closed. It is.

  As described above, the confirmation operation (second operation) when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178 is executed regardless of the open / closed state of the door body.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where simultaneous power-on is performed by the island facility in stages.

  In the island facility, the power can be turned off all at once while the power switch 178 is on. When the power switch 178 is turned on and the power is turned off, the power can be turned on by the island facility without operating the power switch 178, that is, without opening the inner frame 104 (while being closed). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the power is turned on all at once by the island facility with both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 closed, it is the same as when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178. In addition, a confirmation operation is performed.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a in the upper right shown in FIG. 102 (b) is rotated from the initial position toward the maximum operating position with the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 closed. Initial operation is continuing.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104. In addition, when the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the same as the following description. When the inner frame 104 is opened, an error-related notification regarding a door opening error is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. However, the error-related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) illustrated in FIG. 66 is completed.

  Even if the door is opened, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a continues the initial operation, and after the initial operation is completed, that is, after reaching the maximum operating position, as shown in FIG. In addition, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position and completes the initial position returning operation. Here, the operation in which the first door-side effect movable body 2241a returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position may be an initial position return operation in the confirmation operation, but an error triggered by the occurrence of a door opening error. It may be a dedicated operation in the generated state.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b in the lower left starts the confirmation operation even when the inner frame 104 is opened and the front door 105 is also opened, and the second door shown in FIG. The door-side effect movable body 2241b has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation.

  Here, the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104. On the other hand, the inner frame 104 remains open with respect to the outer frame 102. Thus, even when only the front door 105 is opened, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 provides an error-related notification regarding the door opening error. However, the error-related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) illustrated in FIG. 66 is completed.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b continues the confirmation operation, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 102 (e) returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position and completes the initial position return operation. doing.

  Thus, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 are opened during the confirmation operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 performs the confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. continue. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 performs the initial operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. Continue and start the initial position return operation after the completion of the initial operation. Further, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial position returning operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is in the initial state in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. Continue the position return operation.

  When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is completed, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

Even when the front door 105 is also open, the board-side effect movable body 2242 starts the confirmation operation, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 102 (f) reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position. And the initial operation has been completed.
103 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 in stages.

  The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 103 (g) returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position and completes the initial position returning operation even when the inner frame 104 is open.

  As described above, even when the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is in the open state, the board-side effect movable body 2242 performs the confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. Run. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105 ) Continues the verification operation as if it were closed. Further, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105 As in the case of) being closed, the initial operation is continued, and the initial position returning operation is started after the completion of the initial operation. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial position returning operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104. , 105), the initial position returning operation is continued in the same manner as when closed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 103 (h), the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed and closed.

Thus, the example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 differs from the example shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 at least in the open / closed state of the inner frame 104, but the confirmation operation ( (Initial operation + initial position return operation) is executed. Note that the confirmation operation is performed in the same manner even when the open / close state of the front door 105 is different.
Next, the opening of the door body during the production operation will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the inner frame 104 is opened during the rendering operation in stages.

  In each figure ((a) to (f)) of FIG. 104, the entire pachinko machine 100 is shown on the left side, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the board-side effect movable body 2242 of the pachinko machine shown on the left side are enlarged on the right side. (In the following figures, there are similar figures).

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (a), the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are both closed, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable. The bodies 2242 are all located at their initial positions. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. The board-side effect movable body 2242 is located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (b), the big hit game is started, and the effect image of the first round is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. Moreover, the 1st door side production movable body 2241a is operate | moving as a movable body production | presentation (1st production) during a big hit game period.

  The effect data of the movable body effect (first effect) during the jackpot game period in this example is (1) opening the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and (2) the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. Is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is opened. (3) The second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is opened. Data (3) is repeated until the big hit game ends.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 104 (b) is rotated upward and opened in accordance with the effect data of (1) above.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (c), the first round jackpot game is continued, and the effect image of the first round is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. . Further, according to the effect data of (2) above, the first door side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 104 (c) is closed and returned to the initial position, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward. Open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (d), the second round of big hit game is started, and the effect image of the second round is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. Further, according to the effect data of (3) above, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 104 (d) is closed and returned to the initial position, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is directed upward again. Is turning.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (d) displays characters (door opening error) as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also notifies the error occurrence notification sound (door) as a notification regarding the door opening error. Is open) is output. The front door 105 rotates with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104. However, even when the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the following Same as description.

  When the door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), the first door side effect movable body 2241a ignores the effect data and returns to the initial position. That is, an initial position returning operation is performed. This initial position return operation is not an operation according to the effect data. For example, even if the first door-side effect movable body 2241a operates (here, rotates) to the maximum operation commission position according to the effect data. If a door opening error occurs before reaching the maximum operating position, the operation toward the maximum operating commission position is canceled and the initial position is restored. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (e) also displays characters (door opening error) as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also outputs an error notification sound. In the error occurrence notification from the speaker 120, “the door is open” and “please close the door” are alternately output repeatedly.

  Subsequently, the reserved villa production is started with the inner frame 104 opened. This reserved rendezvous effect is an effect of notifying (notifying) that there is a hit within the special figure start hold during the big hit game, and a notification (notice) image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is movable. Body production (second production) is also performed. The effect data of the movable body effect (second effect) here is: (a) the board side effect movable body 2242 is dropped to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and (b) the board side effect movable body 2242 is raised. It is data to be made.

A preview image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition, although the character display which alert | reports a door opening error is also made | formed, this character display is difficult to visually recognize by the preview image compared with the time when the preview image is not displayed. Further, according to the effect data of (a), the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 104 (f) falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, making it difficult to visually recognize a part of the preview image. Combined with the preview image, the production effect is enhanced. In this example, when the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the door-side effect movable body 2241 cancels the effect operation and returns to the initial position, but the board-side effect movable body 2242 performs the effect operation according to the effect data. Run. The board-side effect movable body 2242 may also cancel the effect operation and return to the initial position.
105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104 in stages.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 opened as shown in FIG. 105 (g) displays the continuation of the preview image shown in FIG. 104 (f). As characters appear, “Congratulations” is displayed. In addition, although the character display as the alert | report regarding a door opening error is also made | formed, the character display regarding an error is also difficult to visually recognize here also by the notice image compared with the time when a notice image is non-displaying. In addition, a sound as a notification regarding the door opening error is continuously output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, according to the effect data of (b), the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 105 (g) is raised to the initial position.

  Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. 105 (h), the character display for notifying the door opening error disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208, and instead, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display of “determined hold continuous change”. . A character is displayed as a notification image. Further, the content of the error-related notification that has been output from the speaker 120 changes, and the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 105 (h) outputs a voice “the door is closed” (error release notification voice). . A combination of the error release notification and the error occurrence notification corresponds to an example of notification regarding the door opening error (error related notification). The sound output of the error cancellation notification from the speaker 120 continues for the first period (for example, 15 seconds). As described above, the speaker 120 corresponding to an example of the notifying unit is in a state where the inner frame 104 is closed and the front door 105 is also closed (first state), and the door opening error is related. The error related notification (corresponding to an example of notification) is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 closed as shown in FIG. 105 (i), the third round jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side has a third round effect image. Is displayed. However, the production operation using the door-side production movable body 2241 has not been resumed, and the first door-side production movable body 2241a and the second door-side production movable body 2241b remain closed (while remaining in the initial position). ).

  Thereafter, the round digestion of the jackpot game is continued with the inner frame 104 closed, but the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not resumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The effect image of the end effect of the jackpot game is displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot game can be expected one more time thereafter.

  As described above, in this example, the door is closed and the error is released. The operation is not started. In other words, the door-side production movable body 2241 should perform the production operation according to the production data (1) to (3) from the start to the end of the big hit game. That is, the operation period of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is from the start of the big hit game to the end, and the effect operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not resumed until the operation period ends.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a first modification of the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 step by step.

  The state shown in FIG. 106 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 105 (g), and the reserved villa effect is produced with the decorative frame display device 208 and the board-side effect movable body with the inner frame 104 opened. 2242.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 106 (b), the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed, and the state is the same as that shown in FIG. 105 (h). The character display related to the door opening error disappeared, and the speaker 120 has finished outputting the error occurrence notification sound and started the error release notification sound output.

  The state shown in FIG. 106 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 105 (i), and the third round is entered, but the sound output of the error release notification is continued. That is, the error has been canceled, but the error-related notification is continued.

  Eventually, the error-related notification ends. When this error-related notification ends, in this modified example, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is resumed. That is, while the error is released, the rendering operation using the door-side rendering movable body 2241 is not resumed during a period when the error-related notification is not completed. In the pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 is closed and the error-related notification is also ended as shown in FIG. 105 (d), the production operation using the door-side production movable body 2241 is resumed and canceled (3) ) Has started to rotate upward of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a according to the effect data.

  In addition, instead of resuming from the production data canceled in the middle, it may be resumed by returning to the beginning of the production data, or a resume point is determined in advance and the production data of the resume point is always resumed. May be. Even if the error-related notification has not ended, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 may be resumed from the time when the error is released.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 106 (e), the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed and returned to the initial position according to the effect data of (2) above, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is moved forward. Rotate and open.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a second modification of the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 step by step.

  In the following description, differences from the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 will be mainly described, and a duplicate description will be omitted.

  Each state shown in FIGS. 107A to 107C is the same as each state shown in FIGS. 104B to 104D.

  When a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a provided on the opposite side (opening end side) to the hinge portion 112 side (rotating shaft side) Ignoring the production data and returning to the initial position. On the other hand, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b provided on the hinge portion 112 side (rotating shaft side) continues the operation according to the effect data, and here the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is forward. The rotation has started. The same applies to the case where the front door 105 is also open to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (e), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data of (3) above, but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a remains stopped at the initial position. And no action is taken.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (f), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b rotates forward according to the effect data of (2) above, but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is It is still stopped at the initial position and no action is taken.

  108 is different from the second modified example shown in FIG. 107 in that a door opening error occurs and the effect movable body that continues the operation according to the effect data is replaced with the effect movable body for which the operation is prohibited. It is a figure which shows an example.

  Even if the door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a on the open end side continues to operate according to the effect data. The production movable body 2241a continues to rotate to the maximum operating position. On the other hand, the second door-side effect movable body 2241a on the hinge part 112 side (rotating shaft side) that has returned to the initial position in accordance with the effect data of (3) is prohibited from subsequent operations. The same applies to the case where the front door 105 is also open to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 108 (b), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed according to the effect data of (2) above, but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b remains stopped at the initial position. And no action is taken.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (c), the first door side effect movable body 2241a rotates upward according to the effect data of (3) above, but the second door side effect movable body 2241b is It is still stopped at the initial position and no action is taken.

  Here, when considered together with the examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, when a door opening error occurs, at least one of the plurality of effect movable bodies (here, the door-side effect movable body 2241) is movable. The body may be restricted (prohibited) at the initial position, and the remaining effect movable bodies may continue the effect operation according to the effect data.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the door is opened in a state where the effect movable body is located at a position shifted from the initial position by an external force.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 (a) is in a demo state where no game is being performed, and a demo screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side of the pachinko machine 100. The title is displayed.

  In FIG. 109 (b), someone touches the first door-side effect movable body 2241a at the initial position, and as shown in FIG. 109 (c), lifts the first door-side effect movable body 2241a upward. Yes. Then, the inner frame 104 is opened by cheating while the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is lifted upward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters on the demo screen as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also notifies the occurrence of an error as a notification regarding the door opening error. Audio is output. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 109 (d) is at a position shifted from the initial position.

  When the door opening error occurs, if the production movable body (here, the first door-side production movable body 2241a) is not the production operation, but is not in the initial position, as shown in FIG. The operation of returning the movable body (first door side effect movable body 2241a) to the initial position is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 (f), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is located at the initial position, and the inner frame 104 is also closed.

  When the effect movable body deviates from the initial position by an external force during the effect operation, the effect operation may be continued.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the inner frame 104 is opened while a movable body different from that described so far as the door-side effect movable body 2241 is being produced.

  110 (a) to (c), the left end shows the entire pachinko machine 100, the middle shows an enlarged operation panel 13P of the pachinko machine shown on the left end, and the right end shows The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown at the left end is shown enlarged (the same applies to FIGS. 111 to 114).

  In this example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is a chance button 136. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110 is an effect movable body that protrudes upward when the chance button effect is started. The chance button 136 protrudes to the maximum operating position. However, if the chance button 136 is pressed before reaching the maximum operating position, the chance button 136 returns to the initial position without reaching the maximum operating position.

  In FIG. 110 (a), the chance button effect is started. In this chance button effect, the user is prompted to press the chance button 136, and when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation reception period, a new effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (a), the decorative symbol is being changed and a screen prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed. On this screen, an image of the chance button 136 is shown. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110A is at the initial position, and the image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also the image of the chance button 136 at the initial position.

  When the chance button effect is started, the chance button 136 gradually protrudes upward from the initial position as time passes. The protrusion of the chance button 136 improves both the effect of prompting the operation and the effect of improving the interest.

  The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110B protrudes upward from the initial position, reaches the maximum operating position, and is in the most protruded state. The image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (b) is also the image of the chance button 136 in the most protruding state.

Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (c) displays characters as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also outputs an error generation notification sound as a notification regarding the door opening error. Even if a door opening error occurs, the chance button 136 that is one of the door-side effect movable bodies 2241 does not return to the initial position and remains in the most protruding state (the maximum operating position). This is because the chance button 136 protrudes upward, so that it does not cause danger to the player due to the opening of the door or failure of the pachinko machine. ing.
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 110 in stages.

  In FIG. 111 (d), the player is about to press the chance button 136 in the most protruding state with the inner frame 104 open.

  In FIG. 111 (e), the chance button 136 is pressed while the inner frame 104 is open, and the chance button 136 is returned to the initial position. Here, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 may return to the initial position according to the effect data, or return to the initial position by a force pressed by the player (pushing force). There may be. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (e), a new effect is started when the chance button 136 is pressed. That is, a character appears and a notice about the currently displayed symbol variation display is made. The new advance notice may be a pre-reading advance notice or the like for the design change display (hold) that is started after the currently executed design change display.

Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (f), the character display for notifying the door opening error disappears. Further, the content of the error-related notification that has been output from the speaker 120 has changed, and the error cancellation notification voice “door closed” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach effect.
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing stepwise modifications of the examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111.

  The state shown in FIG. 112 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 110 (c), the inner frame 104 is opened, and the notification regarding the door opening error is started by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120. . Until just before the inner frame 104 is opened, the chance button 136 is in the most protruding state. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the chance button 136 in the most protruding state is displayed as a screen prompting the user to press the chance button 136.

  In this modification, when a door opening error occurs, the chance button 136, which is one of the door-side effect movable bodies 2241, is returned to the initial position. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 112 (b) has returned to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208, even if the door opening error occurs, the chance button effect continues, but in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (b), the image of the chance button 136 returned to the initial position is The image of the chance button 136 that is not displayed and is in the most protruding state remains displayed. As described above, since the chance button 136 protrudes upward, it should be unlikely to cause danger to the player due to the door opening or a pachinko machine failure. The chance button 136 is returned to the initial position. However, since the chance button effect continues, the effect of prompting the operation by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is maintained. The image display of the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be an image display in which the chance button 136 returns to the initial position in accordance with the actual state of the chance button 136.

Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (c), the character display notifying the door opening error disappears. In addition, an error release notification sound is output from the speaker 120. In this modified example, even if the error is released, the chance button 136 remains in the initial position, and the operation is not started by releasing the error, but the operation is started by releasing the error, and the state before the occurrence of the error ( Here, the most protruding state) may be restored.
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112.
In this modification, the chance button 136 was not operated within the effective operation period.

The pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 113 (d) is closed is the one immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has elapsed, and the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even though it was not operated inside, a normal notice has been started as a new production. That is, in the chance button effect in this modification, a new effect is forcibly created at the timing of the effective operation period, even if it is operated within the operation effective period, as well as when operated within. Be started. Regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated, a new effect may be started when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Alternatively, only when the chance button 136 is not operated, a new effect may be started when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Furthermore, a new effect may be started at an earlier timing of the timing when the operation valid period passes and the timing when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. In addition, based on the operation of the chance button 136, an effect execution lottery may be performed, and a new effect may be started only when winning. Or, even if the chance button 136 is operated, a new effect may not be started uniformly.
Next, errors other than the door opening error will be described.
FIG. 114 is a table summarizing main errors other than door opening errors.

  When an error occurs, an error occurs in the payout display LED 142 shown in FIG. 97 or the segment display 1044 or the error display LED 1045 provided in the lower part on the back side of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 98 according to the type of error. A display notifying that this has been done is made. The segment indicator 1044 and the error display LED 1045 cannot be confirmed without opening the inner frame 104, but the payout display LED 142 can be confirmed without opening the inner frame 104. The “display” shown in the table of FIG. 114 means a 7-segment display displayed on the segment display 1044.

  In a state where no error has occurred, “0” is displayed on the segment display 1044, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off.

  The lower pan full error is an error that occurs when the lower pan 128 shown in FIG. 97 is full. The segment display 1044 displays “1”, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are turned off. For example, an error notification is made from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. The lower plate full tank error is canceled when the ball discharge lever 132 is operated to remove the ball and the lower plate full sensor is turned off.

  The payout number shortage error is an error that occurs when the planned number of payouts has not been executed. “2” is displayed on the segment display 1044 and both the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are lit. To do. Since the payout number deficiency error is a disadvantageous error for the player, the payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 that can be confirmed by the player is turned on. This payout number shortage error is canceled by a successful retry.

  The payout number switch error painted in gray is an error when a connection abnormality of a switch (sensor) for detecting the payout number occurs, and the main board of the main control unit 300 is an irrelevant error. When this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and “3” is displayed on the segment display 1044.

  Similarly, the illegal payout error painted in gray is an error when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. Even if this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and “4” is displayed on the segment display 1044.

  Similarly, the payout excess error painted in gray is an error when it is detected that a payout exceeding the number of winning balls or the number of rented balls has been made. In other words, this is an error when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls actually paid out are detected with respect to the number of payout requests. Even if this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and “5” is displayed on the segment display 1044.

  In any of these three types of payout errors, the error display LED 1045 is lit, but the payout display LED 142 remains off. The error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 is not performed, but may be performed. Each error is released by opening the inner frame 104 and operating an error release switch 168 (see FIG. 62) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104, or similarly provided on the back side of the inner frame 104. It is necessary to turn on the power (operation of the power switch 178) with the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62). That is, these three types of payout errors are errors that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The state in which these three types of payout errors have occurred corresponds to an example of a second error state.

  The confirmation operation can be started even in a state where an error that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened is generated. Also, the production operation can be started.

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a magnet sensor and a vibration sensor. A magnet sensor error when the magnet sensor detects a magnetic force and a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor detects vibration also cause an inner frame 104. It is an error that cannot be cleared without releasing. That is, to cancel the magnet sensor error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and turn on the power (operation of the power switch 178) with the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62). To cancel the error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and turn on the power again by the power switch 178.

  The CR unit communication error is an error when a communication abnormality is detected from the pachinko machine 100 side in transmission / reception of signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit, and “6” is displayed on the segment display 1044. The main control communication error is an error when an operation confirmation signal is not returned to the main control unit 300 during transmission / reception of signals between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and the like, and “7” is displayed in the segment display 1044. Is displayed. The CR unit unconnected error is an error when the connection with the card unit cannot be confirmed on the pachinko machine 100 side, and “8” is displayed on the segment display 1044. In any of these three types of communication errors, the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off. The error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 is not performed, but may be performed. The cancellation of each error is as shown in the table.

Among the errors described above, the game cannot be continued, that is, the game is stopped due to the occurrence of the error (ball launch is impossible and symbol variation is stopped), and the game is resumed unless the error is released (ball launch and symbol variation start) The error that cannot be performed is only the magnet sensor error, and the period in which the magnet sensor error occurs (the period from when the error occurs until it is canceled) corresponds to an example of the second period. The door-side effect movable body 2241 returns to the initial position when the door body (104, 105) is opened while a magnet sensor error has occurred while performing the effect operation according to the effect data. On the other hand, a period in which a payout number switch error, an illegal payout error, a payout excess error, or a vibration sensor error occurs is a period during which a game can be continued, and corresponds to an example of a first period.
Here, the error will be supplemented although there is a point overlapping with the above description.

  Lower pan full error is when the lower pan full sensor signal is turned on when a predetermined input port of the main board of the main control unit 300 reads on once by a timer interrupt (off to on). Is output to the unit 600.

  With regard to a payout device error, the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is a payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor finishes driving for the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is less than the number, the occurrence of the dispensing device error is detected. When paying out one by one (retry processing), the error is cleared.

  The main control communication error is an error that occurs when an off state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected or when an on state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts. The command cannot be received from the board. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the on state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the off state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error is released.

  The CR unit communication error is an error in the CR unit and the interface. This error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the loan request is generated. After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

  The CR unit unconnected error is also an error in the CR unit and the interface. This error occurs when the OFF state of the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is detected and continued for 16 ms when the CR unit unconnected error is in the released state. Note that this is an error that does not affect the suspension of lending (payment of prize balls). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error is released. After the error is canceled, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Note that the CR unit connection signal and the CR unit READY signal include a CR unit lending request confirmation signal as signals transmitted in the order CR unit → interface → payout board. The CR unit connection signal is a VL signal (+ 18V power supply in the CR unit). The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal and transmits that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal, and the CR unit transmits a lending request and a lending instruction for 25 basic units.

  Signals transmitted in the order of payout board → interface → CR unit include a CR gaming machine rental completion signal and a CR gaming machine READY signal. The CR gaming machine lending completion signal is an EXS signal, and is a signal for transmitting the request approval and lending completion for 25 basic units to the CR unit. The CR gaming machine READY signal is a PRDY signal and is a signal for transmitting that a payout operation is possible to the CR unit.

  When the power is turned on, the PRDY signal is turned on, and the BRDY signal is turned on when the lending operation (the player presses the lending operation button) is turned on. Next, a lending request is made when the BRQ signal is turned ON. After confirming the lending request, lending is accepted when the payout CPU turns on the EXS signal. Thereafter, the BRQ signal is turned off and a rental instruction is issued. The payout control means performs 25 payout control and then turns off the EXS signal to complete the lending. If the BRQ signal is turned ON again while the BRDY signal is ON, the lending operation is repeated, and the BRDY signal is turned OFF when all the operations are completed.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where an error (hereinafter referred to as a second error) that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is canceled during the rendering operation occurs.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the second error has occurred during the rendering operation in a stepwise manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (a), game balls are stored in the upper plate 126 to a level close to full. On the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100, combinations of decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115, a payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 is shown. The payout display LEDs 142 shown in the respective drawings ((a) to (f)) of FIG. 115 remain off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the big hit game is started, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is opened, and the winning ball is paid out by entering the variable winning opening 234. But game balls are starting to accumulate. Moreover, the 1st door side production | generation movable body 2241a shown in FIG.115 (b) is rotated and opened to the upper direction according to production data.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (c), more balls accumulate in the lower plate 128, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a closes according to the effect data, returns to the initial position, and the second door-side effect. The movable body 2241b is pivoted forward and opened.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (d), the second round of jackpot game has started, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is closed and returned to the initial position according to the effect data. The effect movable body 2241a is turning upward again.

  Eventually, the lower pan 128 becomes full and a lower pan full tank error (hereinafter referred to as a third error) occurs, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A prompt message is displayed.

  Even if the third error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not stopped, and in FIG. 115 (e), the first door side according to the effect data. The effect movable body 2241a is closed and returned to the initial position, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward again and opened.

Here, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128, and the lower plate full tank error (third error) is canceled. In FIG. 115 (f), the big hit game of the third round has started, the movable body effect by the door-side effect movable body 2241 continues, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data. Returning to the position, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is pivoted upward and opened.
116 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 in stages.

  In FIG. 116 (g), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward again and opened according to the effect data.

  In FIG. 116 (h), the jackpot game of the eighth round has started, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data, and the first door-side effect movable. The body 2241a is pivoted upward and opened. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 116 (i), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotating forward according to the effect data.

  116 also shows a payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The payout display LEDs 142 shown in FIGS. 116 (g) to (i) remain off.

  Here, a payout number switch error, which is a second error, occurs. This payout number switch error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened. Even if the second error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not stopped. In FIG. The effect movable body 2241b is closed, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is rotating upward. Even if the second error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, and no error-related notification is performed by the notification means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. Thus, depending on the type of error, the player may not be notified.

  In FIG. 116 (k), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is turning forward according to the effect data.

Here, in order to operate an error release switch 168 (see FIG. 62) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104, the inner frame 104 is opened, and a door opening error (hereinafter referred to as a first error) occurs. To do. Even if the first error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (k) displays a character as a notification regarding the first error, An error occurrence notification sound is also output from the speaker 120 as a notification regarding the first error. Here, two types of errors such as the second error (payout number switch error) and the first error (door opening error) overlap, but due to the occurrence of the first error, FIG. 116 (l) As shown, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b returns to the initial position ignoring the effect data. Further, the operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a that has returned to the initial position is restricted, and remains at the initial position.
117 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 116 in stages.

  In FIG. 117 (m), since the big hit game of the 10th round is started and the inner frame 104 is opened (first error state), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is also the second door. The side effect movable body 2241b is also restricted in its operation and both remain in the initial position.

  In FIG. 117 (n), the hand is turned to the back side of the opened inner frame 104, and the error release switch 168 is operated. Then, the second error (payout number switch error) is canceled. On the other hand, since the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the first error (door opening error) continues, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a is also the second door side effect in FIG. 117 (n). The operation of the movable body 2241b is also restricted, and both remain in the initial position.

Next, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed, and the first error is also released. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (o) disappears from the character display notifying the door opening error, and the speaker 120 outputs an error release notification sound. In this example, when the first error is released and the error-related notification ends, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is resumed even before the end of the big hit game.
118 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 117 in stages.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 118 (q), the big hit game of the 15th round is started, and a considerably large number of balls are stored in the lower plate 128. In addition, the movable body effect according to the effect data has been resumed. In FIG. 118 (q), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is the front according to the effect data. Rotate again to open. Thus, according to the effect data, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and returned to the initial position, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward and opened.

  Eventually, the lower pan 128 becomes full, and the lower pan full error (third error) occurs again. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Has been made. The third error generated here is not eliminated until FIG. 119 (z), and the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display a character display that prompts the user to remove the ball. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (r), an effect image of the end effect of the big hit game is also displayed, and it is informed that the game will shift to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. Furthermore, in the door side production | presentation movable body 2241a, 2241b shown in FIG.118 (r), the last movable body production according to production data is also performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (s), the last screen of the big hit game end effect is displayed. In this decorative symbol display device 208, one hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the special figure is displayed, but this hold icon h11 hides a part of the character display (error related notification) that prompts to remove the ball. The character display for prompting the ball removal is more difficult to visually recognize before the hold icon h11 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (t), the first variation display of the decorative symbol after the end of the big hit game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In FIG. (V), we are in super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (v), the screen display of the super reach effect is made, but this screen display hides a part of the character display (error related notification) that prompts the user to remove the ball. Character display prompting removal is more difficult to see than before the screen display. Note that the entire error-related notification may be hidden by another display.
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118 in stages.

  Even in FIG. 119 (w), the lower plate full tank error (third error) has not been eliminated, and an error-related notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is hidden by the display and part of it is difficult to see.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (x), a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 119 (y), the big hit game is started. Even at this stage, the bottom full tank error (third error) has not been resolved. On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, the movable body production operation period according to the production data by the door side production movable body 2241 is entered. The operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected by the influence of an error that occurs before the operation period arrives and has not been resolved even at the start of the operation period. Here, it is the third error that is not inherently affected, but even if it is the first error that is inherently affected (door opening error), the error occurrence timing must be earlier than the operation start timing. Will not be affected. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 119 (y) is rotated upward and opened according to the effect data.

  Here, the third error has occurred first, but the rendering operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected when the second error has occurred first.

  Here, the ball discharge lever 132 is finally operated, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128, the lower plate full tank error (third error) is canceled, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Error-related information disappears. In FIG. 119 (z), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward and opened according to the effect data.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating in a stepwise manner an example in which the operation according to the effect data of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is prohibited even when the error occurrence timing is before the operation start timing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (a), variable display of decorative symbols is executed.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened, and a door opening error (first error) occurs. In addition, even when the front door 105 is also opened to the inner frame 104, it is the same as the following description. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (b) is in a reach state, but the display screen displays characters as a notification regarding the first error, and the speaker 120 also displays the first symbol. As an error notification, an error occurrence notification sound is output.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (c), a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Even at this stage, the inner frame 104 remains open, and the door opening error continues. On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, the operation period of the movable body production according to the production data by the door side production movable body 2241 is entered, but here, the first error that has occurred first is not solved. Therefore, the operation according to the production data of the door-side production movable body 2241 is prohibited from the beginning. In other words, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error occurrence command or error resolution command from the main control unit 300 or a command including the content of error occurrence or error resolution. Even if the jackpot start command is received from the controller 300, if the error cancel command has not been received in the state where the error occurrence command has been received first, the first sub controller 400 causes the door-side effect movable body 2241. The control according to the production data is not started. As a result, the operations of both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 120 (d) are restricted, and both remain at the initial position.

  Next, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed, the first error is released, and the character display notifying the door opening error disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. From 120, an error cancel notification sound is output. In this example, when the first error is released and the error-related notification ends, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is resumed even before the end of the big hit game. If no action is performed at the beginning, even if the error cancellation or error-related notification is completed, the operation may not be performed until the jackpot game is completed.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step example when the power is cut off and power is restored instantaneously during the confirmation operation.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (a) is in a state in which the main power is not turned on, and then the power is turned on all at once by the island facility.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (b), the confirmation operation is started, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position, and has completed the initial operation. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (b) has a character display for notifying that an initialization process including a confirmation operation is being performed when the power is turned on. This character display is displayed until, for example, step S115 shown in FIG. 66 or the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 67 is started.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (c), as the confirmation operation, an initial value returning operation is performed for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is maximum from the initial position. It is turning towards the operating position.

In FIG. 121 (d), a power interruption (power interruption) has occurred. The timing at which the power interruption occurs may be a timing before the second door-side effect movable body 2241b reaches the maximum operating position by the initial operation, or may be a timing at which the second door-side effect movable body 2241b reaches the maximum operating position. The timing during the initial value returning operation may be used. Due to the occurrence of power interruption, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b that was in the confirming operation stops its operation and remains open as shown in FIG. 121 (e).
122 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 121 in stages.

  In this example, after power interruption occurs, power is restored instantaneously, that is, power is turned on again without simultaneous power-on by island facilities, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is the same as the character display in FIG. 121 (b), and the character display for notifying that the process such as the initialization process is being performed. This character display is displayed regardless of whether or not the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62) is operated, that is, whether or not the RAM is cleared. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (f), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b whose operation has been stopped by the previous power interruption remains open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this example, since the backup of the first sub-control unit 400 is not performed at the time of power interruption, the first sub-control unit 400 of the recovered pachinko machine performs the confirmation operation just before the power interruption. I can't figure out what I was. Therefore, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the power recovery command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the confirmation operation from the beginning.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (g), the confirmation operation is started again from the beginning, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Note that the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is still open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (h), the initial value returning operation is performed for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as the confirmation operation, and the confirmation operation for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is completed. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (i), the confirmation operation for the second door-side effect movable body 2241 b is performed. Here, no matter where the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is stopped, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is temporarily moved to the maximum operating position by the initial operation and then returned to the initial position by the initial position returning operation. Accordingly, power is restored (power is turned on again), but the effect movable body is held in the state at the time of power interruption, and thus may move differently from the confirmation operation before power interruption.

  If the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is stopped at the maximum operating position, the initial operation is omitted if the second door-side effect movable body 2241b can be confirmed by the sensor provided at the maximum operating position. Only the initial position returning operation may be performed. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 may instruct the execution of the initial operation. In this case, the second sub-control unit 400 uses the sensor provided at the maximum operating position before the second door-side effect movable body 2241b moves. The door-side effect movable body 2241b is detected, and the initial operation is virtually not performed.

  In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 performs backup at the time of power interruption, after the power recovery, the confirmation operation may be resumed from the middle of the confirmation operation interrupted by the power interruption. Further, when the door body (104, 105) is opened immediately after power recovery, the execution of the confirmation operation may be restricted (prohibited). In addition, not only at the time of power recovery, when the door (104, 105) is opened during the confirmation operation, the effect movable body may be returned to the initial value, or the operation may be stopped halfway. .

Furthermore, when a power interruption occurs during a performance operation according to the performance data and power is restored, the same as described above may occur.
FIG. 123 is a view showing a modified example of the board-side effect movable body 2242.

  The board side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 and the like and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 63 perform a planar operation, but the board side effect movable body is arranged in the front-rear direction (player side and back side). (Direction)).

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a shielding device 246 composed of a plurality of members (246a, 246b) that perform planar motion, and a character accessory 247 that can perform at least forward and backward motion. The character accessory 247 is hidden behind the shielding device 246, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened to advance forward (player side). The initial position of the character accessory 247 is on the back side of the shielding device 246.

  FIG. 123 (1) shows the shielding device 246 in a state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. The character accessory 247 is located at the initial position, and the character accessory 247 is visible to the player. Absent.

  In FIG. 123 (2), the left door 246a and the right door 246b are rotated all the way, and the character accessory 247 advances from the back. The advancement / retraction of the character accessory 247 is caused by a stepping motor and a rack and pinion mechanism 2471 (not shown).

  In FIG. 123 (3), the character accessory 247 has advanced beyond the shielding member 246 to the front side of the shielding member 246. The position of the character combination 247 shown in FIG. 123 (3) corresponds to the maximum operating position of the character combination 247.

  In the movable body effect, operations as shown in FIG. 123 (1) → FIG. 123 (2) → FIG. 123 (3) → FIG. 123 (2) → 123 (1) are possible. That is, the character accessory 247 can be moved back and forth, and can be reciprocated. Further, the shielding device 246 can also reciprocate. Further, both the shielding device 246 (XY direction movable effect means) and the character accessory 247 (Z axis direction movable effect means) can vibrate (fine reciprocating motion) on the way.

  Here, when the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 or only the front door 105 is opened, the movement may continue until the movement of the shielding device 246. The operation may be restricted depending on the possibility. Further, each movable body (246, 247) can be operated by a plurality of stepping controls (commands), and when a door opening error occurs, the movable body based on the control command currently being executed. It may be configured to continue up to an operation (a production operation or a confirmation operation) and restrict each reception operation based on the next command operation. Further, when the door opening error occurs at the timing when only the shielding device 246 and / or the character accessory 247 or only the character accessory 247 returns to the initial position by the effect operation, the effect that is being executed is performed as the operation to return to the initial position. The structure which continues operation | movement may be sufficient.

  In addition, with the content demonstrated above, you may interchange the matter which made object the 1st door side production movable body 2241a, and the matter which made the 2nd door side production movable body 2241b object. Furthermore, the matter for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is limited to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and may not be applied to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b. The matter for the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be limited to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b and not applied to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. Good.

  In addition, the matter for the door-side effect movable body 2241 can be applied to the matter for the board-side effect movable body 2242 (corresponding to an example of a third movable body). For example, the confirmation operation may be continued while the production operation of the board-side production movable body 2242 is stopped by opening the front door 105. Alternatively, on the contrary, the confirmation operation of the board side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Even if the front door 105 is opened, the board-side effect movable body 2242 may continue the effect operation and the confirmation operation. If the front door 105 is closed, the board-side effect movable body 2242 has a low risk of touching the player. Further, with the shielding device 246 (XY direction movable effect means) described with reference to FIG. 123, the risk of touching the player is low even when the front door 105 is open. On the other hand, in the case of the character role 247 (Z-axis direction movable production means) described with reference to FIG. 123, even if the board-side production movable body 2242 is in danger of touching the player if the front door 105 is open. Therefore, the operation may be restricted. Furthermore, regardless of the open / closed state of the front door 105, the effect operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped by opening the inner frame 104, while the confirmation operation may be continued. Alternatively, on the contrary, the confirmation operation of the board side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Furthermore, the production operation and the confirmation operation may be continued.

  Furthermore, a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body,... May be provided as the door-side production movable body 2241, and a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body,. May be provided.

  Further, the operation in which the production movable body returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position may be the initial position return operation in the confirmation operation, or may be a dedicated operation in an error occurrence state triggered by an error occurrence. Good. Furthermore, the operation of returning from the maximum operating position to the initial position may be only the target movable body or all other movable bodies.

  Also, if the error is resolved during the operation of returning to the initial position on the condition that an error has occurred, the production operation may be performed immediately, or the production operation may be restarted after the operation is completed. Good. Further, it may be configured to restrict the execution of the rendering operation until another condition (such as the end of various game states or the start of another game state) is established.

  The maximum movable position is a range where the movable body is actually moved during production of the movable body or error notification. For example, when there is a play space provided outside the operation range of the movable body, the space Is also the maximum movable position.

  Furthermore, although the initial operation has been described as an operation that operates up to the maximum movable position, it may not necessarily be the maximum movable position, for example, a detection sensor for a movable body that is a position different from the initial position and within the operating range. It may be an operation that operates to a position where is provided.

In the above description, “a movable body (for example, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) provided at a position where the player can contact at least;
A gaming table comprising at least a plurality of doors that can be opened and closed;

  At least one of the plurality of door bodies is a first door body (for example, the inner frame 104),

At least one of the plurality of door bodies is a second door body (for example, the front door 105),
The movable body is provided at least on the second door body,

The movable body can at least return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is in a position different from the first position (for example, FIG. 107 (e), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a),
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,

  The movable body is capable of performing at least a second operation when the second condition is satisfied,

  The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least by opening the first door body,

The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least by opening the second door body,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the power is turned on,

  The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position,

The movable body can return to the first position after continuing the initial operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation in the second operation. There is a certain game table (for example, the first door side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 102C). Was explained.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the operation of the movable body.

  In addition, in the case where the second door body provided with the movable body is configured to be rotatable with respect to the first door body, the first door body is not only opened but also the first door body is opened. Even if it does, the 2nd door will be in an open state. Therefore, the possibility that a person (player or store clerk) at the opening destination will be injured by the operation of the movable body is reduced, and the second door body as a game table comes into contact with other game tables and the movable body becomes The possibility of failure may also be reduced.

  Here, the initial operation may be an operation in which the movable body moves to a second position farthest from the first position. The second position may be a maximum movement position of the movable body. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating between the first position and the second position. The second door body may be provided closer to the player side (front side) than the first door body. Further, the second door body may have an opening / closing shaft provided closer to the player side (front side) than the opening / closing shaft of the first door body. The second door body may be provided on the player side (front side) with respect to the game board, and the first door body may hold the game board.

  The movable body can also be contacted by a store clerk. In addition, the movable body may be provided on both the door body and the object different from the door body (for example, provided across two).

  In addition, when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is in a position different from the first position, the movable body returns to the first position and then moves to another position (for example, , The maximum operating position), or may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

  In addition, when the second condition is satisfied, the movable body performs a second operation, and after the second operation, another operation (for example, an effect operation based on effect data) is continued. You may do.

  In addition, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition are examples in which the conditions are satisfied, and may be conditions that are satisfied by another operation or the like. For example, the first condition is established when the first door body or the second door body is opened, but may be a condition established by an operation unrelated to the door body. The second condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the second condition is satisfied by another operation such as operation of the error release switch, start of a predetermined gaming state, return from the demo state, or the like. May be. Furthermore, the second condition may be a condition that is also established by opening the door body (for example, when the door body is opened, power is automatically turned on).

  In addition, conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in this specification is performed. In addition, in the operation of the movable body in the claims of this application and the embodiment, the content described as “can be performed” may include a case where it is not performed.

  In addition, the “position at which the player can contact at least” includes a position where the player comes into contact with nature, and a position where the player does not normally come in contact but may come into contact in some cases. “Returnable” includes that it can be returned normally, but may not be returned in some cases (hereinafter the same). “Executable” includes that it can be executed normally, but may not be executed in some cases (hereinafter the same). The first condition is normally satisfied when the door is opened, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the opening angle of the door is insufficient). . The second condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the voltage is insufficient even when the power is turned on).

  Further, “the movable body can return at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation (for example, FIG. 104 (e)). ),

  The game machine characterized in that the first operation is an effect operation according to effect data. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, priority may be given to the safety of a person or a game machine over a production operation.

  Here, the movable body may return to the first position immediately when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation, A part of the operation may be continued and then returned to the first position.

  The movable body further moves to another position (for example, the maximum operating position) after returning to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. Or before returning to the first position, it may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position).

  Further, “the movable body can return to the first position without continuing the first operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation. (For example, FIG. 104 (e)). ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, priority may be given to the safety of a person or a game machine over a production operation.

  Further, “the movable body is intended to return at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is not in the first position due to an external force. There is a certain game table (for example, FIG. 109 (e)). ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, even when the position of the movable body is shifted due to an external force or the like, it can be returned to the original position when the door is opened.

  The external force mentioned here corresponds to a force received by contact of a player or the like, a force received from a tool such as a magnet, or the like.

  When the first condition is satisfied when the movable body is not in the first position due to an external force, the movable body returns to the first position and then returns to another position ( For example, it may move further to the maximum operating position) or return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

Further, “the movable body is at least returned to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation according to the production data,

  Even when the movable body receives an external force during execution of the first operation and moves to a position different from the position according to the effect data, the movable body tries to continue the operation according to the effect data. A game table characterized by being a thing. It may be.

  Further, “the movable body does not perform at least the first operation even when it receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied ( For example, a gaming table characterized by the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when door opening is established first, safety may be given priority over performance.

  Note that the movable body does not perform the first operation even when it receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied, and further performs another operation. (For example, an effect operation based on different new effect data) may not be performed.

  Further, “the movable body may continue the first operation when receiving an operation instruction related to the first operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied.”

  Further, “the movable body is capable of executing at least the second operation when receiving an operation instruction related to the second operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied (for example, A game stand characterized by the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) shown in FIG. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, even when the door opening is established first, the second operation may be given priority. For example, opening the door may cause the clerk to turn on the power while performing maintenance of the game area at the time of opening the hall, so the work efficiency on the hall side will not be reduced by prioritizing the second operation. . In addition, since the power is turned on intentionally, it may be better to give priority to the second operation. Furthermore, before opening the store, there is a low possibility that a player or the like is on the open side of the door body, so safety may be ensured.

  The movable body performs the second operation when receiving an operation instruction related to the second operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied, and after the second operation, Other operations (for example, the first operation) may also be executed.

  In addition, even when the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation until the first condition is satisfied and the first position is returned, the first operation is performed. The movable body may be capable of executing at least the first operation after returning to the first position.

  Further, the movable body returns to the first position when the first condition is satisfied and an operation instruction regarding the second operation is received until the movable body returns to the first position. Later, the second operation may be executed at least, or even if the second operation is returned to the first position, the second operation may not be performed.

  In addition, when the movable body receives an operation instruction related to the second operation in a state where the first condition is satisfied, priority is given to returning to the first position without performing the initial operation. You may do.

  In addition, “the second door body is provided with at least a second movable body (for example, a second door-side effect movable body 2241b),

  The second movable body is capable of continuing at least the third operation when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the third operation (for example, FIG. 107 (e)). The second door side production movable body 2241b) shown in FIG.

  The game machine characterized in that the third operation is an effect operation according to effect data. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where only a predetermined movable body can perform a special operation.

  The second door body may be provided with a lamp, a speaker and the like in addition to the second movable body. The second movable body continues the third operation when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the third operation, and after the third operation, another operation ( For example, an effect operation based on different new effect data) may be continued.

  In addition, “continuable” includes that it can be continued normally, but may not be continued in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) the same).

  In addition, “the second door body is configured to be at least rotatable with one end as a rotation axis (for example, the hinge 112),

  The movable body (for example, the relationship between the movable body and the second movable body is reversed here, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b) is the second movable body (for example, the first door-side effect movable A game table characterized by being provided at a position closer to the rotation axis than the body 2241a) (FIG. 108). ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a possibility that the movable body close to the rotation axis may come into contact with an adjacent game table (such as the open end side or the CR unit between the tables) depending on the door opening angle. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent a failure by restricting the rendering operation while the door is open.

  In addition, the second door body may be configured to be removable, with one end as a fulcrum, in addition to being rotatable.

  Further, the second movable body may be provided at a position closer to the rotation shaft than the movable body (FIG. 107). By doing this, the movable body on the open end side has a large amount of movement due to the door opening, so there is a high risk of contact with the player, etc., so it may be possible to ensure safety by returning to the initial position. .

  In addition, “rotatable” includes that it can normally rotate but may not be able to rotate in some cases (for example, when locked, etc.) ,the same).

  In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 97),

  The first door body (for example, the inner frame 104) is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the outer frame (for example, the outer frame 102),

  The game table characterized in that the second door body (for example, the front door 105) is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the first door body. ”Was also explained.

The first door body may be provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the island facility or the second door body. The second door body may be provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame.
Here, “first detection means for detecting that the first door body has been opened;
A second detection means for detecting that the second door body has been opened,

  The game machine characterized in that the first detection means may be a detection means different from the second detection means, or is a detection means common to the second detection means. It may be. That is, it may be detected by separate detection means, or the opening of any door may be detected by one detection means.

  In addition, “notification means (speaker 120) is provided, and the notification means is a means capable of executing at least notification (for example, an error-related notification regarding a door opening error) when the first door body is opened, The notification means is a means capable of executing at least a notification (for example, an error-related notification regarding a door opening error) when the second door body is opened, and the notification means is also in the first state. The notification (for example, error release notification) is a means capable of continuing at least for a first period (for example, 15 seconds) (for example, FIG. 105 (h)), and the first state is the first door body. Is a closed state, and the first state is a state in which the second door body is also closed. ”Was also explained.

  That is, the notification means can at least continue notification even after the first door is closed and the second door is also closed.

  According to this game stand, by giving priority to the first period that the door body was open, even if the door opening time is short, it may be possible to reliably notify, We can expect to contribute.

  The informing means is in a state where the second door body is closed even when the first door body is closed and the second door body is still open. The notification can be continued even when the first door remains open.

  In summary, the inner frame 104 corresponds to “first door body” as an example, and the front door 105 corresponds to “second door body” as an example. The “movable body” corresponds to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a or the second door-side effect movable body 2241b as an example. The “first position” corresponds to the initial position of the movable body as an example. The “first operation” corresponds to the production operation according to the production data as an example, and the “second operation” includes a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. The “first condition” corresponds to opening the first door or the second door as an example, and “second condition” includes operation of the power switch 178 or simultaneous power-on by island equipment. It corresponds as an example. The “second movable body” corresponds to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b or the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as an example. The “third operation” corresponds to an effect operation according to the effect data of the second movable body as an example. The “first state” corresponds to an example in which the first door body is closed and the second door body is also closed.

  Further, in the above description, “a movable body (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241) provided at a position where the player can contact at least, and a door body (for example, the front surface with respect to the inner frame 104) that can be opened and closed A combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the door 105 is not opened), wherein the movable body is provided at least on the door body, At least one of the plurality of error states is a first error state (for example, a state where a door opening error has occurred), and at least one of the plurality of error states is a second error state. State (for example, an error that cannot be canceled unless the door is opened), and the movable body performs the first condition while executing the first operation (for example, the operation according to the production data). (For example, door opening It is possible to at least return to the first position when an error occurs, and the movable body performs a second condition (for example, a payout number switch error) while executing the first operation. The first operation is at least the initial position of the movable body, and the first condition is: It is a condition that may be satisfied when the first error state is reached, and the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second error state is reached. To play. Was explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the operation of the movable body. In some cases, the operation of the movable body can be selected according to the importance of the error. Furthermore, returning to the initial position may contribute to prevention of failure of the movable body.

The movable body can also be contacted by a store clerk. In addition, the movable body may be provided on both the door body and the object different from the door body (for example, provided across two).
The door body may be removable as well as openable and closable.

  The movable body further moves to another position (for example, the maximum operating position) after returning to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. Or before returning to the first position, it may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position). In addition, when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation, the movable body continues the first operation, and after the first operation, another operation (for example, The production operation based on different new production data) may be continued.

  In addition, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition (the same applies to the third condition and the fourth condition described later) are examples in which the conditions are satisfied, and may be in other states or other conditions. It may be a condition that is established by the above-described operation.

  In addition, conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in this specification is performed. In addition, in the operation of the movable body in the claims of this application and the embodiment, the content described as “can be performed” may include a case where it is not performed.

In addition, the “position at which the player can contact at least” includes a position where the player comes into contact with nature, and a position where the player does not normally come in contact but may come into contact in some cases. In addition, “openable / closable” includes that it can be opened / closed normally, but may not be opened / closed in some cases (for example, when locked) (hereinafter the same). . “Returnable” includes that it can be returned normally, but may not be returned in some cases (hereinafter the same). “Can continue” means that it can be continued normally, but may not continue in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) ,the same).
Here, examples of the error state include a state in which the door is open.

  Further, “the movable body is intended to return at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the movable body receives external force and is not in the first position. There may be a certain gaming machine (for example, FIG. 109 (e)).

  Further, the door body may be the inner frame 104 alone or the front door 105 alone. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating between the first position and a second position farthest from the first position. Here, the second position may be a maximum movement position of the movable body. The door body may be provided closer to the player (front side) than the game board, or may hold the game board.

Further, “the movable body can execute at least a second operation (for example, a confirmation operation) when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the power is turned on,

  The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position,

  The movable body (the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 102 (c)), when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation in the second operation, A game table, wherein an initial operation is continued before returning to the first position. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the initial operation when the power is turned on can give priority to the operation of the movable body even when the first condition is satisfied by the first error state.

  In addition, when the third condition is satisfied, the movable body performs the second operation, and after the second operation, another operation (for example, the three conditions are satisfied). Other dedicated operations) may also be performed. Furthermore, the requirements for establishing the third condition may include that the door body is opened and the power switch is operated, or that the door body is closed (the island facility without the door being opened). The power may be turned on all at once).

  Further, “can be executed” includes that it can be executed normally, but may not be executed in some cases (hereinafter the same). The third condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the voltage is insufficient even when the power is turned on). is there.

  Here, the second operation may be different from the operation performed before the power is turned off if the above three conditions are satisfied after the power is turned off. May be.

  The initial operation may be an operation in which the movable body moves to a second position (for example, a maximum operating position) farthest from the first position.

  In addition, “the first error state is a state where the door body is at least open”. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the period in which the second error state is set (for example, the period in which the payout number switch error occurs) may include the first period,

  The gaming table is characterized in that the first period is a period during which at least a game can be continued. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the period in which the second error state occurs (for example, the period in which the magnet sensor error occurs) may include the second period,
The second period is a period during which at least the game cannot be continued,

  The second error state is an error state that can be canceled at least when the fourth condition is satisfied,

  The fourth condition is a condition that can be satisfied by opening the door body as at least one condition (for example, operating the power switch 178 that cannot be operated without opening the door body). ,

  The movable body can return at least to the first position when the fourth condition is satisfied while the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. , A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the movable body can be returned to the initial position giving priority to the safety of the gaming machine or the player.

  Note that the fourth condition may be a condition that is satisfied only by opening the door (for example, when the door is opened, power is automatically turned on again).

  Further, “can be released” includes that it can be released normally, but may not be released in some cases (hereinafter the same).

  Further, the fourth condition may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the opening angle of the door is insufficient) even when the door is opened.

  Here, the second error state may be releasable by operation of operating means (error release switch 168, ram clear switch 180) provided on the back side of the game table. In other words, the fourth condition may be a condition that satisfies the operation of the operating means as at least one condition. In other words, an error canceling operation means that can be operated at least by opening the door body is provided, and the fourth condition is a condition that is satisfied by operating the error canceling operation means as at least one condition. May be.

  Further, “the movable body does not start at least the first operation in the first error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 105 (f), etc.),

  The movable body is capable of at least starting the first operation in the second error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 116 (i) or the like). Stand. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible not to restrict the effect of the movable body more than necessary by not starting the first operation only in the first error state.

  The movable body may not start an operation different from the first operation (for example, an operation that moves according to a player's operation) in the first error state. The second operation may be started in addition to the first operation in the second error state.

  In addition, “being able to start” means that it should start normally, but may not start in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) ( same as below).

  Further, “the movable body is capable of at least starting the second operation in the first error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 102),

The game machine characterized in that the movable body is capable of at least starting the second operation in the second error state. ”Was also explained.
According to this game machine, the operation at the time of power-on may be given the highest priority.

  The movable body may be capable of starting an operation different from the second operation in the first error state (for example, an operation that moves according to a player's operation). In the second error state, the first operation may be started in addition to the second operation.

  In addition, “the gaming machine characterized in that the first operation is an operation in accordance with effect data. ”Was also explained.

In summary, the door-side effect movable body 2241 corresponds to the “movable body” as an example. The “door body” corresponds to, for example, a combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104. The “first error state” corresponds to the state where the inner frame 104 is opened as an example, and the “second error state” includes an error that cannot be cleared unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The state corresponds as an example. The “first position” corresponds to the initial position of the movable body as an example. The “first operation” corresponds to an operation according to the production data as an example, and the “second operation” includes a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. As a result, the opening of the inner frame 104 corresponds to “first condition” as an example, and the “second condition” corresponds to an error occurrence that cannot be canceled without opening the inner frame 104 as an example. The “third condition” corresponds to, for example, the operation of the power switch 178 or the simultaneous power-on by the island facility, and the “fourth condition” corresponds to the opening of the inner frame 104 as an example.
In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.
(Appendix A)
Providing production means that can at least produce production,
The movable body is an operating means that can be operated at least by a player,

  The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect when the operation means is operated,

  The operation means returns at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the operation means is in a position different from the first position.

  The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the effect means does not execute at least the effect even when the operation means is operated.

For example, in a slot machine or the like, there are cases where symbols constituting the winning combination are not aligned (a prize cannot be won) unless the operation method related to the stop order or the like matches a predetermined operation method. In this case, a period (assist time) for notifying the operation method on the side of the sub-control unit may be provided regardless of the main control unit. Giving this period is a privilege for a player, and the period may be extended by winning a predetermined role or winning a lottery. This extension (additional number of games) is also a bonus for the player. According to the gaming table described in Supplementary Note 1, when the door body is opened by an illegal act, there are cases where the illegal game can be prevented by restricting the effect related to the provision of the privilege.
(Appendix A)
Providing production means that can at least produce production,
The movable body is an operating means that can be operated at least by a player,

  The effect means is capable of executing at least the effect when the operation means is operated in an effective period,

  The operation means returns at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied when the operation means is in a position different from the first position.

  The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect after the effective period ends,

  The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect after the effective period ends even if the operation means is operated (without depending on the timing when the operation means is operated). A game stand characterized by that.

In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, and examples. You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.
<Embodiment C>

  The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  125 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 124 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 126 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the top of the effect device 206 to the right, and a game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. In other words, the game area 124 has a first flow path on the left side across the effect device 206 as a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down, and a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down. And a second flow path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first downstream path may be referred to as “left-handed”, and hitting a game ball on the second downstream path may be referred to as “right-handed”.

  The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center, an effect movable body 224 provided at the upper portion thereof, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a lower portion thereof. A second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In FIG. 126, the effect movable body 224 is in an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the initial position, the effect movable object 224 cannot be visually recognized by the player. ing. The effect movable body 224 is moved by a drive system (not shown) in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a display screen front plane). It can be done. The configuration and drive system of the effect movable body 224 will be described later with reference to the drawings.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and 208 d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally long rectangular display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a first general figure starting port 227, a second general figure starting port 229, and a special figure 1 starting port 230, around the rendering device 206. A special figure 2 starting port 232 and a variable winning port 234 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The first general map start port 227 and the second general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. . In the present embodiment, the first general start port 227 is arranged in the first downstream path on the left side with the rendering device 206 in between, and the second universal channel in the second downstream path on the right side with the rendering device 206 in between. A starting port 229 is disposed. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball can pass through the first general figure starting port 227 by left-handed, and the game ball can pass through the second general figure starting port 229 by right-handed. A ball that has passed through the first general start port 227 or the second general start port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side, unlike a ball that has entered the general winning port 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first general map start port 227 or the second general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210. . In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the first normal start port 227 during a period other than a predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, during the execution of the super reach effect, or during the big hit game) The pachinko machine 100 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the general symbol decorative symbol variation game with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew). In the present embodiment, only one starting port 232 is arranged below the second general-purpose starting port 229. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Since the second general map start port 229 and the special figure 2 start port 232 below the second general map start port 229 are in the second flow path on the right side across the effect device 206, the first flow down path on the left side across the effect device 206 The game ball that has advanced to does not pass through the second general start port 229 or enter the special view 2 start port 232. In addition, since the first general map start port 229 and the special figure 1 start port 230 are in the first downflow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between, the first general start port 229 and the special figure 1 start port 230 are in the second downflow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between. The advanced game ball does not pass through the first ordinary start port 227 or enter the special view 1 start port 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the special figure 1 starting opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) or without winning any winning port or start port, or the first general start port 227, the second general start port 229 It reaches the out port 240 only by passing.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing start port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected to this.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect movable body 224, and a movable object 703 to be described later. A drive circuit 422 for performing drive control, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position and initial position of the effect movable body 224 and the movable object 703, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, A sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from a predetermined detection sensor, for example, the effect movable body sensor 424 or the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data are connected. ing. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. . A driving circuit for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the basic circuit.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment are stopped and displayed. The types of ordinary maps will be described. FIG. 128 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 128 (a), ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 128 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbols, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D” are 15R jackpot symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variable game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to an electric support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). Although the electric support state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the electric support state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the electric support state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 15R special jackpot symbols, are the special figure high-probability ordinary figure high-probability state, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”, which are 15R jackpot symbols, are special It is a low probability normal figure high probability state. These “special chart A”, “special chart B”, “special chart C”, and “special chart D” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden change. Sudden probability change will be in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called hidden probability change. The hidden probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latent probability change state) after the big hit game ends. The hidden probability change does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small bonus symbol. After the small hit game ends, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (which may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state) is obtained. In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as “Special Figure E” and “Special Figure F” (in this embodiment, twice).

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a lottery to determine whether or not it is a big hit in the determination of success / failure. ~ "Special Figure J" is configured to determine whether to stop display on Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 display devices 212 and 214. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, the special figure certain change state) The presence / absence of the power supply and the presence / absence of the electric support state are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this. For example, apart from the determination of the stop symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game may be determined by lottery. The pachinko machine 100, for example, automatically determines the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the stop symbol is determined, whereas the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the profit state after the jackpot game by lottery. The profit status may be appropriately associated.

  FIG. 128 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R big hit and 15R special big hit, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 2-decoration”). 2-decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) To stop display.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing F” and the small hit of “special drawing G” and “special drawing H”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped. indicate. Further, when a 2R jackpot called “sudden change of“ special drawing E ”is notified,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol J, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 128B is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

  FIG. 128 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stoppage display modes: “general symbol A”, which is a winning symbol 1, “general symbol B”, which is a winning symbol 2, and “general symbol C” which is an outlier symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination as to whether or not the game is a hit in the ordinary game and determination of a stop symbol are performed by lottery of software random numbers. For example, the winning symbols 1 and 2 are different in the opening pattern of the special symbol 2 starting port 232 (electric Chu). Based on the detection of the above-mentioned gate sensor that the sphere has passed through the first general map start port 227 or the second general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 is configured to turn on all seven segments, The “variable display of the usual map” is performed by repeatedly lighting one segment in the center. Then, when notifying the winning of the usual figure variable game, the "usual figure A" or "common figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the "normal figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. In FIG. 128 (c) as well, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  FIG. 128 (d) shows an example of a decorative pattern for normal symbols. There are three types of decorative symbols for ordinary symbols in the present embodiment: “common figure decoration 1”, “common figure decoration 2”, and “common figure decoration 3”. The general figure decoration 1 has, for example, a design pattern that recalls “○”, the general figure decoration 2 has a design aspect that recalls, for example, “◎”, and the common figure decoration 3 has, for example, “x”. It has a reminiscent pattern. On condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor has detected that a ball has passed through the first normal opening 227 except for a predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the big hit game) On the decorative symbol display device 208, a general symbol decorative symbol change game in which the display is switched in the order of “common symbol ornament 1” → “common symbol ornament 2” → “common symbol ornament 3”... Is performed with a predetermined probability.

  In order to notify the hit of “common figure A”, the “normal figure decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notification of the hit of “normal figure B”, the “normal figure decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the deviation of “general map C”, “general map decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main controller shown in FIG. 129 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 127 has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 127, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). Or the first prize opening 227 or the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, It is determined that there has been a passage through the second general opening 229. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 226 and 234 and these starting openings 230, 232, 227, and 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated. In the initial value generating random number in the main process of the main control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the initial value of the random number counter for generating the random number value for determining the general symbol used in the normal symbol determination lottery is generated. The initial value generation random number counter is updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as random numbers for determining a custom is from 0 to 99, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random value for determining a normal map provided in the RAM 308. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  Further, in the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process, a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value used in the main control unit 300, and a common figure for generating a normal winning random number value are used. The winning random number counter and the universal determination random number counter for generating the universal determination random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  Also, for example, if a numerical value range that can be taken as a normal winning random number value is 0 to 65535, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is set to 1. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 65536, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 65535, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the normal number winning random number value, and the normal number winning random number value is generated. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value has made one round next.

  Also, for example, if a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value for determining a normal map is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for determining a normal map provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value 1 is added to and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for determining a customary figure that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the stored initial value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general purpose determination random number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating random numbers for general-purpose determination next makes one round. Keep it.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure fluctuation time determination random value counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time determination random value value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special figure fluctuation game or the initial value thereof is updated. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game is, for example, 20000 ms in the usual figure low probability state and 1000 ms in the usual figure high probability state. The pachinko machine 100 may determine the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game by lottery using a predetermined table, and generates a random number value for determining the usual figure fluctuation time for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the usual figure fluctuation game. It is also possible to update the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal fluctuation time or the initial value.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 227, 229 are won, the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or for each starting slot is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the first general figure starting port 227, the second general figure starting port 229 and the variable winning port 234. . Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A jackpot determination random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A set of random numbers for jackpot determination and a special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is a special figure. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit A special jackpot determination random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the special figure 2 of 318 is acquired, and the special jackpot special feature provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. The big hit special figure determining random value is acquired from the figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 random value for determining big hit and random figure for determining special figure for big hit (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 starting information") Are stored in the same number as the number of reserved special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the first general figure start opening 227 or the second general figure start opening 229 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is transferred from the normal figure winning random number counter. It is acquired as a winning random number value and stored in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general chart state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the flag for the first normal map is ON, When the second common symbol flag is turned on so that the display mode of symbol 1 (common figure A) is turned on, when the outlier flag is turned on so as to be displayed on the winning symbol 2 (common figure B). The 7-segment LED composing the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the display pattern of the extraordinary symbol (common figure C) is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in the display mode. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general symbol display device 210 confirms the display of one of the symbols of the winning symbol 1 (common symbol A), the winning symbol 2 (Fig. 128 common symbol B), and the off symbol (common symbol C). I do. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a win, either the first ordinary figure hit flag or the second ordinary figure hit flag is turned on based on the usual figure determination result. When the flag for the first and second maps is on, the diagram status update at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the diagram stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the processing, a normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) (part of various solenoids 332). ), A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off as will be described later. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined (determination of whether or not to change the ordinary game) is performed. When the result of the hit determination is a win, the symbol is determined by random number lottery based on the random number value for determining the normal symbol stored in the random value storage area. When the universal symbol determination result is the winning symbol 1, the first universal symbol flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and when the universal symbol determination result is the winning symbol 2, the second universal symbol provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the hit flag on. When the result of the hit determination is out of place, the usual off-set flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time in the normal high probability state is 1000 ms, and the normal symbol variation time in the normal low probability state is 20000 ms. When determining the symbol variation time of the usual figure by lottery, obtain the value of the random number value counter for determining the ordinary diagram variation time for generating the random value for determining the ordinary diagram variation time as the random value for determining the ordinary diagram variation time, Based on the acquired random number value for determining the normal map change time, one time for displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is selected as the normal map change display time. Is stored in a normal variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 126 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A or special figure B, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 128 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is When ON, special figure C or special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure If the probability variation flag is also on, the ordinary probability variation flag is off, special figure F, if the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, if the second small hit flag is on, special figure H When the first off flag is on, the special figure I When the second misalignment flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off to control the special figure J so that the special figure 2 is displayed. Set to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A, special figure B), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure C, special figure D), and a sudden probability change symbol (special figure E). , Hidden Probability Design (Special Figure F), 1st Small Bonus Design (Special Figure G), 2nd Small Bonus Design (Special Figure H), 1st Missing Design (Special Figure I), and 1st Missing Design (Special Figure) J) Confirm the display of any one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is held in the open state by the solenoid for driving to open / close the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to the solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and information indicating the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short-time state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, special chart probability variation flag values, and special chart related items. It includes information indicating the variation time of the special figure variation game selected in the lottery process, and in the case of the symbol variation stop command, includes the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. In the case of a win effect command and an end effect start command, it includes the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Yes. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variable game selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 131. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 after step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, if pressing of the chance button is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315 subsequent to step S313, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317 following step S315, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 following step S317, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 131 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of other effect random numbers, and the like are performed.

  Next, the structure and operation of the effect movable body used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 152. FIG. 132 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front as in FIG. FIG. 132 shows the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the effect movable body 224 descends from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where it is stopped.

  The effect movable body 224 has a shape imitating a sword, for example, and the blade is facing upward with respect to the rectangular opening frame that demarcates the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a sword handle on the top. The effect movable body 224 can move up and down within the rectangular opening frame while maintaining this arrangement relationship. In addition, the effect movable body 224 moves from the upper side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame and becomes invisible at the initial position. Note that the effect movable body 224 may be moved from the lower side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame at the maximum lowered position so that it cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 133 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front as in FIG. 132. In FIG. 133, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 132, and the movable object 703 simulating a blade is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle around the center of the base 701. Is shown.

  Next, the structure of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 and 135. In the following description, the side closer to the player with the pachinko machine 100 installed in the island facility of the game store is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front end, etc.), and vice versa. , Rear side, rear end, etc.), as viewed from the player, the vertical top is “up” (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa is “lower” (lower, lower, lower end, etc.) When viewed from the viewer, the horizontal left is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right, right end, etc.). FIG. 134 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side. FIG. 135 is an external perspective view of movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 134 (a) and 135 (a) show a case where the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position. In the movable object unit 700, a right drive system base 713 and a left drive system base 712 having elongated metal plates are opposed to each other in the left-right direction, and an upper end of the right drive system base 713 and an upper end of the left drive system base 712 are connected to the elongated metal plate. Connected at 710, the lower end of the right drive system base 713 and the lower end of the left drive system base 712 are connected by a connecting member 711 of an elongated metal plate and assembled into a rectangular frame shape.

  A guide member 717 having an elongated cylindrical metal rod is fixed to the right drive system base 713 along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). A motor mr is disposed at the lower end of the right drive system base 713, a gear gr1 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor mr, and a gear gr2 is meshed with the gear gr1. A pulley pr is disposed at the upper end of the right drive system base 713, and a belt vr is bridged between the pulley pr and the gear gr2. The belt vr is stretched in parallel with the extending direction of the guide member 717.

  A guided member 721 is attached so as to be slidable around a cylindrical metal rod of the guide member 717. The guided member 721 is fixed to the belt vr. By driving the motor mr and moving the belt vr, the guided member 721 fixed to the belt vr is guided by the guide member 717 and can move in the vertical direction along the columnar member of the guide member 717. . A movable body right end holding member (not shown) that holds the right end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 721.

  A guide member 715 having a cylindrical metal rod that is elongated along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) is fixed to the left drive system base 712. A motor ml is disposed at the lower end of the left drive system base 712, a gear gl1 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor ml, and a gear gl2 is engaged with the gear gl1. A pulley pl is disposed at the upper end of the left drive system base 712, and a belt vl is bridged between the pulley pl and the gear gl2. The belt vl is stretched in parallel with the direction in which the guide member 715 extends.

  A guided member 719 is attached so as to be slidable around a cylindrical metal rod of the guide member 715. The guided member 719 is fixed to the belt vl. By driving the motor ml and moving the belt vl, the guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl is guided by the guide member 715 and can move in the vertical direction along the columnar member of the guide member 715. . A movable body left end holding member (not shown) that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 719.

  A motor 723 that rotates the movable object 703 around the center of the base 701 is fixed to the right end of the effect movable body 224. FIGS. 134 (b) and 135 (b) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is translated downward from the initial position by a predetermined distance in synchronization with the right drive system and the left drive system in cooperation. Yes. 134 (c) and 135 (c), the movable object 703 is rotated while the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 135 (b). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view (part) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to this embodiment as viewed from the back side. Although illustration is omitted, a similar configuration is also provided in the right drive system of the movable object unit 700. The guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl and slidably holding the guide member 715 is provided with a box-shaped region, and the box-shaped region is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the guided member 719. A claw portion 725 that can protrude by a predetermined distance in the direction to be accommodated is accommodated. The tip of the claw portion 725 is formed in a wedge shape. In addition, the upper end of the claw portion 725 has a slope that can contact a pin 729 described later. A spring 723 that contacts the rear end of the claw portion 725 is disposed in the box-shaped region. The claw portion 725 is always urged in the protruding direction by the action of the spring 723. The box-shaped region accommodates the claw portion 725 and the spring 723 and is closed with a lid member 727.

  A movable body left end holding member 731 that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is slidably attached to the guide member 715 below the guided member 719. The movable body left end holding member 731 is formed with a claw portion 731 a having a wedge-shaped tip that can be engaged with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719.

  When the movable body left end holding member 731 holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 is positioned at the lowermost end of the guide member 715, the motor ml is rotated in a predetermined direction to move the belt vl. The member 719 is lowered, and the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 can be engaged. Thereby, the movable body left end holding member 731 can be connected to the guided member 719. When the motor ml is rotated in the other direction after the engagement is completed to move the belt vl to raise the guided member 719, the movable body left end holding member 731 connected to the guided member 719 is also raised together. By similarly driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700, the effect movable body 224 positioned at the lowermost end can be pulled up.

  A pin 729 protrudes and is fixed at a position above the left drive system base 712 by a predetermined distance above the initial position of the effect movable body 224 and at a position where it can come into contact with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 rises beyond the initial position and makes the claw portion 725 contact (collision) with the pin 729, the pin 729 moves the claw portion 725 by a predetermined amount in the direction of being pushed into the box member side. Accordingly, the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 can be separated. By similarly driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700, the effect movable body 224 positioned at the uppermost position can be freely dropped.

  In order to return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position, the guided member 719 is moved to the movable body left end holding member 731 located at the lowermost end to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a, and then the guided member 719 is engaged. And moving the effect movable body 224 to the initial position by performing the same operation in synchronization with the right drive system.

  FIG. 137 (a) is an exploded perspective view (part) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to this embodiment as viewed from the back side. 137 (b) to (d) show an enlarged view of the circular portion of FIG. 137 (a). The disengagement operation of the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a by the pin 729 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the guided member 719 holding the movable body left end holding member 731 is moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position by driving of the drive system. The claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 are engaged. Further, the bottom portion of the pin 729 is in contact with the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 moves further upward, the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719, so that the claw portion 725 engages with the claw portion 731 a of the movable body left end holding member 731. It is moved in the direction to cancel.

  In FIG. 137 (c), the guided member 719 moves further upward, and the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a. Indicates a state where has been resolved.

  FIG. 137 (d) shows that the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 are separated and movable. The body left end holding member 731 is shown in the middle of free fall.

  FIG. 138 is a front view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 138 (a) shows a state where the movable object 703 is in an initial position where it is not displaced with respect to the base 701. FIG. 138 (b) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is displaced by a predetermined angle counterclockwise with the central portion of the base portion 701 as the center of rotation. For driving the movable object 703, a drive system using a motor 723, a pulley and a belt (not shown) is used. FIG. 138 (c) shows a state in which the movable object 703 has rotated the maximum angle counterclockwise. The movable object 703 includes an LED substrate inside, and can produce an effect of causing the LED to emit light.

  FIG. 139 is an external perspective view of the rendering movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. A belt vc is stretched over a gear gc that transmits the rotation of a motor 723 (not shown) at the right end of the base 701 and a gear (not shown) that is rotatably fixed to a central portion 703c of the base 701. A movable object 703 is connected to the gear of the central portion 703c. By rotating the motor 723, the belt vc is driven and the gear of the central portion 703c is rotated, whereby the movable object 703 can be rotated relative to the base 701.

  On the left side of the central portion 703c of the base portion 701, a photosensor 740 in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are disposed to face each other with a space portion 740a interposed therebetween is disposed. The photosensor 740 includes a light emitting element and a light receiving element that are arranged to face each other with the space 740a interposed therebetween. The light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown in FIG. 139) are directed toward the space part 740a so that the optical path from the light emitting part to the light receiving part is in the horizontal front-rear direction with the pachinko machine 100 installed in an island facility or the like. Has been placed. In order to prevent the light emitted from the decorative symbol display device 208 located on the rear side of the effect movable body 224 from entering the light receiving portion of the light receiving element of the photosensor 740, for example, a black resin having a predetermined width is provided behind the light receiving element. The light-impermeable member used is provided. In this example, a wall portion 740b behind a part of the light receiving elements of the housing of the photosensor 740 is used as a light opaque member.

  In the vicinity of the photosensor 740, a shutter 750 including a light shielding piece 750c that shields light that enters the space 740a of the photosensor 740 and is emitted from the light emitting element so as not to be received by the light receiving element is attached. The shutter 750 is fixed rotatably at a rotation center 750a. A projecting piece abutting portion 750b with which the projecting piece 703s provided on the movable object 703 can abut is provided on the opposite side of the light shielding piece 750c with respect to the rotation center 750a. The rotation center 750a has a spring mechanism (not shown) inside, and the shutter mechanism 750 urges the shutter 750 so that the light-shielding piece 750c does not enter the space 740a of the photosensor 740 unless a force is applied from the outside. Has been. When the protruding piece 703 s comes into contact with and presses the protruding piece abutting portion 750 b, the light shielding piece 750 c enters the space 740 a of the photosensor 740. The vicinity of the shutter 750 is protected by attaching a lid member 701 a to the base 701.

  In this embodiment, the photo sensor 740 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece 750c, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the movable object 703 is in the initial position when the photo sensor 740 detects the light shielding piece 750c. When the photo sensor 740 does not detect the light shielding piece 750c, it is determined that the movable object 703 is at a position other than the initial position.

  FIG. 140 is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 141 (a) is an external perspective view of the rendering movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 141 (b) to (d) show an enlarged view of the circular portion of FIG. 141 (a). The operation of the protruding piece 703s and the shutter 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141 (b) to (d). FIG. 140A and FIG. 141B show a state where the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the projecting piece 703s contacts the projecting piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the projecting piece abutting portion 750b. I have entered. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  140 (b) and 141 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703 s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703 c. For this reason, the protruding piece 703 s is detached from the protruding piece contact portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force no longer acts on the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, the protruding piece abutting portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light shielding piece 750c is raised and retracts from the space portion 740a of the photosensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  140 (c) and 141 (d) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by the maximum angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c and comes into contact with the mechanical end and stops. Since the protruding piece 703s is separated from the protruding piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and no pressing force is applied to the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, the protruding piece abutting portion 750b is lowered by the urging force of the spring and maintains the stopped state. At the same time, the light-shielding piece 750c is also lifted to maintain the state of being withdrawn from the space 740a of the photosensor 740. The photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIG. 142 is a rear view and a partial cross-sectional view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 142 (a) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is the same as FIG. 140 (a). FIG. 142 (b) shows a cross section cut along line AA in FIG. 142 (a), and FIG. 142 (c) shows a cross section in which a part of FIG. 142 (b) is enlarged. 142 (a) to 142 (c) show a state where the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the projecting piece 703s contacts the projecting piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the projecting piece abutting portion 750b. I have entered. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIG. 142 (d) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is the same as FIG. 140 (b). FIG. 142 (e) shows a cross section cut along the line BB in FIG. 142 (d), and FIG. 142 (f) shows a cross section in which a part of FIG. 142 (e) is enlarged. 142 (d) to (f) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703 s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703 c. For this reason, the protruding piece 703 s is detached from the protruding piece contact portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force no longer acts on the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, the protruding piece abutting portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light shielding piece 750c is raised and retracts from the space portion 740a of the photosensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIGS. 143 to 146 schematically show a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. The effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 143 to 146 show a state in which the game board 200 is viewed from the left to the right in the horizontal direction. FIG. 143 (a) shows that the effect movable body 224 as the first means is stopped at the initial position, and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the second means arranged behind the effect movable body 224. It shows a state in which light is emitted from the front toward the front. A photo sensor 740 is disposed on the base 701 of the effect movable body 224. The photosensor 740 has a pair of wall portions arranged to face each other with a space portion 740a formed with a predetermined width in the horizontal front-rear direction. A light emitting element 740c is arranged on the front wall part of the pair of wall parts, and a light receiving element 740d is arranged on the rear wall part 740b. The wall portion 740b on which the light receiving element 740d is disposed functions as a light-impermeable member at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light-impermeable member. The effect movable body 224 is provided with a movable object 703 as a fourth means. Further, since the movable movable body 224 is in the initial position and the movable object 703 is also in the initial position, the light shielding piece 750c of the shutter 750 projects in the vertical direction into the space portion 740a to shield the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c. For this reason, the light receiving element 740d does not detect light exceeding a predetermined threshold intensity.

  The effect movable body 224 relates to the decorative symbol display device 208, an initial position (first position) that does not overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction, and a position that overlaps at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction ( The range including the second position) can be moved.

  In this example, the effect movable body 224 can move along a linear trajectory in the vertical direction. However, the effect movable body 224 moves along a trajectory including a curved line or an arc without being limited to a linear trajectory. It may be possible, and it is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be movable in the left-right direction or the diagonal direction. The effect movable body 224 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), and can emit light at any position. The effect movable body 224 can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, and can emit light while the movable object 703 is moving. May be.

  The photosensor 740 detects whether or not the movable object 703 is in the initial position based on whether or not the light receiving element 740d receives light from the light emitting element 740c. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c is blocked by the light shielding piece 750c and cannot be received by the light receiving element 740d, and when the movable object 703 is moving, the light from the light emitting element 740c. Can be received by the light receiving element 740d. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, light from the light emitting element 740c can be received by the light receiving element 740d without being blocked by the light shielding piece 750c, and when the movable object 703 is moving, the light emitting element 740c May be blocked by the light-shielding piece 750c so that it cannot be received by the light-receiving element 740d.

  The position of the light shielding piece 750 c of the shutter 750 is changed according to the movement of the movable object 703. In this example, the shutter 750 is provided separately from the movable object 703, but the movable object 703 and the light shielding piece 750c may be provided integrally. Further, the reflectance of at least part or all of the surface of the light shielding piece 750c may be lower than that of at least part or all of the surface of the effect movable body 224 (it is difficult to reflect light).

  The movable object 703 is movable in a range including a third position (initial position) and a fourth position (movement position). In this example, the center portion 703c rotates about the rotation axis, and the fourth position is less overlapped with the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 than the third position. That is, the degree to which the movable object 703 protrudes from the base 701 increases. The movable object 703 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light while the movable object 703 is moving, and can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, The light emission mode may be different between the third position and the fourth position.

  In FIG. 143 (b), the effect movable body 224 moves downward as indicated by an arrow from the initial position, and is positioned in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the effect movable body 224. It shows the state. Light is emitted forward from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in the figure. The light emitted from the decorative design display device 208 irradiates the effect movable body 224 located in the front from behind, but the wall portion 740b behind the pair of wall portions of the photosensor 740 is at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b. Functions as a light-impermeable member. In this way, a part of the members constituting the photosensor 740 is located behind the light receiving element 740d as a light impermeable member, thereby preventing the light receiving element 740d from receiving the light from the decorative symbol display device 208. can do.

  144, the movable object 703 rotates around the rotation axis of the central portion 703c from the state of FIG. 143 (b), and the effect movable body 224 is moved more than the position (third position) shown in FIG. 143 (b). The state which moved to the 4th position where the overlapping degree with the base 701 becomes small is shown. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined amount, as described with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) to 141 (d), the projecting piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 is brought into contact with the projecting piece abutting portion 750b. Since the protruding piece 703 s moves, the protruding piece abutting portion 750 b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light shielding piece 750 c is raised and retracted from the space portion 740 a of the photosensor 740. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c is received by the light receiving element 740d.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of an area including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modification of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. In the photo sensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 145 (a), the light receiving element 740d is disposed on the front wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and the light emitting element 740c is disposed on the rear wall portion 740b. As a result, when the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 including the light-emitting element 740c and the light-shielding piece 750c are positioned behind the light-receiving element 740b. In some cases, light from the symbol display device 208 can be prevented from being received by the light receiving element 740b.

  The photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 145 (b) has a pair of wall portions arranged to face each other with a space portion 740a formed with a predetermined width in the vertical direction. A light emitting element 740c is disposed on the lower wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light receiving element 740d is disposed on the upper wall portion 740b. The wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is arranged has a region behind the light receiving element 740b functioning as a light-impermeable member as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light-impermeable member. The light shielding piece 750c moves in the horizontal front-rear direction as the movable object 703 moves from the initial position. By doing so, the wall portion 740b made of a light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 provided with the light receiving element 740d is located behind the light receiving element 740d. 740d may be difficult to receive light. In addition, since the direction of the light from the decorative design display device 208 and the direction of the light from the light emitting element 740c are orthogonal, it may be difficult to make the light receiving element 740d receive the light from the decorative design display device 208. is there.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modification of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (c) has, for example, the same structure as the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 143, and is a thin plate separate from the photosensor 740 as a third means. It is characterized in that a light opaque member 760 is provided. The light-impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (a) is disposed so as to cover at least the back of the photosensor 740 on the rear side of the base 701. The light-impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (b) is arranged so as to cover at least the rear and lower sides of the photosensor 740 on the rear side and the lower side of the base portion 701. The light-impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (c) is disposed so as to cover at least the rear and upper / lower sides of the photosensor 740 on the rear side and the upper / lower side of the base 701. By disposing such a light-impermeable member 760 at least behind the photosensor 740, it may be possible to more reliably prevent light from the decorative symbol display device 208 from entering the light receiving element 740d. The light-impermeable member 760 is not limited to a thin plate shape, and may be, for example, a light-shielding film or the like coated on the rear surface of the base 701 at least behind the photosensor 740.

  Next, the rendering operation in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 147 shows effects in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order almost in time series. 147 (a), (c) to (f), and (h) are the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. The device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the general figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown in an extracted manner. FIG. 147 (b) shows that a game ball passes through the first general-purpose starting port 227. FIG. 147 (g) shows a state where the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened to the left and right.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the fourth graphic display area a2 of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. The 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the usual figure holding number display area a5, and the 4th figure display area a6 of the usual figure are arranged. Further, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reserved number display area 801. On the right side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for performing a general graphic effect display or a variable icon display.

  FIG. 147 (a) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 changes the special figure 1 which repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the central one segment. It shows the state of displaying. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols in which the decorative symbols move from top to bottom is performed (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. In addition, the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays, for example, the first off symbol “special figure I” as a stop symbol form. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the usual figure variable game is stopped, and on the usual figure display device 210, for example, the off symbol “common figure C” is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol form. In addition, the fourth symbol display area a6 of the usual figure is displayed to indicate that the usual figure variable game is stopped.

  The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit with three LEDs, indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “3”. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is three. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “3” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1, for example, a character image of “爺” is displayed. The second and third hold displays h2 and h3 are normal hold displays, and for example, a black circle image is displayed.

  In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all LEDs are turned off, and it is shown that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is "0". Also, the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 216 indicates that all LEDs are extinguished and the number of normal-use hold is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 is displayed as a default display without displaying the ordinary drawing effect display and the change icon display. A number “0” indicating the number of reserved common drawings is displayed in the usual figure holding number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (b) shows that three game balls have passed through the first general view starting port 227 continuously.

  FIG. 147 (c) shows the first time that three game balls have passed through the first general start port 227 as shown in FIG. 147 (b) during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 147 (a). This shows a state in which the usual figure variation game is started. The general-purpose display device 210 performs normal-variable display in which all the seven segments are lit and the central one segment is lit repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the three decorative symbols shown in FIG. 128 (d) are displayed in a variable display in which the decorative symbols of the normal symbol move sequentially from top to bottom (in the drawing). , Indicated by a down arrow). In addition, a display indicating that the usual figure variable game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area a6. The usual figure hold lamp 216 is lit with two LEDs, indicating that the number of usual figure holds is “2”. In addition, a number “2” indicating the number of holdings of ordinary drawings is displayed in the usual figure holding number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol pattern on the general diagram display device 210 when the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 147 (c) ends during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 147 (a). The off symbol “general map C” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the general symbol decoration 3 (for example, an image representing a cross mark) indicating that the result of the common variable game is out of place during the normal symbol stop period is stopped and displayed. Has been. In addition, the fourth symbol display area a6 of the usual figure is displayed to indicate that the usual figure variable game is stopped.

  FIG. 147 (e) shows a state in which the second ordinary game is started during the special figure 1 game shown in FIG. 147 (a). The general-purpose display device 210 performs normal-variable display in which all the seven segments are lit and the central one segment is lit repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable decorative symbol display in which the normal decorative symbols sequentially move from top to bottom is performed. In addition, a display indicating that the usual figure variable game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area a6. The usual figure hold lamp 216 is lit with one LED, indicating that the number of usual figure holds is “1”. In addition, a number “1” indicating the number of holds of the usual figure is displayed in the usual figure hold number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (f) shows, for example, a stop symbol form on the general diagram display device 210 when the common figure variable game shown in FIG. 147 (e) ends during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 147 (a). The winning symbol “general map B” is stopped. Also, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the general symbol decoration 2 (for example, an image representing a double circle) indicating that the result of the common symbol variable game is a hit during the normal symbol stop period is stopped. It is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol display area a6 of the usual figure is displayed to indicate that the usual figure variable game is stopped. In the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and around the special effect area 803, an effect image g1 at the time of normal winning is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (f), when a win-win game is won, as shown in FIG. 147 (g), an electric chew opening state in which the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened to the left and right is set.

  FIG. 147 (h) shows an example of the effect performed when the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the electric chew open state shown in FIG. 147 (g). In the special effect area 803, a character image of “Tono” indicating that the electric chew is released is displayed, and for example, a tutorial (game table explanation) image g2 “electric choo is open!” Is displayed in a balloon area indicating the voice of the man. Has been. In this way, in this example, a general drawing effect display corresponding to the general variable game as shown in FIG. 147 is performed.

  FIG. 148 shows effects in the special figure 1 variable game. 148 (a) to 148 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. 148 (a) to (h) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 126, the universal diagram display device 210, the special diagram display device 212, and the special diagram 2 display device. 214, the ordinary figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the fourth graphic display area a2 of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. The 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the usual figure holding number display area a5, and the 4th figure display area a6 of the usual figure are arranged. Further, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reserved number display area 801. On the right side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for performing a general graphic effect display or a variable icon display.

  FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating a disengagement is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays, for example, the first off symbol “special figure I” as a stop symbol form. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the usual figure variable game is stopped, and on the usual figure display device 210, for example, the off symbol “common figure C” is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol form. In addition, in the normal 4th symbol display area a6, a display indicating that the general variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the special effect area 803 is displayed as a default display without displaying the ordinary drawing effect display and the change icon display.

  The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit with three LEDs, indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “3”. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is three. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “3” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 are normal hold displays, for example, a black circle image is displayed. The third hold display h3 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of FIG. 1, and for example, a character image of “爺” is displayed.

  In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all LEDs are turned off, and it is shown that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is "0". Also, the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 216 indicates that all LEDs are extinguished and the number of normal-use hold is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 is displayed as a default display without displaying the ordinary drawing effect display and the change icon display. A number “0” indicating the number of reserved common drawings is displayed in the usual figure holding number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 148 (b) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 changes the special figure 1 which repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. It shows the state of displaying. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols in which the decorative symbols move from top to bottom is performed (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs and the special figure 1 hold number is “2”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, two hold indications h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is two. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “2” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803 at the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon is displayed with a black circle image as if the digested hold has moved.

  FIG. 148 (c) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game has elapsed for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 148 (d) shows a state in which the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. ing.

  In FIG. 148 (e), the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b has the decorative symbol. This shows a state where the variable display is performed.

  FIG. 148 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7” indicating a disengagement is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of special figure 1. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 perform variable display of decorative symbols. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with one LED, and the special figure 1 hold number is “1”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 holding number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one holding display h1 is displayed, and it is indicated that the holding number of the special figure 1 is 1. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “1” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803, a black circle image is displayed as if the digested suspension has moved.

  FIG. 148 (h) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game has elapsed for a predetermined time. In addition, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the middle and right symbol display areas 208b and 208c are in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 149 shows effects in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 149 (a) to (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. Also, the state shown in FIG. 149 (a) continues from the state shown in FIG. 148 (h).

  In FIG. 149 (a), the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Only the middle symbol display device 208b has the decoration symbol. The normal reach state in which the fluctuation display is performed is shown.

  FIG. 149 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5” indicating a loss is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 149 (c) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of special figure 1. FIG. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so all the LEDs on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are off and the number of hold in the special figure 1 is “0”. It is shown. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 1 is zero. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon is displayed with an image of “爺” as if the digested hold has moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button press indication is displayed with an image imitating the chance button 136 together with the message “Press the button!”. In addition, a button reception period display image indicating a period during which the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 within the remaining time shown in the button reception period display image or the button reception period elapses, as shown in FIG. Is displayed as a preview image to notify the result. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  In FIG. 149 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the normal reach state.

  FIG. 149 (f) shows a state where the normal reach has evolved to the super reach. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as an effect display area. In this example, a super-reach image in which the samurai shouts out loud, “It ’s a game!” Is displayed.

In FIG. 149 (g), the character “Win” is displayed when the warrior wins the game, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Shows the state.

  FIG. 149 (h) shows “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration” in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, which have been reduced in the upper right corner of the display area, move to the center of the display area and indicate a big hit. “7” indicates an enlarged and stopped display. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. In this way, in this example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure variable game as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149 is performed.

  FIG. 150 shows an example of performance in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 150A illustrates a time setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150B illustrates an effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150C illustrates a volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150D illustrates a brightness setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can make various settings for the pachinko machine 100 through the screens shown in FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (d).

  FIG. 150E illustrates a hit display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A large screen at the center of the display area is used as the effect display area, and in this example, a hit display image in which a samurai on a horse is moving on a mountain road is displayed. Around the display area, for example, a special big hit image of the number “7” indicating that the big hit is a special big hit is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, an acquired ball number display image is displayed on the upper side of the display area (in this example, “80 balls” is displayed). In addition, a round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, “1R” is displayed). In the lower right corner, a display image of the number of jackpots (number of consecutive resorts) is displayed (in this example, “number of jackpots: 1” is displayed).

  FIG. 150 (f) illustrates the display screen during power support displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A special symbol variation game is performed in the electric support state, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region. In the electric support state, the player should make a right turn to allow many game balls to pass through the second general figure starting port 229 and to allow the special figure 2 starting port 232 to win many game balls. For this reason, with the variation display of the decorative symbol as a background display, the direction of launching by a clockwise arrow on the character string “Please strike right!” And the enlarged game ball in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 A suggestion is displayed. Note that the special effect area 803 is displayed with a variation icon based on the normally reserved image of FIG. 2, and further, one normal reserved display h4 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved display area.

  FIG. 150G illustrates a demonstration display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string “Dayo” is displayed. FIG. 150 (h) illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a door opening error screen and a pan full error screen are displayed.

  151 shows an effect example using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 151 (a) to 151 (j), as shown in FIG. 132, the effect movable body 224 starts from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where it is lowered and stopped in the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  151A shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 147F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (a), the fluctuating display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the reserved display in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 and the special figure 2 reserved number display area, and the special At least a part of the normal map stop symbol display in the effect region 803 and the effect image g1 are hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the 4th symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, the 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the general figure reserved number display area a5, The usual 4th symbol display area a6 is not hidden by the effect movable body 224. Special Figure 1 Reservation Number Display Area a1, Special Figure 1 4th Symbol Display Area a2, Special Figure 2 Reservation Number Display Area a3, Special Figure 2 4th Symbol Display Area a4, General Figure Reservation Number Display Area a5, and General The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is not hidden by the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  FIG. 151 (b) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 147 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (b), the decorative symbols change display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special The electric chew release display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 are at least partially hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (c) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (c), the stop display of the decorative symbol in any of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area. The default display in the special effect area 803 is at least partially hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (d), the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is stopped, the reserved display of the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 and the special figure 2 reserved number display area, and the special effect. The default display in the area 803 is made to be at least partially hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (e), the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the change icon display in the special effect area 803, the button press suggestion display, and the button reception period display image are: The effect movable body 224 is at least partially hidden.

  FIG. 151 (f) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (f), the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the preview image are at least partially provided by the effect movable body 224. Is hidden.

  FIG. 151 (g) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c reduced in the upper right corner of the display area is prevented from being hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (h) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (h), at least a part of the winning hit display image and the big hit count display image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special big hit image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (i) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (i), at least a part of the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c and the display screen during power support are hidden by the effect movable body 224. Yes.

  FIG. 151 (j) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (j), at least a part of the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and the dish full tank error screen are hidden by the effect movable body 224. . On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 152 shows an effect example using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 152A to 152J, as shown in FIG. 133, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 132, and the movable object 703 simulating a blade is the base 701. A state in which the central portion is rotated by a maximum angle counterclockwise with the center as the rotation center is shown.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 147 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (a), the decorative symbol change display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special The normal-design stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 are at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the 4th symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, the 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the general figure reserved number display area a5, The usual 4th symbol display area a6 is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Special Figure 1 Reservation Number Display Area a1, Special Figure 1 4th Symbol Display Area a2, Special Figure 2 Reservation Number Display Area a3, Special Figure 2 4th Symbol Display Area a4, General Figure Reservation Number Display Area a5, and General The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  FIG. 152 (b) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 147 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (b), the decorative symbol change display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special The electric chew release display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 are at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 152 (c) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (c), the decorative display of any of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is stopped, and the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 or the special figure 2 hold number display area is held. The default display in the special effect area 803 is at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 152 (d) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (d), the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is stopped, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area are held, and the special effect is produced. The default display in the area 803 is at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 152 (e) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (e), the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the change icon display in the special effect area 803, the button press suggestion display, and the button reception period display image are: The base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224 is at least partially hidden.

  FIG. 152 (f) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (f), the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the preview image are the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or At least a part of the movable object 703 is hidden.

  FIG. 152 (g) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c reduced in the upper right corner of the display area is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 152 (h) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 150 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (h), at least a part of the hit display image and the big hit count display image is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special big hit image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  152 (i) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 150 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (i), at least one of the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c is displayed at least one by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. The part is hidden.

  FIG. 152 (j) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 150 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (j), the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c and the dish full tank error screen are at least partially provided by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Is hidden. On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 152 again. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with a plurality of presentation means, and at least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation. Means (for example, a production movable body 224), at least one of the plurality of production means is a second production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the first production means is At least a moving operation can be performed, the second rendering means can perform at least a light emission operation, and at least a part of the first rendering means is a photosensor (for example, a photosensor 740). And at least part of the photosensor is light emitting means (for example, light emitting element 740c), and at least part of the photosensor is light receiving means (for example, light receiving element 74). d), and the photo sensor is movable at least in accordance with the moving operation of the first effect means, and at least a part of the first effect means is a light shielding means (for example, a photo sensor). 740 b), and the light shielding means is movable at least in accordance with the moving operation of the first rendering means, and the light shielding means in the first state is the second portion. It is located between the rendering means and the light receiving means (for example, behind the light receiving element 740d), and the first state is a state where the position of the first rendering means is the first position. The first position is a position where at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means is irradiated toward the first effect means (for example, a position in the front plane of the display screen). It is characterized by To.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the light shielding means is located between the photo sensor included in the first effect means capable of executing at least the moving operation and the second effect means as the display means, the photo sensor However, there is a case where it is possible to perform a stable performance without improving false detection with the light of the second performance means and to improve the interest of the game.

  (2) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of rendering means is a third rendering means (for example, a movable object 703), and the first rendering means is the third rendering means. And the third effect means is movable in accordance with the movement operation of the first effect means, and the third effect means can at least execute the movement operation. The photosensor is at least changeable to a plurality of sensor states, and at least one of the plurality of sensor states is such that the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means. It is a first sensor state, at least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means cannot receive light from the light emitting means, and the photosensor is In the second state, at least one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state can be changed, and the photosensor is in the third state in the first state. It is possible to change at least to the other sensor state of the sensor state and the second sensor state, and the second state is the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means. It is a state that is a second position, and the third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is not the second position. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, since the third effect means that moves by the movement operation of the first effect means can further execute the move operation, the interest of the game may be improved. (3) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The second effect means is characterized in that it can execute at least display (for example, display of decorative symbols, various effects, etc.).

  According to the pachinko machine 100, by concealing the display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the moving operation of the first effect means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (4) In the pachinko machine 100, the second rendering means includes a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure hold number display, a general figure hold number display, and a special figure first). At least one of the four symbols, the fourth symbol in the general diagram, the notice display, the pre-read notice display, etc.), and at least one of the plurality of displays is the first display. In the first period, the first presentation means can cover at least a part of the first display (for example, a decorative symbol, a notice display, a pre-read notice display, etc.) from the front. The first period is a period of at least a part of the operation period of the moving operation of the first rendering means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, there is a case where the player can be focused on the moving operation of the first effect means by hiding the first display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (5) In the pachinko machine 100, the game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in a movable body.

  In addition, the light shielding plate (for example, the light shielding piece 750c) is provided at least at a position between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and the light reflectance of the light shielding plate is the first reflectance. The first rendering means has at least a second region whose light reflectance is the second reflectance, and the first reflectance is the second reflection. It may be lower than the rate (it is difficult to reflect light).

  In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit is directed to the light receiving unit may be different from the direction in which the light from the second rendering unit is directed forward. In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit is directed to the light receiving unit may be a direction opposite to the direction in which the light from the second rendering unit is directed forward. In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit travels toward the light receiving unit may be a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the light from the second rendering unit travels forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit is directed to the light receiving unit may be the same direction as the direction in which the light from the second effect unit is directed forward.

  Further, at least a part of the photosensor may be a light shielding unit. Further, the light shielding means may be provided in the first effect means separately from the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the back of the photosensor. The light shielding means may cover at least the back of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the lower part of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the upper part of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the side of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear and one or more directions among the front, rear, left, right, top and bottom of the photosensor. The light shielding means may be located at least behind and below the photosensor. In other words, when a photo sensor is mounted on a conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that reflects light always flows down the game area, so the path of light reaching the light receiving part of the photo sensor cannot be specified. However, in some cases, erroneous detection can be prevented by covering the light from the display device and the light from the rolling game ball by covering the back and bottom of the photosensor, respectively. In addition, by not covering more than necessary (covering only two directions, front, rear, left, right, up and down), there are cases where the weight of the first rendering means can be weighed to reduce power during movement and reduce costs. . Further, the light shielding means may be part of a member constituting the photosensor. The light shielding means may be a part of a member provided with the light emitting means. The light shielding means may be a part of a member provided with the light receiving means.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of displays may be a second display. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the moving operation period. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the first rendering means may be capable of hiding at least part of the first display and at least part of the second display from the front.

  Further, the third effect means may be capable of executing the moving operation to a position covering at least a part of the second effect means from the front. Further, the third rendering means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the moving operation period. The third rendering means may be capable of hiding only at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the third rendering means may be capable of hiding at least part of the first display and at least part of the second display from the front.

Further, the second effect means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display at the same time. Each of the plurality of displays may be a display indicating game information (hereinafter referred to as “display indicating a plurality of game information”). In addition, a display indicating a plurality of game information or a plurality of game information includes a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure hold number display, a general figure hold number display, a special figure fourth pattern, a general figure fourth Symbol, notice display, pre-read notice display, tutorial display, special drawing effect display, general drawing effect display, background display, button press suggestion display, variation display, pseudo variation display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, Out of line display, jackpot effect display, jackpot round number display, count number display for each round, number of acquired balls, jackpot ream number display, probable change effect display, short and medium effect display, launch direction suggestion display, pre-reading mode display Periodic effect display, demonstration screen display, volume setting display, light amount setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting executed periodically (for example, every hour) Shown, error display, may include at least one of. Further, the first display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. Further, the second display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. Further, at least one of the plurality of effect means may be a fourth effect means.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 153, “a plurality of reels 1002 provided with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels”. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

  (Additional remark 1) It is a game machine provided with the several production | presentation means, Comprising: At least 1 of the said several production | presentation means is a 1st production | presentation means, At least one of the said several production | presentation means is The second effect means is capable of executing at least a moving operation, and the second effect means is capable of executing at least a light emission operation. At least a part of the rendering means is a photo sensor, at least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting means, at least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving means, and the photo sensor is the first sensor. And at least a part of the first effect means is a light shielding means, and the light shielding means is the movement operation of the first effect means. In The light shielding means is positioned between the second rendering means and the light receiving means in the first state, and the first state is the The position of the first effect means is the first position, and the first position is at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means toward the first effect means. A game stand characterized by being a position to be irradiated.

  (Additional remark 2) It is a game stand of Additional remark 1, Comprising: At least one of the said several production | presentation means is a 3rd production means, and said 1st production means is said 3rd production means. The third presentation means is movable in accordance with the movement operation of the first presentation means, and the third presentation means can at least execute a movement operation. The photosensor is capable of changing at least to a plurality of sensor states, and at least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first state in which the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means. One sensor state, at least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit, and the photosensor is a second sensor state. In the state of It is possible to change at least one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state, and the photosensor in the third state is the first sensor state and the second sensor state. The second sensor state is changeable at least to the other sensor state, and the second state is that the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is the second position. The game machine is characterized in that the third state is a state where the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is not the second position.

  (Additional remark 3) It is a game stand of Additional remark 1 or 2, Comprising: Said 2nd production | presentation means is what can perform a display at least, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (Additional remark 4) It is a game stand of Additional remark 3, Comprising: Said 2nd production means can perform the display of at least any one of several displays, At least of said several displays One is a first display, and the first rendering means is capable of covering at least a part of the first display from the front during the first period, The game table according to claim 1, wherein the period is at least a part of an operation period of the moving operation of the first effect means.

(Additional remark 5) It is a game stand as described in any one of additional remarks 1-4, Comprising: The said game stand is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.
Moreover, the said embodiment is put together as follows.

  (1) A gaming machine including a plurality of presentation means, wherein at least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means, and at least one of the plurality of presentation means is: A second effect means, at least one of the plurality of effect means being a third effect means, the first effect means being a means capable of executing at least a movement operation, The second effect means is an image display means, the third effect means is a means capable of executing at least a moving operation, and the first effect means is a means provided with at least a photosensor, The first rendering means is a means provided with at least the third rendering means, the photosensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light emitting section, and the photosensor includes at least a light receiving section. Comprise The photosensor is capable of detecting a light-shielding piece, the light-shielding piece is a light-shielding piece that moves at least in accordance with the movement operation of the third rendering means, When the third effect means is in the first state, the light-shielding piece is positioned between the light receiving part and the light-emitting part, and the light-shielding piece is in the second state when the third effect means is in the second state. In some cases, the light-shielding piece is not positioned between the light-receiving unit and the light-emitting unit, the image display unit is a unit capable of displaying an image toward the front side, and the first rendering unit is the image It is a means provided on the front side of the display means, the light emitting part is a light emitting part provided on the front side of the light receiving part, and the light emitting part is a light emitting part facing the light receiving part. It is characterized by.

  According to this configuration, even if light emitted from the image display means leaks to the photosensor due to mistakes during assembly of parts or deterioration over time, the light receiving part is directed to the front side, so that the light is received by the light receiving part. In some cases, the occurrence of malfunctions can be reduced.

  (2) The first state is a state in which the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit,

  The second state is a state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit.

  (3) The image display means is means capable of executing at least image display.

  (4) The image display means is a means capable of executing at least one of a plurality of image displays, and at least one of the plurality of image displays is a first image display. The first effect means is means capable of covering at least part of the first image display from the front in the first period, and the first period is the first effect. It is at least a part of the operation period of the moving operation of the means.

(5) The game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
Moreover, the said embodiment is put together as follows.

  (1) A gaming machine including a plurality of presentation means, wherein at least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means, and at least one of the plurality of presentation means is: A second effect means, at least one of the plurality of effect means being a third effect means, the first effect means being a means capable of executing at least a movement operation, The second effect means is an image display means, the image display means is a means capable of executing at least a light emission operation, and the third effect means is a means capable of executing at least a movement operation, One effecting means is a means provided with at least a photosensor, the first effecting means is a means provided with at least the third effecting means, and the photosensor includes at least a light emitting part. Consists of The photosensor is configured to include at least a light receiving unit, the photosensor is capable of detecting a light shielding piece, and the light shielding piece is a moving operation of the third rendering means. And the light shielding piece is a light shielding piece located between the light receiving part and the light emitting part when the third rendering means is in the first state, and The light shielding piece is a light shielding piece that is not positioned between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit when the third rendering means is in the second state. The light receiving unit is configured to emit the light from the light receiving unit. The second state is a state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit, and the image display means displays an image forward. Display means, and the first rendering means can display the image. The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit provided in front of the light receiving unit, and the light emitting unit is a light emitting unit facing the light receiving unit, At least a part of the first rendering means is a light shielding means, the light shielding means is a means that can be moved at least in accordance with the moving operation of the first rendering means, and the light shielding means is the first shielding means. In this state, it is a means located between the said image display means and the said light-receiving part.

  (2) The image display means can execute at least one of a plurality of image displays, and at least one of the plurality of image displays is a first image display. The first effect means is means capable of covering at least part of the first image display from the front in the first period, and the first period is the first effect. It is at least a part of the operation period of the moving operation of the means.

(3) The game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
<< Embodiment D >>

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 161, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to Embodiment D of the present invention will be described in detail. In addition, while omitting the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiments A to C, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and hereinafter, different configurations from the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiments A to C. Only will be described.
<Non-movable body and movable body>

  First, the basic concept of the non-movable body and the movable body included in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 154 (a) to (d) are diagrams illustrating an example of a moving mode of the movable body, and FIG. 154 (e) is a diagram illustrating a modification of the shape of the movable body.

  The “movable body” included in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is an object configured to be movable, and for example, an accessory such as the shielding device 246 or the effect movable body 224 is applicable. In addition, the “non-movable body” included in the game table of the present embodiment is an object that is not configured to be movable, and corresponds to the outer frame 102, for example.

  The state shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and (1) is a state in which the movable body CB is moved to the first position. This first position is a position where the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in front view. Further, the states shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and (2) are states in which the movable body CB has moved to the second position. The second position is a position where at least a part of the movable body CB and at least a part of the non-movable body NCB overlap in a front view.

  The movable body CB of this example is at least between the first position shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and (1) and the second position shown in FIGS. It is an object configured to be movable. In a state where the movable body CB has moved to the first position, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in front view, and therefore the non-movable body NCB cannot be visually recognized by the movable body CB (or the movable body CB. Is not difficult to see compared to when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, in a state where the movable body CB is moved to the second position, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view, so that at least a part of the non-movable body NCB is caused by at least a part of the movable body CB. It becomes invisible (or difficult to see compared with the case where the movable body CB has moved to the first position). As shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and (2), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and a rectangular image CG is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is at the second position. In the moved state, the movable body CB and the image CG overlap each other when viewed from the front, so that at least a part of the image CG cannot be visually recognized by at least a part of the movable body CB (or the movable body CB moves to the first position). It is difficult to see compared to the case where

  The state shown in FIGS. 154 (b) (1) is a state in which the movable body CB has moved to a third position slightly closer to the second position than the first position. The third position is a position where at least a part of the movable body CB and at least a part of the non-movable body NCB overlap in a front view. For this reason, in a state where the movable body CB is moved to the third position, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view, so that at least a part of the non-movable body NCB is at least a part of the movable body CB. This makes it invisible (or difficult to see compared to when the movable body CB is moved to the first position).

  However, the size of the area of the non-movable body NCB that becomes invisible (or difficult to view) when the movable body CB moves to the third position is visually recognized when the movable body CB moves to the second position. It is smaller than the size of the area of the non-movable body NCB that is impossible (or difficult to see).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 154 (b) (2), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and a rectangular image CG is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is at the third position. In the moved state, the movable body CB and the image CG overlap each other when viewed from the front, so that at least a part of the image CG cannot be visually recognized by at least a part of the movable body CB (or the movable body CB moves to the first position). It is difficult to see compared to the case where

  However, the size of the region of the image CG that becomes invisible (or difficult to see) when the movable body CB moves to the third position is not visible when the movable body CB moves to the second position ( Or, it is smaller than the size of the region of the image CG that is difficult to view.

  The example shown in FIG. 154 (c) includes two movable bodies, a first movable body CB1 and a second movable body CB2. The first movable body CB1 in this example is the same object as the movable body CB shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and (b). In addition, the second movable body CB of the present example is moved to a fourth position shown in FIGS. 154 (c) (1) and a fifth position shown in FIGS. 154 (c) (2) by a motor, a pulley, etc. (not shown). The object is configured to be movable at least between the two. In the state where the second movable body CB is moved to the fourth position, the second movable body CB2 and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in front view, so the non-movable body NCB is the second movable body CB2. Is not invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the second movable body CB is moved to the fifth position).

  On the other hand, when the second movable body CB2 is moved to the fifth position, the second movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view, so that at least a part of the non-movable body NCB The movable body CB becomes invisible (or harder to see than when the second movable body CB2 is moved to the fourth position). In the state shown in FIGS. 154 (c) (1), a part of the non-movable body NCB cannot be visually recognized by the first movable body CB1 (or the first movable body CB1 moves to the first position). In addition to being difficult to view), in addition to the other part of the non-movable body NCB, the second movable body CB2 is not visible (or the second movable body CB2 is in the fourth position). Is more difficult to see than when moving to

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 154 (d) (1), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and a rectangular image CG is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is at the first position. In the moved state, the movable body CB and the image CG do not overlap in front view, so the image CG cannot be visually recognized by the movable body CB (or compared to the case where the movable body CB has moved to the second position). And difficult to see). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 154 (d) and (2), when the movable body CB is moved to the second position, the movable body CB and the image CG overlap each other in a front view. The at least part of the movable body CB makes it invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the movable body CB has moved to the first position).

The shape of the movable body CB is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIGS. 154 (e) (1), a rectangular opening CBe1 is formed in a part of the movable body CB. As shown in FIGS. 154 (e) (2), when the rectangular cutout portion CBe2 is formed at the outer edge of the movable body CB, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB (or the image CG) overlap in front view. However, in some cases, a part of the non-movable body NCB (or image CG) on the back side can be visually recognized through the opening CBe1 and the notch CBe2.
<Moving start opportunity for movable body>

  Next, the movement start opportunity of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 (a) is a diagram for describing the movement start trigger of the movable body CB.

  As an opportunity for the movable body CB according to the present embodiment to start moving, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, each control unit (for example, the main control unit 100, the first sub control unit 400, the second When the initial setting of the sub-control unit 500 and the liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434) is completed, when the operation with the ball launch handle 134 is accepted, when the operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, the game ball 131 receives the start opening or winning When the ball enters (or passes) the mouth, when the initial operation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed, when an operation by various operation units (for example, the ball lending operation button 140 and the return operation button 142) is received, etc. Can be mentioned.

  FIG. 155 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the start of movement of the movable body CB. In this example, the decorative symbol display device is arranged below the first movable body CB1 by moving the first movable body CB1 moving to the initial position downward when the power to the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. A part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visually recognized by the first movable body CB1 (or when the first movable body CB1 is moved to the initial position by covering part of 208). Is difficult to see).

In addition, during the movement of the first movable body CB1 (during the first initial operation), an operation means by one operation means (for example, the chance button 136) of the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 is received. As a result, the second movable body CB2 having a triangular shape in plan view that has moved to the initial position rotates about one side (performs a second initial operation), whereby the second movable body CB2 is moved. A part of the game board 200 that is covered by can be visually recognized. In addition, the third movable body CB3 having a fan shape in plan view that has moved to the initial position rotates around one point (performs a second initial operation), and is covered by the third movable body CB3. A part of the played game board 200 can also be visually recognized.
<Movement timing of movable body>

  Next, the moving timing of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a time chart showing an example of the moving timing of the movable body CB.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and (1), the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) is started when power is supplied to the game machine, and the movement of the first movable body is finished after a predetermined time. However, the second movable body is not moved (initial operation). In the example shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and (2), the operation by the operation unit is accepted after the end of the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The movement of the second movable body (initial operation) is started, and the movement of the second movable body (initial operation) is finished after a predetermined time.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and (3), an operation by the operation unit is accepted during the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The movement of the second movable body (initial operation) is started while continuing the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body, and the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) after a predetermined time. The movement (initial operation) of the second movable body is finished after finishing the above.

In the example shown in FIGS. 156 (b) and (1), the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) is started when power is turned on to the game machine, and the first movable body is moved (initially) after a predetermined time. (Operation) has ended, but no effects (display by the decorative symbol display device 208, light emission by the LED, sound output by the speaker, etc.) are performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 156 (b) and (2), the operation by the operation unit is accepted after the end of the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The production starts, and the production ends after a predetermined time. In the example shown in FIGS. 156 (b) and (3), an operation by the operation unit is accepted during the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The production is started while continuing the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body, and the production is finished after the movement (initial operation) of the movable body is finished after a predetermined time.
<Movement of movable body triggered by power-on>

  Next, the movement of the movable body triggered by power-on will be described using FIG. FIG. 157 is a state transition diagram showing an example of the operating state of the movable body.

  As described above, the movement start trigger of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment is not limited to power-on to the pachinko machine 100, but here, as an example, the movable body CB triggered by power-on The movement will be described. When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, power is supplied to each control unit (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434, etc.) Main processing of the control unit (main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 140, first sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. 142 (a), second control unit main processing shown in FIG. 143 (a), liquid crystal control unit (VDP ) Execution of the main process 434).

  In the main process of each control unit, the initial operation of the movable body CB is started as one of the processes in the initial setting, and each control unit shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1. For example, in the example described with reference to FIG. 155 (b), as the initial operation, the first movable body CB1 that has moved to the initial position is moved downward.

  Subsequently, the control unit that has completed the initial operation normally shifts to an operation standby state S2. In this operation standby state S2, detection signals input from various sensors connected to each control unit are detected. Here, examples of the sensor connected to the main control unit 300 include the above-described sphere detection sensor, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, and the like. Further, examples of the sensor connected to the first sub control unit 400 include the above-described shielding device sensor 430, the chance button detection sensor 426, and the like. Further, examples of the sensor connected to the second sub-control unit 500 include the above-described effect movable body sensor 424 and the like.

  On the other hand, the control unit in which the initial operation has not ended normally shifts to the error state S4. In this error state S4, after the initial operation is repeated a predetermined number of times (after retrying), if the retry fails, the operation proceeds to the operation prohibition state S5, the operation of the movable body CB is prohibited, and the retry is performed. If successful, the operation shifts to the operation standby state S2.

Moreover, the control part which detected the signal from a sensor in operation | movement waiting state S2 transfers to operation state S3. In this operating state S3, a predetermined operation (linear movement, rotational movement, etc.) is executed for each movable body CB, and when the operation is completed, the operation shifts to the operation standby state S2. For example, in the example described with reference to FIG. 155 (b), as the operation in the operation standby state, the second movable body CB2 having a triangular shape in plan view is triggered by the detection of the signal from the chance button detection sensor 426. The third movable body CB3 having a fan shape in plan view is rotated about one side as a fulcrum, and the third movable body CB3 having a fan shape in plan view is rotated about one point as a fulcrum.
<Specific example of initial operation of movable body>

  Next, a specific example of the initial operation of the movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. In this example, it is assumed that the first sub-control unit 400 performs the movement control of the movable body and the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, and the liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434 performs the display control of the decorative symbol display device 208. I do.

The initial operation (return operation) of the movable body is an operation that detects the current position of the movable body using a sensor and moves the movable body to the initial position when the current position does not match the initial position. That's it. For example, when a plurality of movable bodies are not located at the initial position, an operation of moving the movable bodies one by one to the initial position with respect to a single fluctuation of the special figure (or ordinary figure), or a plurality of movable bodies Even when one of the movable bodies is located at the initial position, an operation of moving all the movable bodies including the movable body to the initial position is also included.
<Specific example 1 of initial operation of movable body>

  FIGS. 158 (a) to (k) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The state shown in FIG. 158 (a) is a state immediately after the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 100, and each control unit starts the initial setting in the main process and shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the initial operation of the first movable body CB1 in the first sub-control unit main process and shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 In the main process of the liquid crystal control unit, the initial operation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started and the process proceeds to the power-on initial operation state S1.

  The following states shown in FIGS. 158 (b) to (c) are states in which the respective control units shift to the power-on initial operation state S1 and execute the initial operation. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1, performs control to move the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 controls the power-on initial operation state. The process proceeds to S <b> 1, and the text “active” is displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 158 (d) is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 434 has normally finished the initial operation and has shifted to the operation standby state S2. Here, when the liquid crystal control unit 434 has normally completed the initial operation, the characters “active” of the decorative symbol display device 208 are deleted, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the operation shifts to the operation standby state S2. Yes.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the power-on initial operation state S1 and continues the control of moving the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 158 (d). As shown in FIGS. 158 (e) to (g), the first movable body CB1 is controlled to move rightward in the horizontal direction. The state shown in FIG. 158 (g) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 has normally finished the initial operation and has shifted to the operation standby state S2.

  FIG. 158 (h) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to start special figure fluctuation. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 starts the decorative symbol variation display using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the instruction to start the special symbol variation from the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 158 (i) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to execute a super (SP) reach effect. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 starts the super reach effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the execution instruction of the super reach effect from the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 158 (j) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to execute a button effect. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 receives a button effect execution instruction from the first sub-control unit 400 and uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to generate a button effect (in this example, “press the button”). Character display) has started.

The state shown in FIG. 158 (k) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136.
<Specific example 2 of initial operation of movable body>

  FIGS. 158 (l) to (p) are diagrams showing a specific example 2 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The state shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to (o) is similar to the state shown in FIGS. 158 (g) to (j). In this example, in addition to the first movable body CB1, The difference is that the second movable body CB2 is provided.

The state shown in FIG. 158 (p) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136, and control to move the first movable body CB1 is performed. Not performed.
<Specific example 3 of initial operation of movable body>

  FIGS. 159 (a) to (k) are diagrams showing a specific example 3 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The state shown in FIGS. 159 (a) to (g) is similar to the state shown in FIGS. 158 (a) to (g), but in this example, in addition to the first movable body CB1, The difference is that the second movable body CB2 is provided.

  The state shown in FIG. 159 (h) is a state where the first sub control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction as shown in FIGS. 159 (h) to (i) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. Then, as shown in FIGS. 159 (j) to (k), the second movable body CB2 is controlled to move downward in the vertical direction.

In this example, the example in which the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 has been shown. For example, as shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to perform a predetermined display (in this example, an image display based on the operation) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 A predetermined display may be performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on receiving an instruction to execute a predetermined display from the first sub-control unit 400.
<Specific example 4 of initial operation of movable body>

  FIGS. 160A to 160H are diagrams showing a specific example 4 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. 160 (a) to 160 (d) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 158 (a) to (d), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 160 (e) is during a period in which the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the power-on initial operation state S1 and continues the control of moving the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction. This is a state in which detection of an operation by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) has been received. Here, based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction as shown in FIGS. Control (initial operation of the second movable body CB2) is performed, and the movement control of the first movable body CB1 is continued.

  In the subsequent period shown in FIGS. 160 (g) to (h), the first sub-control unit 400 ends the movement control of the first movable body CB1, but maintains the power-on initial operation state S1, Control to move the second movable body CB2 downward in the vertical direction (initial operation of the second movable body CB2) is continued.

  In this example, the example in which the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 has been shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 160 (i) The first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the first movable body CB1 (initial operation of the first movable body CB1), and controls the liquid crystal control unit 434 to perform predetermined control based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136. Is displayed (in this example, an image is displayed based on an operation), and the liquid crystal control unit 434 receives a predetermined display execution instruction from the first sub-control unit 400, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. You may comprise so that a predetermined display may be performed using.

With such a configuration, when the first movable body CB1 is moved onto the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first movable body CB1 overlaps with a predetermined display in a front view. At least a part of the display is invisible by at least a part of the first movable body CB1 (or difficult to see compared to the case where the first movable body CB1 is moved out of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). )become. For this reason, the visual recognition state of a predetermined display can be changed easily, and there may be a case where a production effect can be enhanced.
<Specific example 5 of initial operation of movable body>

  161A to 161H are diagrams showing a specific example 5 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. 161 (a) to FIG. 161 (g) are the same as the states shown in FIG. 159 (a) to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 161 (h) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the second movable body CB2, and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to display the above setting screen based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136. The liquid crystal control unit 434 displays the setting screen using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the instruction to execute the display of the setting screen from the first sub-control unit 400.

  With this configuration, when the second movable body CB2 is moved onto the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second movable body CB2 and the display of the setting screen overlap in front view. At least a part of the screen is invisible by at least a part of the second movable body CB2 (or difficult to see compared to the case where the second movable body CB2 is moved out of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). )become. For this reason, the visual recognition state of the display of a setting screen can be changed easily, and there may be a case where a production effect can be improved.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 155 (a)) has the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 155 (b)) and a plurality of effects. And the operation means is a means provided at a position where the player can contact, and one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect. Means (for example, the second movable body CB2 shown in FIG. 155 (b)), and one of the plurality of effect means is the second effect means (for example, shown in FIG. 155 (b)). The first movable body CB1) and the second rendering means are movable rendering means, and a confirmation operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") of the second rendering means is executed. A certain state (for example, during the movement of the first movable body CB1 (first When the interim operation)) there is an operation of the operating means, the first representation section of the confirmation operation (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation".) Is started, the second and the first operation The operations can be performed in parallel, and the second operation is continued even if the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation is being executed. It is a stand.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the second presentation means is confirmed, and if there is no problem in the operation of the second presentation means, the operation means is operated to operate the second presentation means. While the confirmation operation of the means can be performed, the confirmation operation of the first effect means can be started in parallel while the confirmation operation of the first effect means can be started and the confirmation operation of the second effect means can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the initial operation of the first directing means based on the intention of the person who performs the operation (for example, a store clerk of the game shop ) while performing the confirming operation of the second directing means (seeing the confirming operation) . In some cases, work (preparation work) at the time of opening in an amusement store can be efficiently performed.

Moreover, a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158) may be provided, and the display means may be a means for displaying a startup screen after power is turned on. One of the plurality of presentation means is a third presentation means (for example, the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 155), and the third presentation means is a movable presentation. It may be a means. In addition, when the operation unit is operated in a state where the second operation is being performed, the confirmation operation of the third effect unit may be started. Further, the second operation may be continued even when the first operation is started, and the first operation is ended after the second operation is ended. The first effect means may be a moveable effect means. The first effect means is an effect means provided in the game frame, and the first effect means is provided at a position where a player can contact the game board and a game frame. It may be a directing means. The first effect means may be a means including a light emitting means (for example, LED) capable of emitting light. Further, the first effect means may be a means including a display means capable of displaying (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208). Further, the first effect means may be means including sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting sound. Further, the second effect means may be effect means provided at a position where the player cannot contact. In addition, when the operation means is operated in a state different from the certain state, the first operation is not started, and the certain state is a state in which the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed. That is, the state different from the certain state may be a state in which the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol is executed. Further, the first operation may be an operation that may be started even if the operation means is not operated in a certain state.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes an operation means (for example, a chance button 136 illustrated in FIG. 155 (b)) and a plurality of movable bodies (for example, illustrated in FIG. 155 (b)). A game machine comprising a first movable body CB1, a second movable body CB2, a third movable body CB3) and a control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein the plurality of movable bodies At least one of the bodies is a first movable body (for example, the first movable body CB1 shown in FIG. 155 (b)), and the control means can execute at least a plurality of types of processing. And at least one of the plurality of types of processes is a first process (for example, a process of rotating the second movable body CB2 and the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 155 (b)). And at least one of the plurality of types of processing is A second process, wherein the second process is a process including at least a process of initially operating the first movable body (for example, a process of moving the first movable body CB1 downward); The means is capable of executing at least the first process when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means is means capable of at least starting execution of the first process during execution of the second process.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first movable body can be initially operated based on the operation by the operating means. Therefore, the first moving body can be operated based on the intention of the person who performs the operation (for example, a shop clerk). The initial operation of one movable body can be confirmed, and the operation can be confirmed more safely than in the past, so that a gaming machine characterized by the initial operation can be provided.

  Note that the “first condition” according to the present invention may not be satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may not be satisfied after a power failure recovery without RAM clearing. Even before the time has elapsed, if the condition is satisfied once, the condition may not be satisfied again within the predetermined time, and may not be satisfied when the symbol variation starts. Also good.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, the second movable body CB2 or the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 155 (b)), and the first movable body The one process may be a process including at least a process of operating the second movable body.

  With such a configuration, in addition to the initial operation of the first movable body, the second movable body can be operated, so that the operation confirmation of the first and second movable bodies can be performed simultaneously. , May improve convenience. In addition, when operating a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body simultaneously, both may be contactable and both may be unable to contact.

  The first movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact (for example, inside the glass frame), and the second movable body is a position where the player can contact. The movable body may be provided (for example, outside the glass frame, on the lower plate).

  The second movable body is a second operation means (for example, a second chance button separate from the ball launching handle 134, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, and the chance button 136). May be. In addition, a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, and the first processing is performed on the display means for a first display (for example, a display corresponding to an operation by the chance button 136, a touch operation on the touch panel). It may be a process including at least a process of executing a corresponding display).

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of processes is a third process, and the control unit starts at least the third process when the third condition is satisfied. The third condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated, and the third process may be a process related to an effect.

  The control means is means for starting execution of at least the second process when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is when power is supplied to the control means. In addition, there may be a condition that may be satisfied. In addition, the control unit may start the initial operation based on a command received from another control unit, or without receiving a command from another control unit when power is supplied. The initial operation may be started. Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position at least operable by a player (for example, a front side of a pachinko machine or a slot machine).

  The gaming machine includes a control unit, wherein the control unit is a unit capable of executing at least a plurality of processes, and at least one of the plurality of processes is a first process, At least one of the plurality of processes is a second process, the first process is a process that executes at least an initial operation, and the second process is a process that executes at least an operation. The control means is means for starting at least the second process in the first period, and the first period may be a period in which the first process is executed. .

  In addition, an operation means is provided, the operation means is provided at a position at least operable by the player, and the second process is an operation started when the first condition is satisfied. The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when an operation by the operation means is received.

  In addition, a detection unit is provided, the detection unit is a unit provided at a position where the player can contact at least, and the second process is an operation started when the second condition is satisfied. The second condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when contact with the detection unit is detected.

  In addition, a plurality of movable means are provided, at least one of the plurality of movable means is a first movable means, and the first movable means is provided at a position at which the player can contact at least. And the second process may be an operation of moving the first movable means.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of movable means is a second movable means, and the second movable means is a means provided at a position where the player cannot contact, and the first This process may be an operation of moving the second movable means.

The first process is a process that is started when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when power is supplied to the control means. There may be. The second process may be an initial operation. The second process may be an effect. Further, the initial operation may be an operation including at least a return operation after the return from the power interruption.
<< Embodiment E >>

Next, with reference to FIG. 162 to FIG. 176, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to Embodiment D of the present invention will be described in detail. In addition, while omitting the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiments A to C, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and hereinafter, different configurations from the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiments A to C. Only will be described.
<Basic concept>

  First, the basic concept of control that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining a basic concept of control that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

The gaming table according to the present embodiment is a gaming table including a door, a movable body, and a rendering means, and the movable body is capable of performing at least a first operation, The operation is an operation in which the movable body moves to a first position. The first operation is an operation that is executed when the door body is opened. An effect can be executed, and at least one of the plural types of effects is a first effect, and the first effect is determined by the movable body being independent of the first operation. The first effect may be executed after the movable body is moved to the first position by the first operation. It is a game stand characterized by being a production.
<Basic concept / door, movable body, direction means>

  As the “door body” according to the present embodiment, the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 1 (the door body attached to the front surface of the main body 104 via the hinge portion 112), or the main body 104 shown in FIG. A door body rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. Also referred to as an “inner frame”), a door body 502 shown in FIG.

  The “movable body” according to the present embodiment can execute at least the first operation. Examples of the “movable body” according to the present embodiment include the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. Examples include an effect button 506 shown in FIG. 163 (b), a glass button 504 shown in FIG. 162 and FIG. 163, and the like.

The “production means” according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of kinds of effects. Examples of the “production means” according to the present embodiment include a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker 120, various lamps, and the like. , Various LEDs, production movable body 224, and the like.
<Basic concept / First operation of movable body>

  FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation (first operation) of the movable body. The “first operation” that can be executed by the “movable body” according to the present embodiment is an operation that is performed when the movable body moves to the first position and the door body is opened. ".

  In the “first operation”, for example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (a-1) and (a-2), the glass button 504 has the initial position (“normal position”) shown in FIG. Operation) to move to a position other than the initial position shown in (a-2) (first position, also referred to as “protruding position”), and the glass button 504 is the initial position shown in FIG. The operation includes moving the glass button 504 from a position other than the position (also referred to as “projecting position”) to an initial position (first position; also referred to as “normal position”) shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the “first operation”, as shown in FIGS. (B-1) and (b-2), the effect button 506 has the initial position (“normal position”) shown in FIG. Operation) to move to a position other than the initial position shown in FIG. 2B-2 (first position, also referred to as “protruding position”), and the effect button 506 is the initial position shown in FIG. This includes an operation in which the effect button 506 moves from a position other than the position (also referred to as “protruding position”) to an initial position (first position; also referred to as “normal position”) shown in FIG.

Further, in the “first operation”, as shown in FIG. 4C-1, the movable body CB1 is moved from a position detectable by the sensor S11 to a position undetectable by the sensor S11 (first position). An operation of moving and an operation of moving the movable body CB1 from a position undetectable by the sensor S11 to a position detectable by the sensor S11 (first position) are included. Further, as shown in FIG. 2C-2, the movable body CB2 is not detectable by the first sensor S21 and the second sensor S22 from the position detectable by the second sensor S22 (first position). ) And an operation in which the movable body CB2 moves from a position undetectable by the first sensor S21 and the second sensor S22 to a position (first position) detectable by the first sensor S21. It is.
<Basic concept / first production of production means>

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the “first effect” that can be performed by the effect means according to the present embodiment is “after the movable body has moved to the first position regardless of the first operation, The effect that may be executed ", as shown in FIG. 5B, is the effect that may be executed after the movable body has moved to the first position by the first operation. .

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 5A, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved to the second position (protruding position) by the pushing operation by the player regardless of the opening of the door body (door body 502). ) Is an example in which an effect is executed after being moved from the first position (normal position). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 5B, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved from the second position (projecting position) to the first position (initial stage) by the first action (the action accompanying opening of the door body 502). This is an example in which an effect is executed after moving to (position).
<Production control (Example 1)>

  Next, a specific example of effect control that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 164 and FIG. 165 are diagrams showing the flow of effect control according to the first embodiment in time series. 164 (a) to 165 (o), the left side of each figure shows a front view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 508, and various display devices 510, and on the right side thereof, The side view of the door body 502 and the glass button 504 of a game stand (pachinko machine 100) is shown (the following examples are also the same).

  This example is triggered by the fact that the movable body (glass button 504) moved to the second position (projecting position) is moved to the first position (initial position) by the pushing operation by the player. This is an example in which the effect (effect by the effect movable body 508) is executed.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (a), a symbol stop display (a special symbol 1 stop display, a special symbol 2 stop display, a decorative symbol stop display) is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and various display devices 510. In addition, the movable body (glass button 504) and the rendering movable body 508 are held at the first position (initial position).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the symbol variation display (special diagram 1 variation display, decorative symbol variation display) is started, and based on the determination result of the special symbol variation game (in this example, jackpot) At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the reach display (display of “decoration 4- (variation) −decoration 4”) is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. .

  Although the aspect of reach production is not particularly limited, in this example, the characters “SP (super) reach” are displayed at the timing shown in FIG. In addition to performing a preparatory effect (effect performed before a glass button effect to be described later) over the period shown in FIG. 2, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved from the first position (initial position) to the second position (projecting position). The glass button 504 can be pushed in by being moved (tilted).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 5H, the “glass button effect” related to the glass button 504 (in this example, the appearance of the glass button 504 in the state moved to the second position (protruding position) is imitated. The image display, the character display “push in!”, And the arrow image indicating the operation direction of the glass button 504) are started, and the operation reception of the glass button 504 is started.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 6J, an operation of pushing the glass button 504 by the player is performed within the operation reception valid period of the glass button 504 (for example, within 10 seconds from the start of the glass button effect), The movable body (glass button 504) is moved from the second position (projecting position) to the first position (initial position).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), the glass button effect is finished because the operation reception valid period of the glass button 504 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (l), the movable body (glass button 504 is finished. ) Has been moved to the first position (initial position), and the first production is started.

  Although the aspect of the first effect is not particularly limited, in this example, the light output means (LED) built in the effect movable body 508 is turned on to change the light emission mode (color in this example) of the effect movable body 508. At the same time, the effect movable body 508 is moved from the first position (initial position, which does not cover the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208) to the second position (part of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208). After moving to the cover position, an effect of returning to the first position (initial position) is executed again.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (m), after performing the effect of returning the movable body (glass button 504) to the first position (initial position), at the timing shown in FIG. After the “fluctuation fluctuation”, the big hit confirmation display is performed at the timing shown in FIG.

  In this example, the first effect is started after the glass button effect ends. However, at the same time (or immediately after) the movable body (glass button 504) moves to the first position (initial position). One production may be started. In this example, the light emission mode of the production movable body 508 is changed at the start of the first production, but the production movable body 508 may be moved without changing the light emission mode. In addition, the light emission mode of the effect movable body 508 is maintained in the same light emission mode from the start of the first effect until the big hit confirmation display, but at the same time the effect movable body 508 is returned to the first position (initial position). The light emission mode may be returned to the light emission mode before starting the first effect.

In this example, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved to the first position (initial position) based on the player's operation of pushing the glass button 504. The movable body (glass button 504) moves to the first position (initial position) based on the fact that a store clerk or the like touches the glass button 504 during maintenance of the game stand and pushes the glass button 504 unconsciously. In such a case, the first effect may be executed by performing the same control.
<Production control (Example 2)>

  FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating the flow of the effect control according to the second embodiment in time series. In this example, since neither the opening of the door body 502 nor the pushing operation of the movable body (glass button 504) by the player was performed within a predetermined time, the movable body moved to the second position (projecting position). In this example, the (glass button 504) is forcibly moved to the first position (initial position) and the first effect (effect by the effect movable body 508) is not executed.

  Specifically, after starting the same glass button effect as the effect control (Example 1) at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, within a predetermined time (for example, within the operation reception valid period of the glass button 504). When the opening of the door body 502 and the pushing operation of the movable body (glass button 504) by the player were not performed, the button effect ended and moved at the timing shown in FIG. The body (glass button 504) is moved toward the first position (initial position), and the movable body (glass button 504) is moved to the first position (initial position) at the timing shown in FIG. I am letting.

In this example, the movement of the movable body (glass button 504) to the first position (initial position) is based on the opening of the doorable body 502 or the pushing operation of the movable body (glass button 504) by the player. Since the movable body (glass button 504) has moved to the first position (initial position), the decoration design is not started at the timing shown in FIG. After the “swing fluctuation” is performed, the big hit confirmation display is performed at the timing shown in FIG.
<Production control (Example 3)>

  FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the third embodiment in time series. In this example, after the movable body (glass button 504) moved to the second position (projecting position) is moved to the first position (initial position) when the door body 502 is opened, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved. ) Is moved to the first position (initial position), and the first effect (effect by the effect movable body 508) is executed.

Specifically, after starting the same glass button effect as the effect control (Example 1) at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, within a predetermined time (for example, within the operation reception valid period of the glass button 504). The door body 502 is opened by a store clerk (not shown) at the timing shown in FIG. And in the period shown to the figure (b)-the figure (d), based on the door body 502 having been opened, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved from the second position (protrusion position) to the first. It is moved to the position (initial position). In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the first effect is started when the movable body (glass button 504) is moved to the first position (initial position).
<Production control (Example 4)>

  FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the fourth embodiment in time series. In this example, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved toward the first position (initial position) based on the opening of the door body 502, but the first position (initial position) is reached. The movable body (glass) moved to the second position (projection position) because the player could not move completely and the player did not push the movable body (glass button 504) within a predetermined time. This is an example in which the button 504) is forcibly moved to the first position (initial position) and the first effect (effect by the effect movable body 508) is not executed.

  Specifically, after starting the same button effect as the effect control (Example 1) at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, the same effect within a predetermined time (for example, within the operation reception valid period of the glass button 504). The door 502 is opened by a store clerk (not shown) at the timing shown in FIG. And in the period shown to the figure (b)-the figure (d), based on the door body 502 having been opened, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved from the second position (protrusion position) to the first. It is moved toward the position (initial position).

  However, the movable body (glass button 504) cannot be moved to the first position (initial position) due to the movable body (glass button 504) being caught by another member, etc., within a predetermined time (for example, When the player does not press the movable body (glass button 504) during the valid operation period of the glass button 504, the button effect ends at the timing shown in FIG. At the same time, the movable body (glass button 504) is forcibly moved to the first position (initial position).

In this example, the movement of the movable body (glass button 504) to the first position (initial position) is based on the opening of the door body 502 or the pushing operation of the movable body (glass button 504) by the player. Therefore, without starting the first production triggered by the movement of the movable body (glass button 504) to the first position (initial position), at the timing shown in FIG. After the “fluctuation fluctuation”, the big hit confirmation display is performed at the timing shown in FIG.
<Production control (Example 5)>

  FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the fifth embodiment in time series. In this example, in a state where the movable body (glass button 504) is located at the first position (initial position), the “normal button effect” related to the operation means (normal button 512) is executed, and the operation means This is an example in which the first effect (the effect by the effect movable body 508) is executed when an operation is performed.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the “normal button effect” related to the normal button 512 over the period shown in FIG. An image display imitating the appearance of the button 512, a character display “Press!”, And an image display of an arrow indicating the operation direction of the normal button 512) are performed.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6G during the normal button production, the first production starts at the timing shown in FIG. 10J triggered by the player pressing the normal button 512. doing.
<Production control (Example 6)>

  FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the sixth embodiment in time series. In this example, in the state where the movable body (glass button 504) is positioned at the first position (initial position), the “deca button effect” related to the second operation means (deca button 514) is executed, and the second This is an example in which the first effect (the effect by the effect movable body 508) is executed when an operation by the (deca button 514) is performed on the operation means.

  Specifically, after the reach effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 11A, the “deca button effect” (related to the deca button 514) over the period shown in FIG. In this example, an image display imitating the appearance of the deca button 514, a character display of “Press!” And an arrow image display indicating the operation direction of the deca button 514) are performed. In this example, the deca button 514 is moved (protruded) from the first position (initial position) to the second position (protrusion position) at the timing shown in FIG.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 6G during the big button production, the first production is started at the timing shown in FIG. 10J triggered by the player pressing down the big button 514. Yes.

In this example, the example of performing the same effect as the above-described effect control (Example 5) is shown as the first effect, but the contents of the first effect are different between the effect button 512 and the big button 514. For example, in the case of the production button 512, the production movable body 508 may not be lit, and in the case of the deca button 514, the production movable body 5008 may be lit. Further, the movement of the effect movable body 508 may be changed between the effect button 512 and the big button 514.
<Production control (Example 7)>

  FIG. 171 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the seventh embodiment in time series. In this example, while the movable body (glass button 504) is located at the first position (initial position), the deca button effect related to the second operation means (deca button 514) is executed, but within a predetermined time. When the operation by the second operation means (deca button 514) is not performed (for example, within the operation acceptance valid period of the deca button 514), the deca button 514 is moved to the first position (initial position) and the first This is an example in which an effect (effect by the effect movable body 508) is executed.

  Specifically, after the reach effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 10A, the deca button effect is performed over the period shown in FIGS. The deca button 514 is moved (protruded) from the first position (initial position) to the second position (protruding position) at the timing shown in FIG.

However, in this example, since the operation with the deca button 514 was not performed within a predetermined time (for example, within the operation acceptance valid period of the deca button 514), after the deca button effect was ended at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. (J), the deca button 514 is moved to the first position (initial position) and the first effect is started. In this example, the first effect is shown based on the movement of the deca button 514 to the first position (initial position). However, the deca button 514 moves to the first position (initial position). May be configured not to start the first effect.
<Production control (Example 8)>

  FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the eighth embodiment in time series. In this example, “deca button effect” is performed in a state where the movable body (glass button 504) is located at the first position (initial position), but within a predetermined time (for example, the operation acceptance valid period of the deca button 514) If the second operating means (deca button 514) is not operated on the inside), after the deca button effect is moved to the first position (initial position) during the deca button effect, This is an example in which an effect (effect by the effect movable body 508) is executed.

  Specifically, after starting the reach effect at the timing shown in FIG. 10A, the deca button effect is performed over the period shown in FIG. The deca button 514 is moved (protruded) from the first position (initial position) to the second position (protruding position) at the timing shown in FIG.

However, in this example, since the operation with the deca button 514 was not performed within a predetermined time (for example, within the operation acceptance valid period of the deca button 514), the deca button 514 is turned on at the timing shown in FIG. It moves to the first position (initial position), and the deca button effect ends at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, the first effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 5K after the end of the deca button effect (based on the movement of the deca button 514 to the first position (initial position)). In this example, the first effect is shown based on the movement of the deca button 514 to the first position (initial position). However, the deca button 514 moves to the first position (initial position). May be configured not to start the first effect.
<Production control (Example 9)>

  FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the ninth embodiment in time series. In this example, the deca button effect is executed with the movable body (glass button 504) positioned at the first position (initial position), and the deca button 514 is moved to the first position (initial position) during the deca button effect. This is an example in which the first effect (the effect by the effect movable body 508) is executed after the end of the deca button effect when the operation by the second operation means (deca button 514) is performed.

  Specifically, after the reach effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 10A, the deca button effect is performed over the period shown in FIGS. The deca button 514 is moved (protruded) from the first position (initial position) to the second position (protruding position) at the timing shown in FIG.

Also, in this example, after the deca button 514 is moved to the first position (initial position) at the timing shown in FIG. The operation with the deca button 514 is performed, and the deca button effect is finished at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 11L after the end of the deca button effect, the first effect is started (based on the operation with the deca button 514). Note that, in this example, an example is shown in which the first effect is started based on the operation performed with the deca button 514, but the first is based on the movement of the deca button 514 to the first position (initial position). It may be configured not to start the production.
<Production control (Example 10)>

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the tenth embodiment in time series. In this example, the player pushes the movable body (glass button 504) within a predetermined time (for example, within the valid period for accepting the operation of the glass button 504), but the movable body (glass button 504) is in the middle. This is an example in which the first effect (effect by the effect movable body 508) is not executed because the position has been moved only to the position (position between the second position (protruding position) and the first position (initial position)).

  Specifically, after starting the glass button effect at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (a), the movable body (glass button 504) by the player within a predetermined time (for example, within the operation reception valid period of the deca button 514). As shown in FIGS. 3C and 3D, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved to the intermediate position (second position (projecting position) and first position (initial position). It has been moved only to the position between).

  Further, in this example, based on the fact that the door body 502 is opened at the timing shown in FIG. 5E after the end of the glass button effect, the period shown in FIG. Thus, the movable body (glass button 504) is forcibly moved from the intermediate position to the first position (initial position). In this example, the movement of the movable body (glass button 504) to the first position (initial position) is not the movement from the second position (projection position), but the movement from the intermediate position. The first effect is not performed when the body (glass button 504) has moved to the first position (initial position).

  In this example, the movable body (glass button 504) is moved from the intermediate position to the first position as shown in (g) based on the door 502 being opened at the timing shown in (e). Although an example of forcibly moving to the position (initial position) is shown, even when the door body 502 is opened at the timing shown in FIG. 5E, as shown in FIG. (Glass button 504) may be maintained at an intermediate position.

In addition, when the movable body (glass button 504) can move only to an intermediate position, a process of repeatedly moving the moving body in the original moving direction after moving it by a predetermined amount in the direction opposite to the original moving direction (retry) If the movable body (glass button 504) cannot be moved to the target position within a predetermined time (for example, during the glass button production) even if this retry process is performed, the first production is performed. It may be configured not to execute.
<Production control (Example 11)>

  FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating a flow of effect control according to the eleventh embodiment in time series. In this example, an attempt was made to move the movable body (glass button 504) from the first position (initial position) to the second position (projection position), but the intermediate position (second position (projection position) and first position). This is an example in which the first effect (the effect by the effect movable body 508) is not executed because it can only move to one position (position between the initial positions).

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 5B during SP reach, the glass button effect is started and the movable body (glass button 504) is moved from the first position (initial position) to the second position (projecting). In this example, the movable body (glass button) during the glass button production shown in FIGS. (C) to (f) and after the glass button production shown in FIG. 504) can only be moved to an intermediate position. For this reason, in this example, the first effect is not performed.

When the movable body (glass button 504) can move only to the intermediate position, a process of repeatedly moving the moving body in the original moving direction after moving it by a predetermined amount in the direction opposite to the original moving direction (retry) If the movable body (glass button 504) cannot be moved to the target position within a predetermined time (for example, during the glass button production) even if this retry process is performed, the first production is performed. It may be configured not to execute.
<Production control (variation)>

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating a variation of the effect control according to the first to eleventh embodiments. A switch 518 shown in FIG. 11A is a switch provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player, such as the back of the game table or the inside of the door body, and is operated only by a specific person such as a store clerk of the game store. It is a possible switch. In the example shown in FIGS. (A-1) to (a-4), the protruding amount (inclination angle) of the movable body (glass button 504) can be set by the operation of the switch 518.

  Although the detection timing of the set value by the switch 518 is not particularly limited, for example, the set value may be acquired only once in the initial setting after the power is turned on, and the protruding amount of the movable body may be adjusted based on the acquired set value. Then, it may be configured such that the set value is periodically acquired in the main loop process or timer interrupt process of the control means, and the protruding amount of the movable body can be adjusted at an arbitrary timing based on the acquired set value.

  (A-3) shows the mode of the movable body (glass button 504) when the projection amount is set to 10 by the switch 518. FIG. The mode of the movable body (glass button 504) when the amount is set to 5 is shown. The protruding amount of the movable body (glass button 504) may be displayed on the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208).

  FIG. 2B-2 is a diagram showing a modification of the first effect shown in FIG. 1B-1 and moves the effect movable body 508 from the first position to the second position. At the same time, display (effect display) by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Depending on various conditions, the effect shown in (b-1) of the figure and the effect shown in (b-2) of the figure may be used properly. For example, when the above-described normal button 512 is pressed. May execute the effect shown in FIG. 6B-1 and execute the effect shown in FIG. 5B-2 when the deca button 514 is pressed. In addition, when the determination result of the special figure variable game is the first determination result, the effect shown in (b-1) is executed, and the determination result of the special figure variable game is the first determination result. In the case of the second success / failure determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the result, the effect shown in FIG.

  Further, (c-1) and (c-2) in the same figure are diagrams showing a modified example of the first effect, and in the example shown in (c-1), the effect movable body 508 is shown. The first effect display by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed while maintaining the first position, and in the example shown in FIG. 2C-2, the effect movable body 508 is maintained while maintaining the first position. A second effect display is performed by the symbol display device 208. According to various conditions, the effect shown in (c-1) and the effect shown in (c-2) may be properly used, as shown in (b-1) and (b-2). It is the same as the production shown in FIG.

  In addition, although not shown, the mode of the operating means (for example, (moving to the first position (normal position), moving to the second position (projecting position), moving to the intermediate position) State, rotating state, non-rotating state, vibrating state, non-vibrating state) and the production related to the operating means (for example, production button production, big button production) For example, in the state where the operating means is moved to the first position (normal position) (or intermediate position), the operating means is in the second position (projecting position) as an effect related to the operating means. An image representing the state of movement may be displayed, or the operation means may be displayed as an effect related to the operation means while the operation means is moved to the second position (protruding position) (or intermediate position). The means has moved to the first position (normal position) Image representing a status may be displayed.

  In addition, an image representing a state where the operating unit is not rotating may be displayed as an effect related to the operating unit while the operating unit is rotating, or an operation may be performed while the operating unit is not rotating. As an effect related to the means, an image representing a state where the operating means is rotating may be displayed. In addition, as an effect related to the operation means in a state where the operation means is vibrating, an image representing a state where the operation means is not vibrating may be displayed. As an effect related to the means, an image representing a state where the operating means is vibrating may be displayed.

  In this way, as an effect related to the operation means, an effect different from the actual mode of the operation means (a contradictory effect) is provided, thereby providing an unprecedented effect and enhancing the interest of the game. There are cases where it is possible.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this embodiment includes a main body (for example, the main body 104 shown in FIG. 1) to which a game board can be attached, and a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body. Body (for example, front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 1, door body 502 shown in FIG. 162), movable body (for example, glass button 504 shown in FIGS. 162 to 165, etc.) provided on the door body, and production Means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500), wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine, the movable body is a movable body that can be operated by a player, and The means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect by an effect movable body 508 as shown in FIG. 164). Yes, when the opening of the door is detected, The player is configured to be able to execute control to move the body to an initial position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 163 (a-1)), and even if the opening of the door body is not detected, the player The movable body is configured to be moved to an initial position by the operation of, and when the opening of the door body is detected and control for moving the movable body to the initial position is executed, the first effect is performed. A gaming table configured to execute, and configured to execute the first effect even when the movable body is moved to an initial position by a player's operation. .

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first effect that is executed after the movable body has moved can be executed under a plurality of conditions. There may be a case where a gaming table with a can be provided.

  The first effect may be an effect executed when the movable body is moved to an initial position in a state where the operation of the movable body is received. Moreover, when the period which receives operation of the said movable body is complete | finished, you may be comprised so that control which moves this movable body to an initial position is executable. Further, the position of the movable body (hereinafter referred to as “standby position”) in a state where the operation of the movable body is received may be configured to be changeable. Further, the standby position may be one position (for example, a protruding position shown in FIG. 163 (a-2)) different from an initial position among positions where the movable body can move. In addition, the first effect may be executed in a first mode (for example, movement of the effect movable body 508 and a change in the light emission mode of the effect movable body 508). (For example, only the movement of the effect movable body 508) may be executed, and the first aspect and the second aspect may be different.

  Further, the protrusion amount of the glass button may be set to 0 (no protrusion). In addition, when an operation by operating means other than the glass button (for example, a switch provided at a position (both frame and / or substrate) operable by the player) is received, the glass button is moved to the second position (projecting You may comprise so that it may return to a 1st position (initial position) from a position. In addition to the glass button, a movable body that can protrude from the frame may be provided.

  Moreover, the setting which makes a movable body impossible to project may be possible. When an operation by operating means (for example, a switch provided at a position (both frame and / or board) operable by a player) is accepted, the movable body is moved from the second position (position other than the initial position). You may comprise so that it may return to a 1st position (initial position).

  The operation of the movable body may be completely the same as the operation of the glass button or other movable body, or at least a part of the operation may be the same. For example, the movable body moves to the second position (protruding position) when the door body is opened while moving from the first position (initial position) to the second position (protruding position). However, when an operation (release operation) is performed by the operating means while moving from the first position (initial position) to the second position (projecting position), the second position (projecting position) ) (Or return to the first position (initial position)).

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming table according to the present invention includes a launching device that launches a ball into a predetermined gaming area, a winning opening configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, and a ball that has entered the winning opening. Detecting means for detecting, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detecting means detects a ball, and a variable display device for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a game ball enters the winning opening and wins With this as an opportunity, the variable display device is suitable for a pachinko machine that displays a stop after the symbols are changed and notifies the game state transition.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, there is a case where the game width can be expanded by applying the contents described in one configuration to the configurations of other examples and embodiments among the plurality of configurations described in the examples and embodiments. is there.

  Further, in this specification, when there is a description that “A can execute at least B”, the description is “A executes only B”, “A always executes B” The meaning of at least one of is included. Further, in the present specification, when the descriptions “A can execute at least B” and “C can execute at least D” are written together, “A executes only B, And C executes only D ”,“ A executes only B, and C always executes D ”,“ A always executes B, and C performs D At least one of the meanings of “execute only” and “A always executes B and C always execute D”.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button 208 Decoration pattern display apparatus 224 Production | movement movable body 246 Shielding apparatus 300 Main control part 400 1st sub-control part 434 Liquid crystal control part (VDP)
500 Second sub-control unit 502 Door body 504 Glass button 506 Production button 508 Production movable body 518 switch

Claims (11)

Operation means;
A plurality of directing means;
A game machine equipped with
The operation means is provided at a position where the player can contact,
One rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means,
One effect means of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means,
The second effect means is a moveable effect means,
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a state in which the confirmation operation of the second rendering means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”) is being performed, the confirmation operation of the first rendering means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”). referred to as the "first operation".) it is started,
The first operation and the second operation can be performed in parallel.
Even if the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation is being executed, the second operation is continued.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
A display means,
The display means is means for displaying a startup screen after power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
One effect means of the plurality of effect means is a third effect means,
The third effect means is a moveable effect means,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
When there is an operation of the operation means in a state where the second operation is being executed, a confirmation operation of the third rendering means is started.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4 ,
The first effect means is a moveable effect means,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5 ,
Game board,
A game frame,
With
The first effect means is effect means provided in the game frame,
The first effect means is effect means provided at a position where the player can contact,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6 ,
The first effect means is an effect means including any one of a light emitting means capable of emitting light and a sound output means capable of outputting sound.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7 ,
The second effect means is effect means provided at a position where the player cannot contact,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8 ,
When the operation means is operated in a state different from the certain state, the first operation is not started,
The certain state is a state in which the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed,
The state different from the certain state is a state in which the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9 , Comprising:
The first operation is an operation that may be started even if there is no operation of the operation means in a certain state.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10 , Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.